i i ii iiiipi vi 11 1* 1 1 > r i i »>i r ii)>rt H i V < <^>V H i >i M i. *i . (» iii t »r»Mi- ■Ammmmmmxm' fa. est S'fmk'i _____ ih _ 1 towmm W w' -imwiiii ---»■ -I--- nii'iMii'iiii w • ' mwk_ •?■ " w' ; CORNELL UNIVERSITY LIBRARY Cornell University Library arV16198 An elementary grammar of the German lang 3 1924 031 269 842 olin.anx Cornell University Library The original of this book is in the Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924031269842 WOMAN'S SERIES FOR THE MODERN LANGUAGES. AN ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE EXEECISES, READINGS, CONVERSATIONS, PARADIGMS, AND A VOCABULARY. By JAMES H. W ORMAN, A.M., NON-RESIDENT PROFESSOR OF MODERN HISTORY AND LANGUAGE AT LAWRENCE UNIVERSITY. A. S. BARNES & COMPANY, NEW YORK AND CHICAGO. WORMAN'S SERIES FOE THE MODERN LANGUAGES O- E K. Iwl .A. I?T . A Short Course ill German, intended for our common schools. (In preparation.) An Elementary German Grammar. An easy introduction to the language. 12mo. 300 pages. A Complete German Grammar. l2mo. 591 pages. An Elementary German Reader, intended for beginners in German. 12mo. 145 pages. A Collegiate German Reader, or Introduction to German Literature, with references to the German Grammars of Worman and Campbell, and an adequate Dictionary. 12mo. 525 pages. A Manual of German Conversation— the "Berliner Echo." For practice in the langnage as spoken in Berlin, with Vocabulary of words and idioms. 203 pages. FRENCH. A Short Course in French, on the same plan as the German. (In preparation.) An Elementary French Grammar, on the same plan as the Elementary German Grammar. (In preparation.) A Complete French Grammar, on the same plan as the Complete German Grammar. (In preparation.) An Elementary and Collegiate French Reader, on the same plan as the German. (In preparation.) A Manual of French Conversation— the " Echo de Paris." Plan of the " Berliner Echo." 212 pages. Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1868, by A. S. BARNES & CO., In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. TO THE «ev. JOHN McOLINTOCK, D.D., LL.D., THIS LITTLE VOLUME is most affectionately inscribed Bt The Author. PREFACE TO THE TENTH EDITION. This little volume was prepared with special regard to the wants of beginners. It has been carefully revised, and in its present form contains many corrections and additions which constant investiga- tion of the language, daily experience in the class-room, a continual study of the wants of the learner, and the observation of other instruc- tors have suggested. The leading principles of German Grammar are concisely stated and illustrated by a series of Exercises for oral and written translation, accompanied by Conversations in German, followed in the latter part of the work by a series of Beading Lessons, all of which are intended to enable the pupil to accomplish his tasks with ease, as he advances, and lay the foundation for a systematic knowledge of German. It is the author's opinion that any one who thoroughly masters this little book will gain a sufficient knowledge of etymology and syntax for • all practical purposes. The method of presenting the etymology of the language in frag- ments, so generally adopted in elementary works, has been altogether discarded. Each new form introduced, is given completely. Thus the articles are given through all the study of both numbers, the substan- tives, etc., through all the cases of one number, the verbs through the different persons of each tense ; so that the learner may see at once the various changes which they severally undergo, may learn and com- prehend them in a few minuteB, and thus save hours of labor, as well as infinite vexation, and at the same time make the progress easy and natural. The difficulties of pronunciation also are greatly diminished by the method of weaving into the introductory lessons the rules of pronuncia- tion with practical exercises under each, thus causing theory and prac- tice to proceed side by side from the very hour the study of the language is taken up. To make the book also useful for reference, and to meet the wants of those who can tolerate nothing short of a strictly systematic course, there is a synopsis of German Grammar added, as Part III, in which the inflection of words is treated briefly, but yet with completeness. Vl PREFACE. It is hoped that the classification of the nouns and verbs, especially of the irregular verbs, and the alphabetical lists of the latter, of the verbf reflexive in German and not in English, of the separable and inseparable verbs, of the intransitive and neuter verbs conjugated with fcin in Ger' man, and in English with to heme, of the prepositions, and the extensiv* German-English and English-German vocabulary, will also be an aid t« the learner. To those who desire an Elementary Reader to accompany this gram' mar, the author recommends his own Elementary German Eeadel which contains Notes and References to this Grammar, and a carefully prepared Vocabulary. To supply the wants of such persons as desire a more advanced course, the author has prepared a complete German Grammar after the plan of Gaspey's English Conversation-Grammar (adopted by Otto), also a •JEteader strictly progressive (of which Part I. contains shorter selections from the modern German classics, and Part II. Schiller's Jungfrau and Goethe's Iphigenie, complete), with an adequate dictionary and notes referring to his own grammars and to those of Woodbury, Otto, and Campbell. The author's acknowledgments are due to the late eminent scholar, Rev. Dr. H. M. Johnson, President of Dickinson College, for much valuable advice in the preparation of the work. He desires also to ex- press his obligation to Prof. McCord, of Washington Seminary, to Prof. E. Baur, of Ann Arbor (Mich.) Union School, to Charlton T. Lewis, of the " Evening Post," and to Prof. Hermann Sjoberg, for their frequent suggestions during the revision of the book. James H. Worman. Lawrence University, May, 1873. CONTENTS. Page Letters op the Alphabet 11 Writing Alphabet 12 PART I. ELEMENTARY EXERCISES. Lesson I. — Pronunciation of the simple vowels. The definite article. Present singular of 1) it 6 e n IS II. — " of the double vowels. Adjectives before and after the subject Object of the verb 15 III.— " of the modified vowels. Accusative of feminine and neuter nouns. Plural of the present of iaiett 16 IV. — " of the diphthongs. The indefinite article. Determinative and possessive adjectives. ... 17 V. — " of SB, £), 3> and X. Past participle in compound tenses. Accusative of nouns. Present of fe itt 19 VI.— " ofEandfl 20 VII.— " of©and3 21 VIII. — " of ©, § and 3. Determinative and interroga- tive adjectives. Singular of masculine and neuter nouns in el, er and en 22 IX. — " of 3$ and SB. Plural of possessive adjectives. 24 X.— " of %, 8, 3», 9J, X, D and St. Declension of mas- culine and neuter nouns not ending in e, el, er, en, djen and letn .„ 26 XL— " of the &) 28 XII. — " of ct, ng, ffand p. Singular of feminine nouns 29 Viii CONTENTS. Lesson **& XIII. — Pronunciation of 9)$ and 95f. Declension of proper names. . . 31 XIV.— " of ©dj, f» and (1 33 XV.— " of^andfc 34 XVI. — On the accent. Simple words. Monosyllables 36 XVII. " Derivatives. Accessory syllables. Prefixes. . 37 XVIII.— " Suffixes . . 39 XIX " Examples with prefixes and suffixes 40 XX. — " Compound words *1 XXL — Comparative degree of adjectives 42 XXIL — Male and female appellations 44 XXIII.— The superlative of adjectives : Predicative form 46 XXIV.— Adjectives and the prefix « n 47 XXV. — The possessive pronouns 49 XXVI.— Imperfect tense of f e in • • • 51 XXVII. — Declension of adjectives, preceded by the definite article 52 XXVIII.— The superlative of adjectives: Attributive form. The three degrees. 64 XXIX. — Declension of adjectives, preoeded by the indefinite article 55 XXX — The English auxiliary, To Do. Regular verbs, present tense 57 XXXI. — The auxiliary verbs: SKuffen, fiinnen and miigen 59 XXXII.— " " " SffioIIen, follen and burfen 61 XXXIII. — Prepositions with genitive and dative 63 XXXIV. — Nouns in the partitive sense 64 XXXV. — Declension of masculine nouns ending in e 66 XXXVI. — Plural of masculine nouns not ending in t, et, el and en. Imperfect of f) a 6 c rt 68 XXXVII.— " of feminine nouns 70 XXXVIII. — " of monosyllabic neuter nouns 71 XXXIX. — " of adjectives, preceded by an article. Future of $ alien and fein 73 XL. — Feminine nouns with an irregular plural 75 XLL— Neuter " " " " " 77 XLII— Masculine " " " " " 79 XLIII. — Plural of masculine and neuter nouns ending in el, er, en, d)en and lein 80 XLIV.— Irregular plural of masculine nouns ending in er, el, or and or 82 XLV. — Adjectives and participles used as substantives 8t XLVL — Declension of the interrogative pronouns and adjectives . . 85 XL VII. — Compound tenses of the auxiliary verb $ a i e n 87 XLVIIL— " " " " " " fein 89 XLIX. — Declension of adjectives preceding substantives without an article 90 L. — First conditional of the auxiliaries Ij a l> e n and f e i n 92 CONTENTS, il PART II. EXERCISES ON THE VERB AND OTHER PARTS OP THE ETYMOLOGY. Lessoa Page LI.— Conjugation of the regular or modern active verbs 95 LII. — The cardinal numbers g (J 1 ' LHI. — The ordinal numbers. Names of days and months 101 LIV. — The demonstrative pronouns 103 LV. — The relative pronouns 105 LVI. — The personal pronouns. The two modes of addreBS bit and @ i e 107 LVII. — The indefinite pronouns 110 LVIII. — Prepositions governing the accusative. The diminutives d)en and Win 112 LIX. — Names of countries and places 114 LX — The irregular or ancient verbs 115 First conjugation (Radical vowel a) ,. 116 LXI. — Second conjugation (Imperfect with a) 118 Reading Lesson: 23 ie Heine 3)1 arte 121 LXII. — Third conjugation (Imperfect and past participle with i or ie) 122 LXIII. — Fourth conjugation (Imperfect and past participle with c). . 12"» LXIV. — Fifth conjugation (Radical vowel t [or ie], Imperfect with a [orw].) 128 Reading Lesson : Xtjrannei. ©rte^enlanb 131 LXV. — Separable verbs 132 LXVI. — Inseparable verbs 135 LXVH. — Separable and inseparable verbs 137 Reading Lesson: Setfpiel von Snt^attfamfeit 139 LXVIIL — Prepositions governing both the dative and accusative. Prepositions contracted with the definite article 139 Reading Lesson : Stn ben SDlonb 141 LXIX — Neuter and intransitive verbs 142 Reading Lesson: SerSBanberer unb bie Quelle 144 LXX.— On the adverbs 145 Reading Lesson : £)er alt e Sanbmann 148 LXXI. — On the conjunctions 148 Reading Lesson : £>te fd)iinfle E^riflin 152 LXXII. — Verbs in the passive voice 152 Reading Lesson : 2>a$ gefto§lene 3)ferb 155 LXXIII.— Reflexive verbs , 156 Reading Lesson: (Etner obet ber Slnbere 159 LXXIV — Impersonal verbs 160 Reading Lesson: 91 j> ^ ori^ men 163 X CONTENTS. PART III. SYNOPSIS OF GERMAN GRAMMAR. Page. Parts of Speech. Cases in German 165 The Article : Definite and Indefinite 165-166 Declension of the Common Nouns. Declensions I., II., III. and IV 166-171 Declension of the Proper Nouns 173 The Adjective 175 The Numerals : Cardinal, Ordinal and Indefinite 178-181 The Pronouns : Persona], Possessive) Demonstrative, Relative and Correlative, Interrogative and Indefinite 183-195 The Auxiliary Verbs Tjatm, fein and ioerben 198 The Regular Verbs (active and passive voice) 204 The Irregular Verbs 211 " Auxiliary " of mode 219 The Compound Verbs : Separable 227 " " " Inseparable 229 " Separable and Inseparable 230 The Neuter and Intransitive Verbs 230 The Reflexive Verbs 232 The Impersonal Verbs 234 The Adverbs 236 The Conjunctions 238 Nouns, Number of 241 Nouns, Gender of. 243 Construction 251 List of compound verbs which are both separable and inseparable . 259 List of verbs conjugated with f e i n in German and to home in English 260 List of verbH reflexive in German but not in English 262 List of Prepositions 263 PART IV. VOCABULARY. German and English Vocabulary 264 English and German Vocabulary 283 National appellations, proper nouns and adjectives 295 Addenda to Vocabulary 296 THE GERMAN LETTERS. (Die 3krfjfta6en.) The German Alphabet consists of the following twenty-six letters : 31 a (ah) a 9* tt n 93 6 (bay) b © o . o 6 C (tsay) c 9J V (pay) p ® b (day) d fi. q (koo) q @ c (ay) e 91 -r (err) r 3 f* f and S> B and Ij © and ® © and @ f and f %l and 91 Si and 91 » and t) ff and Q aw and 36 r and £ * Wherever the name is not given, it is as in English. f German Zand J are alike in print ; but the fact that / is only used before consonants, and J before vowels, will enable the student to distin- guish these two letters from each other. + S is used at the end of words whether standing alone or compounded. GERMAN WRITING ALPHABET. a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, 1, m, **y «C *, -o *> /^ ^'■'^ ! ' *' J*' ' ^ ***' n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v, w, x, y, z. **/ "^ • 3*./ ~, f,** "K **s *»> *"v $' f'f' COMPOUND CONSONANTS. ch, ck, ss, sz, sch, sp, st, th, tz. CAPITAL LETTERS. A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, ^ ^ x'siz / *jC Jr. f jrjz K, L, M, N, 0, P, Q, E, S, ^ ^ M ^ tf j% f, T, U, V, W, X, Y, Z. ■*ta~t* ■&»** &*■■ * This second s is only used at the end of words. PART I. » ILESSON I. Section 1. Pronunciation of tbe Simple Vowels. 81, a is pronounced like a in father. Cs, c is pronounced like ey in they, or a in fate, but when followed by r like e in cherry. @, e when followed by two consonants or a double conso- nant, is considered short, so are also all other vowels. When at the end of a word, or in an unaccented syllable, it is very short, like e in battery. 3, i is generally pronounced like i in give. 3, i when followed by c is sounded like ie in field. 0,0 generally like o in stone, but when followed by two consonants it is short, like o in off. 11, tt is pronounced like oo in school or fool. $, t) which occurs only in foreign words, is pronounced like i in pin. Obs. I. — In German every substantive begins with a capital letter. Obs. H. — Many of the relations of objects, which would in English be expressed by prepositions, are denoted in German by a change of- the ending of the noun and the article which accompanies it. There are in German four cases, distinguished by their endings both in the singular and plural. Declension of the Definite Article. The pronouns biefer, this, welder, which, jeber, every, jmcr, that, take the same endings ; of the ending te» i is elided, and C alone is used, biefc (not bicfte). The o-of tha ending a$ changes to ti thus c& biefeS (not biefas). Singular. Plural. Mase. Fern. Sevier. for Ihe three genders. Nom. ber bic has bie the ) Gen. beg ber beg ber of the ! Dat. bem ber bem ben to the [ Ace. ben bie bag bic the J 14 THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. jDer 2ftarttt, the man ber Sater", the father ber Dfen, the stove (oven) ber £unb*, the dog Ser SruDer, the brother bag SOBaffcr", the water bag SDiejfer, the knife bag $inb 4 , the child bag Srob 4 , the bread 3d}" tyafce, I have t>u Ijaft, thou hast er (fie, eg) i)«t, he (she, it) has Die Safce, the cat toic tJeber, the pen tic State, the pear Me Sdofe, the rose bie Gutter, the mother Me Slume, the flower ttnb, and i« s , [y ah ] y es rtein, no 1 £abe id), have I? Ijaft bit, hast thou? fyat er (fie, eg), has he (she, it) ? Reading Exercise I. £er SKamt $at tolc SBtume. ©er SBater tmb Me Gutter. Jpot bag i?tnb tie $a£e? £>te Gutter tyat bie Slume. @ie ^at tie State. 3dj ^afce tie ieber. £aft bubag 2Baffer? 3d) ^ofee bie Sftofe. £er Sruber ^ot bag SHefjer. X>u fytft bie Slume. @r ^at bag 33rob. X>er Wlmn %at bag 33rob. 28eld)en £uttb fyat ber SKattn ? Setter SKantt kat bie tfafce. SBeldje £a$e ^at fie? £at ber SBruber ben Dfen? 3eber 9Jtann tyat SSrob. 3&K3 flinb |ot bag Srob tmb bu fyaft bag aSajfer. Theme I. I have the cat. Thou hast the flower. He has the pear. The child has the bread, it has also (attd)) the rose. She has the knife. Has the brother the rose ? No, he has the cat. Has she the pen ? She has the bread and the knife. Has the man the child ? The man has the pen and the knife. Hast -thou the rose ? Which flower has she ? 1 Si, ei is pronounced like ai in aisle. This must not be mistaken for ie. » d) has no corresponding sound in English. See Lesson XI, p. 28. * Pronounce » like /; t» like v ; j like y in yea. * b at the end of a word like t. THE DOUBLE VOWELS. 15 LESSON H. Scftion 2. Pronunciation of the Double Vowels. 91®, an somewhat longer than the simple a (a in father). @@, CC somewhat longer than the simple t (ey in they).*i 00, 00 somewhat longer than the simple o (o in stone). Obs. I. — Adjectives, are declined when they precede a sub- stantive, but when placed after substantives they remain unchanged. Obs. II. — The object of the verb is put in the accusative case. ©as Jpaar, the hair ®a3 £eer, the army tier 2lal, the eel ia3 SDleer, the sea (ocean) ber JJdffee, the coffee bag SftooS, the moss tic ©eefe, the soul ijl, is bet 9lar, the eagle gut, good tier Sootfe, the pilot tuetfj, white Reading Exercise II. txii Jpaar ijt gut. 3u |aft elne (a) at ber Sootfe ben £unb ? £sif Sftofc i(l wetjj. Der Coffee ift gut. 3ft ber Slat gut? Theme II. The man has the coffee. The pilot is good. The rose and the pear. Has the child the bread? Yes, the child has * Except: Sdjeere = scissors, and leer = empty, which are pronounced thairuh and lair. 16 MODIFIED VOWELS. the bread and the knife. Hast thou the water? No, I have the flower. The brother has the dog. Has the cousin the stove? Is the hair white? The mother has the pen. The ocean is (ticf) deep. I have a (etne) soul. Is the cat white? LESSON ni. Seftiott 3, Modified Vowels. SKe, 81, 5 nearly like ai in fair. Oc, D, nearly like ea in heard. lie, tt, ii (= French u) has no equivalent in English. Obs. I. — The vowels a, 0, U, when followed by c, are said to be modified. Formerly the c was placed above these letters, but it is now generally replaced by two dots. "With capitals it is placed after the letter. Obs. H. — The accusative in the feminine and neuter is like the nominative. ©er tofe, the cheese 'Bai Del, the oil fete totte, the cold fete Sritcfe, the bridge feaS 9Mfcd)en, the girl (maiden) tai Uebel, the evil feer toiler, the collier Heln, small fete Jpijfyte, the pit, cavern ticf, deep 2Btr faben, we have £aben luir, have we? flefaberi, they have foben fie, have they? Reading Exercise III. ©er tofe (ft gut. SBir Ijaben Staffer, ©as Waltym fat iai Del. ©er toiler fat fern toffee. 3ft tie SBrucfe gut? Die $ityte ijl fletn. £at fie .tie ©djeere? 9?etn, wit faben feie ©djeere. £abt ifr ten tofe? THE DIPHTHONGS. 17 SRein, <3te fiafcen ten flfife. Der Sootfe fcat kit £unb. JpaBcn <3ie •tie SBirne ? 9t,ein, id) $ak tie Stofe. 2)a<3 Del ift gut. £er tfij^er ift Hem. £)te Sriitfe ift fieitt unt gut. 3jl ter tfiife gut? Theme III. Is the oil good? Yes, the oil is very (fefr) good. The girl has the cheese. We have water. You have coffee. Have they the pear? No, they have the rose. Hast thou the scissors? No, the mother has the scissors, I have the flower. The evil is great (grog). The bridge is small. Has the collier cheese? Thou hast the coffee and the cheese. I have the dog and the cat. Is the rose white ? The cheese is good. LESSON IV. Station 4, The Diphthongs. 9li, oi nearly like ai in aisle (really a little broader). %% UU generally like ou in house. $tttt, Bit nearly like oy in boy. %\f ei almost like i in mine. * @tt, eu like 8Ceu, OU (oy in boy). Declension of the Indefinite Article. Masc. Fern. Neuter. Nom. ein, einc, eln, a or an Gen. einel, einer, eincS, of a Dat. einem, einer, einem, to a Ace. eincn, einc, etn, a Thus are declined the conjunctive posses- sive pronouns (inein, beta, fetn, unfer, i§r) and fetn. * This diphthong must not be mistaken for ie (long i) which is not a diphthong. See. Lesson I. Pronunciation of the simple vowels. 2 18 DEMONSTRATIVE AND POSSESSIVE PBONOUNS. Demonstrative Pronouns, toicfcr (masc.), fetefe (fern.), tiefeS (neut.), this jener „ jene n jettes, „ that Da8 #au3, the house !Die Jpiiufer, the houses feer SSaum, the tree bie Soume, the trees ter $aifer, the emperor tie SBaife, the orphan tier 9M, May (a month of fcaS Sein, the leg the year) trai, true t>(X3 St, the egg tyeute, to-day Conjunctive Possessive Pronouns. mein (masc), meine {fern.), tnein {neut)., my feein „ beitic „ feein „ thy [em „ fetne „ fctn „ his i|r „ t$re „ tyr „ her unfer „ unfere „ unfer ,, our 3$r „ 3|re „ 31jr „ your % „ tyre „ tyr „ their Reading Exercise IV. 5Ketn SSater %o.l ein £au«. Diefe grau $at eine $afce. ©er £aifer M mein Sfteffer. "Diefe SBaife |at ein Si. ©iefer 9Rann $at ein Sent. Der ©arten (garden) §at Siiume. !Diefe £aufer tyalien gen? Per (windows). Jpeute $ak id) feen ffiann geftyen (seen).* ©ein 35ater ifl $ier (here). ©iefeS tftnfe $at eine Gutter. £iefe tf afce tjat eine Maui (mouse). !Der Dfen ifl fait. £afl feu eine ©eele ? Deine Gutter ifl franf (sick), ©ein £unfe ift aft (old). Jpaft feu feeine $afce ? 3«, id) l«6e metne &afce unt feinen £unfe. Theme IV. Thy father has a dog. This emperor has a garden and a house. The houses have windows. Thy dog is true. This orphan has a cat. This tree. Thy trees and the houses. This boy has an egg and a pear. Our brother and her cousin have houses. This eel and that_ eagle. Thy mother has a pen. The ocean is wide (fcreit). The emperor has an army. Is this man old ? No, but (after) that woman is very old. * Notice the position of the adverb of time (p. 146, IV.), and of the participle (p. 19, 1.) PBONUNOIATION OF S, D, T AND P. 19 LESSON V. Seftion 5. ©, J, as in English, but at the end of a word like p. 2), b, as in English, but at the end of a word like t. %, t, just as in English, except in words ending in itnn which are derived from the Latin, the t is pronounced like tS (i. e. tion = tsyone). Sp, p, as in English. Obs. I. — In compound tenses the past participle is placed last. Obs. II. — All nouns form their accusative like the nominative (for exceptions see p. 167, 8). £ser Sail, the ball £er 2I6ent, the evening Me Sirne, the pear iai MriD, the child taS ©rafc, the grave Me Sonne, the barrel ter Wiener, the servant Me Ceftion, the lesson iai Serf, the village tie portion, the portion ter Sot, death ter ^reufje, the Prussian grofj, large, great gcfe^en, seen 3$ tin, I am fcir fttiB, we are tu Mft, thou art ibr feit, ) ■ er ift, he or it is @ie ftnt, \ ? on are fie (eS) ift, she (it) is fie ftnt, they are Reading Exercise V. ©em Sail t|t gvofj, meitt Sail ift gut. £aft tu eine Stme? 9Mn, id) ftafce tetne 3tofe. Sift tu em .ftinfc? Stein, id) Hn ein Warn. 3Meie« tflnb l)at einen £unt. £a&en <3ie MefeS ©rat gefefcn? ©as Uorf ift grofj unt tie Sonne ift Hein. 2>er Sot. !Biefer $aifer. Set Scent ift fefyr angenC&tn {pleasant). Sift tu ein $reufje? 2Bir |a6en Me Seftion geternt (learned). ©ie Sihtme ^akn Slatter (leaves). Die Slatter ftnt grim (green). £er tfaifer fyat pufer. Siefer ®ar* ten 1)at einen Saum. 20 PRONUNCIATION OF C AND K. Theme V. Are you a man? No, I am a child. We are good and you are small. Is your ball good? Has this child thy pear? This village is very large. I have seen * the Emperor to-day. Are you a Prussian? This evening is very (fetyr) pleasant. The portion is good. We have learned* this lesson. The barrel is small. This grave is large. The man has a house and a garden. This child has thy egg and my pear. LESSON VI. Scftion 6. 6, t before ii, c, i or t) sounds like fe. 6, c before o, 0, U, Ml and before consonants sounds like f. $, f as in English, but it is never mute before it. G, c $, t £>er Samerab, the comrade !Der Ramm, the comb ber Sanbtbat, the candidate bag $reuj, the cross bie SapeHe, the chapel ber ^nafce, the boy bic Sitronc, the citron bad Rnit, the knee Eofar, Caesar ber ^imtftf the king Reading Exercise VI. &ai jtirtb ber grau. 23er Santerob ifl tn ber £at>effe. £er Son* bibat |at jetjn {ten) £iiufer. £aft bu ben $amm? 9teln, ic6 fyabe iai Jtreuj. ®er knalt ifl grojj. 'Lai $nte ift grijetlt (ftas healed), SBar (was) ©afar ein $onig? 5Rcin, Safar war ein ^aifer. 3Dir fint tranf (sick).. £ie Sitrone ijt fauer (sowr). 2)a3 $inb $at bie $afce, 3d; tyafee einen #unb. Bu bift etn $na6e. £)ie Sapelte i(l grojj. 9Mn SSater $at ben Simig gefeljen. * This participle is placed at the end of the sentence. See Observ. I f ® after i has the sound of (i). See Less. VIII. PRONUNCIATION OF S AND Z. 21 Theme VI. The candidate has a chapel, and the king has ft cross. The boy has a comb. Thou hast a citron. We are sick (Iran!). Was Caesar an emperor ? My father has a comrade. His father is old (alt), thy cousin is large, and my mother is good. We have a king, you have an emperor. The cross of the chapel. Conversation. Stjlcu ein tfnafce? Jpajl bu ben $amtn? £at betn SSatcr ein §aus? £at bie 9Jtittter einen §rotb ? 3ftber5Dtannein6anbibat? Stein, id) Hn tin 9Jliibd)en. 3a, icfj |a6e ben ^amm unb ba3 3a, rnein SSater $at jwet {two) fcaufer. Stein, meine Gutter tyat Me .Rajse. 3«, er tjl ber Sanbibat ber SapeBe, LESSON vn. Seftton 7. @, f is pronounced softer than in English, almost like z in zo?ie. *}, j is pronounced like ts. 6 Die ©uppe, the soup ber £afe, the hare ber ©earn, the blessing ttr Sefen, the broom ber ©efang, the song ober, or 8 £)te 3<$l the number, ber 3«^«, the tooth bag %tit, *h e tent ber 9)rinj, the prince ber granjofe, the Frenchman jtoet, two jefyt, ten Reading Exercise VII. 2>er j^na^e fyat ben 33efen. ©as ^inb ber gran, ©er frinj Ijat ein 3eft. ©er granjofe tyat einen Jpunb. £afl bu einen 34"? © cr Sefen ifi gut. ©er ©efang ber 256gel (oftte Ws). £at fie ©uppe? 22 PRONUNCIATION OF G, 3 A.XD J. 3a, fie §at ©uppe unb tfaffee. 3<$ $aJe jreei 23efen, bu $aft 3c|n Gitronen (Plur.). 22tr frnt grog, bu Jtft flein. 6r $at ben £unb unb bie tfafce. Der Jlonig ift ein granjofe. £er $rinj ift cin 3)reufje. SStfl bu cin granjofc ? Stein, id) Jin ein spreujje. £iefer SBefen ift gut. t ipier {here) finb jwei grflnjofen (PZwr.). Theme VII. Are you a Prussian or a Frenchman ? The emperor is a man. The broom is good and large. Two brooms. The song of the birds. Hast thou soup? No, I have coffee. "We are small and you are large. Have you a tooth? Is the number large ? The tent is small. The king has two servants. We have a citron and a pear. The lesson is easy (leidjt). We are Frenchmen, you are a Prussian. Where (too) is the emperor of the French. He is here. This man is a prince. Have you brooms? Conversation. $ai ber $ritt} ein £a*«? £er $rinj $at jwei £&ufer. £at bas .Stinb einen 34«? 3a, baS $inb $at einen jjafyi. Sift bu ein Sranjofe ? Stein, id) Jin ein 3>reufje. ©tab ©ie ein ©anbtbat ? 9lein, id) Jin ein 5Mer (painter). £aJt i$r ©uppe ? SBir IjaJen ©uppe unb Coffee. 3(1 ber Sefen gut? Der Sefen ift fejr gut. £at biefer $naJe cine Eitronc ? 9lein, er tjat eine State. 3ft bas 3 £ ft ^« granjofen grog ? Das 3elt ber granjofen ift ftein. £aJt i^r einen SSogel gefefjen? 3 be<3 jtaifers ? SJeldjer 3ube |at ben Sonig gefe^en ? Diefer 3ube. Der Jpa^n fyat gefrityt (crowed). Das 3«|r tftlang. Der Sanbiboi ber Sapetfe |at etnen' Diener. SSeldje Sapette ? Die Sapefle bes £atfers. ©eben @ie mtr biefe Utjr. 2Md>e Ut)r t)at ter £eft? gr ^ot bie U$r bes ^atfers. Der @o|n bes Setters ift gut, Sener £efo i(l ber ©o^n be<3 $BnigS.* * See Lesson X., Obs. 24 PRONUNCIATION OP FAND W. Theme VIII. Have you the hat of my father ? The watch of this servant is good. Is this pit (cavern) deep ? The fork of this king. Which emperor has the watch of this collier? Is this year long ? Has the candidate of this chapel a hat ? The death of the king. Which king ? This child has a mother and a father. Which king lias seen the emperor? This Jew has seen the emperor and the king. Where is the son of this father? Which son? The cock has crowed. Conversation. £afl bu ben Jtimig gefefyen ? £a6ti$retnegute@aW? Si(l bu em 3ube ? 3(1 btefer £elb ein granjofe ? 3jtfcaa34rfong? £at Jenes mm ewe Gutter? 2BeId)en $atfer $a|t bu gefeijen? 3(1 }cner Sftann ein $reu(je ? 2Bo tfl bcr @o^n btefeS SHanneS's @etb t^r granjofm? MMq$ 3$ $a6e ben Diener be8 gefe^en. SBir tyafcen eme gute Oafcel. Stein, idj Bin ein Jpeibe (heathen) , Stein, biefer Jpclc ifi ein Seutfdjer. 3a, baa 3a$r if* fe$r long. 3ene3 flinb §at eine SRutter. Den ^aifer ber granjofen. Stein, er tft ein granjofe. <£r ijt Ijler. Stein, ttir fmb Sngtiinber (Eng- lishmen). LESSON IX. ■j, b has the same sound as/. Sefttcm 9. SB, to takes the place of the English v. », b = F !Der Setter, the cousin bie SJernunft, reason bas Saterlanb, the fatherland berSBogel, the bird bet ©eoatter, the godfather ber @Ha»e, the slave ber SBein, the wine wer, who 2B,UJ = V £)er 2Dagen, the wagon bie SBette, the wave baa UDaflfcr, the water bas SBetter, the weather ber SMflen, the will ber SDinter, the winter tt)0, where Irani, sick fait, cold. PLCEAL OF THE CONJUNCTIVE POSSKSSIVB PRONOUNS. 25 Plural op mcin. Nom. metne = my Gen. tnetner = of my Dat. nteinen = to my Ace. nteinc = my Obs.— SBlcitt (my), bcin (thy), fcin (his), Mn (no), unfer (our), and 35' (y our )) are declined hke cin in the singular. For the proper formation of the plural we declined num. Reading Exercise IX. 2)er Sater be3 @e»atter$ ift gut. Die SBernunft beS tfitfjferg. Do« Skterfanb meineS Dnfcfe (uncle). SBo ifl bein ©Hatie ? SBer Ijat ten SBagen t>eineS Setter? SJiein Setter fat feinen'SBagen. £tefer Winter ift feljr fait. £>er SBitteit jeneS SOTanneg. ©as 22etter ift an* gene|m (agreeable) . S3o ift ber SSater unfereS Setters ? ©er Dnfel i|rer Wutter. Unfer 4pau3 ift grofj. 3fc ®arten ifl tlein. Unfere Sante (aunt) war franf. 3fl beitt ®arten grofj? 9lein, mein ©arten ift Rein. 3ene grau (woman) ift unfere Gutter. 3ft 36r ^leto neu? Theme IX. The reason of our cousin is good. This water is very cold. " The waves of the water. Where is the godfather of my uncle? Thy cousin has a wagon and a house. Is this weather agreeable ? Where is the slave of thy uncle. Your wagon is old (alt). Her father and your mother. His boy is my friend (greunb). This woman is my aunt (lante). My garden is very large. Has the boy his pen ? Yes, he has his pen and his pencil (Sleiftift). This girl has a flower. Conversation. 3Bo ift ber SSater betner Gutter ? fir ift tjter. 3ft biefer Mitter \tfa fait ? 9Wn, biefer Sinter ift warm. 26 PBONUNCIATION OF F, L, M, X, X, Q AND B. 4>a(l bu einen SBatcr? 3ie Duetle beg gtujfeg tft |icr. £aft bu einen Zvaum geljak? 3d, id) |a6« ciwt £raum gefyafct. 2Ber $at ben gatf en feiner Gutter? SRein Sntber |at ben galfen feiner • SKutter. LESSON XI. SeMon 11. 6!), 41 a * the beginning of a word, or when followed by g, is pronounced like t, except in compound words, where the g is abridged from eg, especially in the genitive case. „ „ after o, 0, U, and ou, has a guttural sound and re- sembles the Scotch ch in Loch.* „ „ after e, t, ct, ii, b, qu, cu, it, and the consonants is a soft " palatal aspirate." GJj, K ein Sruber ift in ber $ird)e (church). 3jl ber $ud)en gut? Der $ud>en ift fe^r gut. 3ft iai 2Bad)3 getb ? 3a, ta<3 SBafe ijl gelb. £at betn SSruber tie 33iid)er ? 3*/ « J)«t lie Stiver unb tie S^rontf . £aft bu Me S^ronif gelefen? SKetn, afcer mein Sruber fyat fie ge« lefen. 2Bo fmb bie Siidjer bes 9Rabd)enS? 3d) ijafce fie (them). (Stab bie ^inber gut ? 3«, bie ^inber ftnb fe^r gut. LESSON Xn. Seftion 12. if has the sound of double I. Itg is pronounced like ng in the word long. * * In compound words where the n and the g belong to different word* iaeh letter is pronounced separately. 30 SINOULAE OE FEMININE SOUNDS. ff is used in the middle of words. fj * is used as double f (not z), at the end of words and syllables, and sounds like ss (not sz). Obs.— Feminine nouns undergo no change in the cases of the singular. (See Declens. IV., pp. 171, 172.) Declension OP FEMININE NOUNS IN THE SINGUIAB. Nom Gen. Dat. Ace. The Woman £)te grau ber graii ber grau Me graii The Gun Die 33ud)fe ber 33itd)fe ber 8ud)je tic Siidjfe ®er 0tocf, the coat bie ©lode, the bell ber $ad, the pack bag 2Berf, the work bie San!, the bench ber ®efang, the song ber ®rojj»ater, the grandfather bte ®ro|jmutter, the grandmother bie graii, the woman The Color Die gark ber gar&e ber garfce bie garte The Ax Eie Strt ber 2lrt ber 2Irt bie aijct £>a3 gajj, the barrel ber Sting, the ring bas 9Jleffer, the knife bte SFtiicffe^t, the return bie SKagb, the servant (fern.) ber ipajj , the hatred grog, great' ' lang, long tofet, praises Reading Exercise XII. £er 9tocf metnes SSatera. £)ie ®focte feiner Gutter. Her Sdod jeneS Cannes. T>a$ SJerl loit ben SJMjter (master). Die 33anf ijl lang. Die DWrffefyr unferes Dnfefe. £>ein 9Ung i(l flein. Her ®e* fang tfl tjerrlid) (beautiful), tn £af tiefea Cannes. Das gap jener grau tfl grog unb gut. Dtefeg 3Jteffer tjt ntd)t (not) gut. Der ©rofjsater unbjDte ®ro{jmutter tjafcen einen Jpammer unb eine Slume. Hie Wagb fyat ein gap unb ein SReffer. Sobt ber ©rogsater bie ©rojj? mutter ? Stein, er Mr unferen (our) S3ruber unb beine SRutter. * This is really compounded of f and i (final ») = f$. PRONUNCIATION OF PF AND PB. 31 Theme XII. Where is the hammer of my father ? I have not the ham- mer, of your father. The pack of that servant is large. The work praises the master. The bench is small. The return of thy brother. The grandfather praises the grand- mother. The servant has a ring. The hatred of this woman. This knife is good, that knife is not good. The song of the servant is beautiful. That barrel is large, but this ring is small. Has the father a coat ? Yes, he has a coat. Conversation. £at jener SDlann cinctt $ad ? S5o ifl tie Sftagb ? 2Berf>at mein SMeffer ? 3jl tie 33anf lang ? Soft ter SSater tie grou? Jpat ttefe grau etttett 9ting ? 2Bo ifl ter®rojj eater? £atlie9flagt eingap? 3a, er tjat einen $ad . Die 9ftagt ijt in tern ®arten. £>ie ©rofjmutter Ijat tein SKeffer. 3a, tie Sarit ift )'et)r (wry) lang. •Kent, er lofct ten ©ropsatcr. 3fl/ (te {she) Ijat einen Sling, ©er ®rojj»ater ijt in tern ®arten. 3a, fte fyat ein gap unt einen Sling. LESSON Xni. Seftton 13. $pij, £lj has the sound of f. It occurs mostly in words of Greek origin. $Pf, Jif are united so as to give one sound, which is uttered with compressed lips. 2)le $ljtIofot>1He, Philosophy tie ©eograprjte, Geography SltoIpJj, Adolphus ter 9)fa#, the post ter 9>fcil, the arrow ter Slpfel, the apple tag ?)fert, the horse Sutfe, Louisa £einrtdj, Henry ■Marie, Mary Smilte,* Emily 2ut»tg, Lewis grietridj, Frederie Caroline, Caroline The i is pronounced here like y in Yankee, (Aymeelyuh). 32 PEOPEE NAMES. ®as %t'Mtin, Miss gefyort, belongs ttic tyeifjt, how is called, what is the name of Declension of Proper Names. Obs. — Names of persons preceded by the definite article re- main unchanged. Without the article they add in the genitive g, except masculine names ending in g, jj, fdj, |te roar in ©rtedjenlairti (Greece) ju^aufc (at home). Tit ©eograp|ie 6er granjofen (Plur.). 9)Mn Snrter 2ltoIp| ifl flein, akr meine £ante (awn£) Suife ijl grog. £er $fa|t ge^firt meinem SSruttr Jpemrid). Her 9>feil ifl nid?t grog. Diefer 2lpfel geljbrt mciner Smma. §mt$ 3>fert ifl ntd)t grofj. %mti 3)fert> ifl toeifj. .ftart ifl Rein. 9Rarte Ijat erne geber. Smilte |at ein S3ud). !EaS 33ud) Smitten^ (or ©mUtend 33ud)) ifl gut. £er £uttt> griebridjs ifl Hetn aber Marietta Rafyt ifl grog. 28o ijl Caroline ? Theme XIII. Mary's hat is beautiful (fdjoit). Henry's apple. The hat of Charles is small. Geography and Philosophy. My brother has an arrow. Emily has a book, and Charles has an apple. Henry has a horse. Hast thou a horse ? No, I have a donkey (5fel). Miss Louisa is a girl. This geography belongs to my brother. Is your brother Adolphus small ? No, my brother Adolphus is large, but my sister (©djroejter) Mary is small. "What is the name of (tuie Jjcifjt) this man and that woman? His name is Lewis, her name is Caroline. PRONUNCIATION OF SOH, SP AND 57; Conversation. 33 38o ift 3tjr Sruber Subwtg ? £at feine Zantt (aunt) tin 23ud5 \ Wit Ijeifjt biefe grau ? 3ft e$ unfer Jpetnrid) ? £at er cine ©eograpljie ? ijafct tfyr bas 33ucf) ber Suifc ? UBo ift grauletn Sutfe ? 3fl betn ©ruber Stbolpfy Hem? ®r ift in 9>ari3 (Paris). 3a, fie tjat jmel Silver (books).' Diefe grew t)etfit SKarie. . 9teln, cs ($) ift mcin SSater. 9Mn, cr fyat eirte (S^rottif. Stein, tr-ir I)aBen SutfenS geber (pen). graulein Sutfe ift ju ipaufe (at home) . SRetn, mein 33ritber Slboipty ift fe^r grojj. LESSON XIV. Scftion 14. , SRetae ©djmefter ^at eine ©cfcule. £er ©c&roager beineg DnMg. Dte 2Ifdje beg Dfeng. Her Sootfe |at etn ©<5)tff. Der Sftegenfefjirm ijl fur (for) 34 PRONUNCIATION OP TH. ben 9tegen. £)te @|>ra<$e ber granjofen ift fet^t. SDir §a6en Me ©pur beS £te6es (to/*), ©er ©prwfy ©alomons (Solomon). Tier ©pott beg $na6en. Ter 331eifltft tyat eine ©ptfce. 'iKein Sruber tyat oleic (many) ©djafe. Tie ©tabt Serlin tfi grog unb fdjon. Theme XIV. This cane belongs to my brother (Dot.). That house has four (»ter) .windows. My brother has a school. The brush belongs to my father (Dot.). We have seen (gefetyen) the thief. Thou hast a ship, but we have a sheep. The castle of the king. His sister and my mother are good. Has the tailor the coat ? No, he has the scissors. My cousin has a cane which is very beautiful. Has the pencil a point ? We have seen the castle of the emperor, it is beautiful. Conversation. Sat ber Sootfe eta ©<$l|f ? 3a, er Ijat ein @d)lff. 3(1 ber ©tod beines SruberS fdjon? 9tein, er ift nid)t fdjon. Sat ber tfaifer ein @d)Iop ? 3o, ber flaifer Ijat ein ©d)lof . 28otjtber©d)tt>agerbetne3Dnfel>5? Sr ift in SSerlin. 3ft tie ©tact SBerlin grojj ? Serlin ift grojj unb fd)Bn. 3ft biefe SBiirftc gut? SMefe Efirfte tft fehr gut. Saft bu ein ©d)af ? 9tein, id) |abe ein ©d)iff. Jpat bag Jpaus ein genfter ? J5as £au3 |at oier gender. SBeldies £inb Jjat ben ©dsulj ? TtefeS jltnb l>at ben ©d)u1|. 3ft tcin Sater in ber ©dntle ? Stein, er ift in ber ©tabt. LESSON XV. Seftion 15. 21), tf\ is pronounced like the simple i, it has never the sound of the English th. * * When in the middle or at the end of a word, the preceding vowel is lengthened. PRONUNCIATION OF TZ. 35 % is compounded of t and t, and is equivalent to «. (English to). * "* Die 2fy>t, the deed Die £a£e, the paw Jer Stjor, the fool . Me tfctfce, the cat Die SRott), the need ber 23% the hghtning cer 9Kut|, the courage Me 9Wu£e, the cap Me Slrmufy poverty bas'Jpera, the heart Her Sltijem, the breath tier 2enj, (the) spring eitfakt^, Ehzabeth tai ©ofo, the gold Me ©onne, the sun ber 3ftonb, the moon ate, than Bid, mue h Reading Exercise XV. £)ein Sruber Ijat eine 9M|e, mein SSater §at einen Jput. Das ®olb ifl ein 5D?etaU (metaZ). ©te Slrmutf) ifl feine (no) ©djanbt (shame). Die tfafce $at eine £a£e. Der 9Konb unb Me (Sonne. 3ener Sinak tjl ein £$or. £iefe 5L|at tft beS So|ne« mert| (wor% of reward). Der- Sena tfi gefommen (ftas come). 2Bo ifl beine @$tt>efter glifafcty ? 9Mne efler glifatety ifl in ber ©dmle. £aft bit SKuty ? 3d) Ija&e ein £erj unb SKutf). £at er Me Ma& ? Theme XV. Has your mother gold? She has much gold and silver (©il&er). The sun and the moon. My sister Ehzabeth has a pencil." Mary has a cat. That man is a fool. Have you a cap ? I have a cap and a hat. The lightning. Hast thou a heart? This deed is praiseworthy (Io6enat»ertI)). Has your father a horse ? He has gold. * The t and j are compounded whenever the sound of the } is to be doubled, which must be done after evary vowel, except in compound words. 36 accent: simple words. Conversation. £at ber flnabe 9Rut| ? £ajtiu cine ,Sla&e?~ ©djeint (shines) bie Sonne ? 3So ijl feine @d>wejter glifabetf) ? £at 3|r SSater ®ofo ? 3ft fein Sruner einSijor? £abt if)r SJluty ? SjlbaiSOofogtfen? £at er eine SWujie ? 3a, er b,at SWufy 9teln, id) ^o6e etnen §unb. Sftetn, ber 9ftonb fdjeint. @te tjt in ter ©ct>ule. 5Kein 3$ater $at ttiel ©oft. giein, er ijl lein (no) Zfyx. 2Dir ^aben 9Rut$. !ftetn, iai ®oIb tfl ein fOletatf. er $at einen £ut unb cine 9Jtit&e. LESSON XVI. Seftion 16. On the Accent. Obs. I. — In German a distinction is made between simple and compound words. The former have (gene- rally) one accent, the latter have two or more. Obs. II. — Simple words are either monosyllabic roots, or deriv- ative words. Obs. m. — Foreign words, even when their ending is Ger- man, have their accent generally on the last syllable. £a$ 'Latii, the roof CaS Jpau?, the house ta3 .Stint, the child M3 gap, the barrel tad §eer, the army ta3 (£i, the egg 3$ Me, I like neu, new war, was £)ie grau, the woman ber Ttfeb, the thief ber ?$tujj, the river bag ®rab, the grave baa £orf, the village bie 2lrt, the ax ber Dfftjier (French, officier), the tyier, here officer Reading Exercise XVI. 3d) Hebe baa £int. Die grau l)at cine 2frt. £er ®raf Ijat einen Tiener. Der glujj ifl ticf (d"cp). Tai £orf tjt grog. £>aa Jpau3 accent: prefixes. 37 ifl fleht, He §aufer ftnb grojj. Ser £ut tft neu, Me fflliij&e ifl alt (old). £>er £>iel> Ijat eine 2W geftotylen (sfofen). £afi bu eitt (£i ? 3d) litbt bte filer (eg^gfs). "Lai £eer tea Ji'aifers ifl ^ter. £5a$ ©ra6 tea ^iinigS. 2Bo ifl mein ^int ? DtefeS Jpoui? $at ein £)atf). Theme XVI. The hat of the father is new. My brother has an ax. The thief has stolen (geftot)len) a barrel. This child has an egg, that child has a cap. Has this house a roof ? Thou hast the dog of that man. The king has an army. Here is the thief. That woman has a child, my brother has a hat. This house is new. Is your hat new ? I have an ax. Conversation. £aft bu eine Sfrt ? 3d) ^afceeine 2W unb einen SBagen. 3ft 3fyi" £ut neu ? 9tein, mein £ut ifl alt, aber meine SJtufce ift neu. £at iai £lnb ein fit ? 9?etn, bas $inb $at einen gudjg. S3o ifl bag £eer bes $aifer« ? ©aa £eet be3 $aifer$ ifl in $art«. £ajt bu 5Bter ? (6eer) SRein, aliet id) UeJe tag 33ier. LESSON XVII. Seition 17. Obs. I. — A derivative consists of a root or principal syllable, and of one or more accessory syllables. Obs. II. — Accessory syllables are partly prefixes, partly suf- fixes. They are unaccented and are used only in connection with the roots or principal syllables, upon which, in derivative words, the accent is placed. * Obs. HI. — The prefixes (i. e. such as are placed before the root), are: it, cmp, ent, cr, ge, Her, jcr. * Foreign words have the accent generally on the last syllable. 38 accent: prefixes. £)er SBeruf, the calling ber Smbfang, the reception, receipt ber Sntfrfjlujj, the decision gefauft, bought tterloren, lost gefunben, found ®er ©eferaud), the use tie SJcrnunft, the reason ber (Srtrag, the result angefommen, arrived gelefen, read erl)alten, received Reading Exercise XVII. £>ie Sernunft bea SOTannea. 2>er Sntfdjlufj meinea SBrubera tft gut. £er (Srtrag tft serloren. ©er fimpfang bea ^aifera. ©er SBeruf jenea Sftannea. 3$ l<*& e baa 33ud) gelefen. ©eine Gutter ift angefommen. 3d) Ijafce ein 33ud) gefauft. £aft bu baa (St er^alten ? 2Bir fyafcen eine 9Jtu£e gefauft. Jpa6t iljr baa ©rat bea $bntga gefunben ? ©a« £eer §at einen ©encral (general) erfyalten. $fyt ©djwefter ift angefommen. Theme XVII. Hast thou lost a book ? The reason of the woman. The result of the day (Jag). We have read the chronicle. My decision is good. The reception of the general The army of the emperor has (ift) arrived. Thy brother has found a watch (U^r). His father has lost his umbrella (9tegenfd)irm). He has read it (eg). What have you received ? Conversation. Jpaben @tc 3tyr Surf) serloren? 2Bo ift ber ©eneral ? 3ft ber $atfer angefommen? §aft bu ben Srtrag erljalten? 3d) |aBe ba8 Surf) meinea Srubera oerloren. 2)er ©eneral ift in ber ©tabt. £er $aifer ift ntrf)t angefommen. SJtein 33ater tyat ben (Srtrag er^alten. £at beine ©djtuefter ben Jpunb ge* 3a, fte $at ben Jpunb gefunben. funben ? SBaa $afen ©ie gefauft ? 3d) tyate eine 3lrt gefauft. Jpafren ©ie ben Srtef gelefen ? 9tein, id) $afce ben Srtef serloren. accent: suffixes. 39 LESSON XVm. Scftton 18. Obs. — The suffixes (i. e. such as are placed after the root) are: e, el, en, enb, er, erit, e§, eft, et, ig, icfjt, in, ifoj, Unj, djen, ung and igcn. ©ie £ljure, the door ©ie SBwiit, the lioness iai Wlittd, the means Jpeinrid), Henry baa 2e6en, the life finbifd), childish tic £ugenb, -virtue baa 33aumd)en, the little tree ta;S 3' mmer , the room tie 2Bo1jnung, the dwelling bte SItern, the parents tie SBofynungen, the dwellings te3 ©orfea, of the village fid) fcefteijjtgen, to endeavor ber $ijnig, the king Wsid)*, wood-like, wooden tu rebeft, thou speakest er 6eM, he prays Reading Exercise XVIII. Die Sfjiire tea £aufea. ©er Wlann Ijat ein Wlitttl (remedy). ©ie £ugenb tea .Riiniga. Unfere Sttern fmb angefommen. J)as SKabcben ift tinbifdj. Die Sotoin fyat einen %n^i gefrepn (devoured). iener ? §at iai £aua eine Sljiire ? <3inb btefe SBo^nungen ju »er* tniet^cn (for rent) ? 3ft baS 9Kat>$en ftntifc^ ? 2Bte Ijeijjt 3§r Sruber ? £aft bu cin Simmer ? 38a3 :§at bie Sijwin gefreffen ? 9JMn 9Kamt §at jtcei £>iener. £as £au3 ^at cine Satire. 3a, biefe aBofjnmtgen finb ju »er* miettyen. 3a, bas 9Jlabd)en ift fe$r linbtfdj. 9ftein Sruber ieifjt ^)cinric^. 3$ ^afce brci Simmer, ©ie |at etnen #unb gefreffen. LESSON XIX. Seftion 19. Examples with Prefixes and Suffixes. Der Smpfiinger, the recipient bie Srfafrung, the experience bteSrfatjrungen, the experiences bie ScrftBrung, the destruction tie 55er»unfd)ungen, the impre- cations tai tcfc @rfa$rungen entfpredjcn bet Sr* fanning metnea SBaterS. ©te 3«fiSrung ber (Stabt. Stidjarb $at fein ®ett (money) serloren. SBarum fcetet er nidjt ? tai Sifen unb bas Sitter finb nit&ttd). SBarnm finb @ie ntdjt gemittljlid) ? 3d) $ale nteinen 35ater serloren. ®er Smpfanger be8 ©titers. T:te ©dntle ift grofj. ^raulein ©o^te ift angefommen. SDtetne Srfafrung tft traurlg (sad). "Die 3Seroiinfd;ungen unb bie grfa|rungen. "£a3 gifen ift ein 9Mafl. 3ft 9Ud)arb nld)t (not) in ber (at) ©dptle ? accent: compound words. 41 Theire XIX. "Why are you not agreeable ? Is Miss Sophy your sister ? Miss Sophy is my aunt, and Richard is my brother. Hast thou silver? No, I have iron. Have you learned (gelernt) the exercise ? My uncle has lost his lioness. The recipient of the silver. His experience is sad (traurig). His brother Eichard is childish. The little tree of the garden. The decision of my cousin. My brother has read the books. Eichard has learned the exercise. Conversation. SBarum tft er nidjt gemufljftd)? Sr ^at feitt ©efo yerloren. S3o iji ber Smpfiinger be3 <3iI6er3 ? gr ift in Sonbon. £at tic 3ttlegun$ ftattgefunben ©ic 3crlcgung f)at ftattgefunben. (taken place) ? SGavuru Mft bu traurig ? 3$ ^U meiite Gutter ttertoren. 3ft 3t)r Srater 3ttdjarb ju £aufe ? Sfttdjarb tft efcen (just now) an? gefommen. Jpat ©opljie »icl ©oft unb <3ifijer ? ©o&tyte $at Bid ©ifen. &at er rie Slufga&e gelernt ? 3<*, er ^ Me 2lufga6e gelernt. 3ft ber Smpfanger gemiitljucf) ? Sr iji fefy: (very) gemittpd). LESSON XX. Scfttott 20, Obs. — Thers are a great many compound words which have an accent on each of the components. * Der 2lnfang, the beginning £)ie greu)ett, liberty tai £au»treort, the substantive ber 3ungltng, the youth ber Santmann, the peasant bie greunbfdjaft, friendship ber Sfttttag, noon ba« gebermeffer, the pen-knife bie 9tad)rid)t, the news ber 9tegen6ogen, the rainbow * The first, however, is the strongest. Compound particles have only one accent, which is placed on the second syllable ; e. g., umfjerge^ett. For other rules see the Lessons on Compound Verbs, p. 182, sq. 42 accent: compound words ber ®ingang, the entrance ber 9teict)tljum, riches immer, always offen, open Itebt, loves fcrttg, ready trage, lazy ebenfo — al$, as — as fWfHg, diligent Reading Exercise XX. ®er Slnfang ift fcfjmer (difficult). £er 3tegenbogen tft ^errlicfj. ©er Siingltng Itebt tie gretyett. ©er Sancmann |at eineit Sftegeit* fdjtrm. $)er SReic^t^um bee Cannes, £er itnabe fyat ein getters meffer. £er Sanbmann brtngt (brings) bie SRadjricfy. 34 Hn immer fertig. !Da3 genfter bee £aufe3 ift offen. 3«ier ^nobe ift immer trage. ^)er atetcfytljum meines SBaters ift ebenfo grojj ati ber SReid)s tfyum bes Sanimannea. 3e«e3 £<>U3 W einen Singang. Sift bu ebenfo g.ofj ali bein ©ruber? Theme XX. The youth brings the news of the village. It is noon. The beginning is always difficult. Riches is a substantive. The peasant has a penknife. The friendship of the youth. The liberty of the child. The entrance of the house is al- ways open. Are you lazy? We are not ready. My sister is as large as your mother. Every beginning is difficult. Is he as diligent as your cousin ? No, he is very lazy. Has this house an entrance? This youth is as white as the son of our neighbor. Conversation. Sringt ber Sanbmann Die 9tadjrid)t ? 3a, er bringt bie 5ftac(}rid)t. 2Bo ift ber Sungting be<3 ©orfeS ? @r ift in ber ©c^ule (Dot.) . §at ber $nabe etn getermeffer ? Stein, ber Sungling kt fein ge* bermeffer. 3ft ber Singeing offen ? ®er (Singang ift immer offen. ©Ift bu fefjr trage? «Rein, tcb, bin fletfjig. 3ft ber SRegenbogen fd)on ? £>er SRegenbogen ift tyerrlid). COMPARATIVE DEGKEE. 43 LESSON XXI. Seftion 21. Obs. — Adjectives form their comparative as in English, i. e. by the addition of cr, and generally modify the radical vowels o, 0, U, of monosyllables into ii, c, it-* 3«t, old 9tei<$, rich grofj, great Weifj, white frud)tbar, fertile fd)Bn, beautiful, pretty flarf, strong gelb, yellow fdjroer, difficult fd)tt>ad), weak arm, poor leicfet, easy jurtg, young niii|3lid>, useful fteijjtg, diligent IteknSrouriig, amiable ber Dfyeim, the uncle rait, cold tie £ante, the aunt fyod), high tier ©filler, the pupil tt,n, him fennert <3ie, do you know ? meirt §err, Sir Reading Exercise XXL £tfe grou ift alt, ber Sftann ift alter. Sas Sftabdjen tft grojj, ber Stmbt tft grofjer. Detn ©arten iji frud)t6arer afe ber ©arten beuteg Setters. Siefe Stufgaie iji fd)tr>erer. 2Mne Sante tft arm, fetn Drtfel ift armer. !Der 3iingltng Ijat etnen fdjweren 5>ad. £er Cantmann ^at einen f^roererert (Ace.) 5)acE. 3ft fcetrt SBater jiinger ali unjer D^etm ? 5J?arie iji fleifjtg, Sophie i(t ffeif tger. tu Mft fdroad), id) but fdjmadjer. Diefe Slufgabe ift fctoewr, aBer jene tft nu&ftckr. "Lai griiuletn ift ItebenSttiurbtger ali ble SSJtagb. S3 tft tatter. Theme XXI. Are you younger or older than Mary ? I am older. Thy lincle is richer than my cousin. His father is stronger than * The comparative of gut is fceffer, and of tyfy, pfer. For exceptions, see p. 177. 44 MALE AND FEMALE APPELLATIONS. your brother. Is Miss Louisa prettier than Miss Caroline ? Do you know his uncle ? This pupil is more diligent (fletjjl* ger) than your cousin. This paper (papier) is whiter, that book is better (iepr). This exercise is more useful (ntijltdjer) than that exercise. Henry is weak, Adolph is weaker. Conversation. 3ft ber £unb efcenfo grojj ali baS SReitt, Tiai $ferb tjl grower. 9>fert> ? 3ft 31j" Sdjwefter jitnger ali <5ie ? 9iein, id) Hn siel alter. 3|i ber 2Katm ftarfer ate ber ^nabc ? £)er 'Slam ift ftarfer ofe ber ftnafce . 3fi Smitie fd)road)er~ate SWarie ? 9flarie tjt ftarfer oU fimllie. 3(1 baa ©olt foft&arer ate baa Stfen ? ®as (Mb ift »iel foftbarer. 2Ser ifl reiser aU metn SSater ? ©ettt Dnfel ijl reiser. LESSON XXn. Scftion 22. Obs. I. — Many appellations of male individuals form their female appellations by adding the syllable in (simi- lar to ess in English), and, if monosyllables, modify , the vowel. Obs. II. — If the masculine form ends in e, this letter is omitted Masculine. Feminine. £)er $onig, the king ®ie ^Bntgin, the queen ter greunD, the friend bte greunbin, the friend ber ©raf, the count tic ©riifin, the countess bergiirft, 1 ,, . bte Prftitt, 1 the ra-incss ber Drlna, ] tne prmce tie Drlitgeflta, J me P™" 5688 ber 9lad;6ar, the neighbor tie !ftad)6artn, the neighbor ber ©dtiiler, the pupil, scholar bie ©djiitertrt, the pupil ber Sngldnter, the Englishman bie Sngldnbertn, the English lady ber 3Mer, the painter bie SJJnterin, the painter ber Jftinftler, the artist tie Mnftterin, the artist MALE AND FEMALE APPELLATIONS. 45 tier $odj, the cook bie $&d)ttt, the cook ber 9tuf[e, the Russian bie StufPn, the Russian lady ber o^anjofe, the Frenchman bie granjoftn, the French lady 3d) fc^e, I see after, but and), also nod;, still Reading Exercise XXII. 3d) fjak ben $i>ntg unb bic $ontgin gefeljen. £er $od) ijl cin 3tujfe, after bie $od)ht ijl eine grangoftn. Sijl bu ein ©raf ? . Stein, id) Bin eine ©rafin. 3(1 beiite greuntin eine ©djulerin beineS SSaterS? Die 9lad)ftartn bes 9Mers ijl aud) eine Muffin. Die $rinjc|fin |at einen greunb unb eine greunbin. !Die ilunflterin ijl eine ©nglanberin, after ber Mnfller ijl ein Snglanber. £u |ajl ben ©raf gefeljen, after id; Ijafte ben $atjer gefe^en. SCietn Sruber $art c)at aud) bie ^aijerin gefefyen. 3d) fe^e Subwig. Snifend SSater ijl reid), after 9ttarieni3 25a* ter ijl retdjer. Sie 9Mertn ijl eine (Sngtanberin. Mr fyaften aud) eine $od)tn. Theme XXII. They have a cook (masc.) ; we have also a cook {fern.). The Russian has a friend (fern..). The artist {fern.) is an English lady. I see the prince and the princess. The count has lost his friend {fern.). The neighbor (masc.) has a cook (fern.). The painter (masc.) is a Frenchman, but the artist (fern.) is an English lady. My brother is a scholar, and my sister is a scholar. The queen is richer than the countess, and the count is poorer than the artist. This garden is much larger than the garden of my neighbor (fern.). Conversation. Jpaflbuben^aifergefe^en? ' 3d) |afte bie ^aiferin gefeften. 3ft ber $ijntg reidjer afe ber ©raf? Die$ontgmiflreid)erat3ber@raf. £at beine flutter einen $odj ? 9tein,meine 9Jtotter tjat eine tfodjln. 3(1 ber •Stimflter ein fingtanber ? Stein, ber ^unjlter ijl ein grangofe. 46 SUPERLATIVE DEGREE: PREDICATIVE FORM. $ot fete ©rafin cin <3cf}Io(j {castle)S 3a, tie ©raftn ^at cut @$o|j. 3(1 beine greunbin cine ©djulerta ? @te iftbte ©djulertnbeineS D$etm$. 33ifl feu ein SWale r ? 9tetn, i<$ bin eine SJlaterin. £abt i$r ten Stafien gefefcn ? 3B:r }cSm We Sftufjln gefeljen. LESSON XXm. Scftiott 23. Obs. I. — The superlative degree has two forms. "When aftei' the noun it is called the predicative form, which takes the termination jfrn, and is preceded by am/- Obs. IT. — Adjectives ending in t), t, or in a hissing sound (j, g, \\, fe, fdj) insert e before ften : om {ojUttjteften (the worst). S)a3 ©djaf, the sheep Die $i$, the cow bequem, comfortable getjorfam, obedient rutytg, quiet gefc^icft, clever geredjt, just fWfjig, diligent foftbar, precious ^art, hard was, what ? fdjretbt, writes Reading Exercise XXIII. Dai ©fen ift nufclid), baa Slei tft nu|Iic^er, bas ©ilber ift am n% licfyten. 3(1 baa $>ferb ebenfo grojj aid Me Su§? £>le Jhtty ift fleiner, ber Jpunb ift am Hetnften. Setter iUtann ifl am ret^ften, benn er ift am jufriefeenften. ©et 5Jlann ift gut, metne ©d}»efter ift beffer, meine gjlutter ift am beften. Sener Sding ift am foftbarften, er ift »on ®o!b. Etefes <5*tojJ ift W, jenes £aus ift $B$er, ber SBerg ift am Wften. 2£er ift am reid)ften? Der aufrlebene Siftenfcij tft am reidsften. Theme XXIII. That sheep is useful ; this horse is more useful ; our cow is the most useful. (The) iron is precious ; silver is more * Except gut, which is am ieflen. For exceptions, see p. 177. THE PBEFIX UN. 47 precious ; gold is the most precious. Our tree is high ; that house is higher ; this church is the highest. Who is the poorest ? Who is the richest ? Wh#t is (the) best ? This wine is the strongest. Mary writes (the) worst. Louisa writes the best. Which metal is the hardest? A pen is good, a pencil is better, a book is the best. Art thou happier than my cousin ? Conversation. SMfya WlttaU tfl om ^rtejien ? &er <3te&l ifl am ^iirteftm. 3fl ber £unb etenfo ttufcltd) aU 9ltm, bas $ferb ifl am tu$lt(i)jfcn. ta3 9>fert) ? 3ft ber SRont gr&fjer ali Die Srbe ? 5»letn,bie Srbe ift grBfjer, bte (Sonne ift om griifjten. SBelc^er Wlann tfl om reidjfien ? ©erjufriebene 9Kann ifl om retcfjften. Sift bit ntctjt fo glMld} afe bein SJlein grfltnb ifl nic^t fo gIMt4 greunb ? ate id). 3ft beine ©djwefter efcenfo gut afe 9Jletne ©djmefter ift fceffer, mcine bein Sruber? Gutter ift am fceften. ffiertjlprler,grtebrtd)cber^arf? flarl ift om prlflcn. 3ft bie $4 efcenfo grofj ati boa 9ferD? tfl am Iteittflcn. 3ft biefes £ou3 efeenfo pdj als ber £>er Soum ifl P$er, bcr 33erg ift Soum? am ^micn. LESSON XXIV. Scftiott 24. Obs. — Many adjectives take the prefix un, to express a nega- tive meaning, which is in English expressed by un, dis, in, etc. glMtd), happy unglu'cflid), wrahappy gefdjttft, skillful ungcf^idt, wnskillful fru^tkr, fruitful (fertile) unfrudjtkr, wnfruitful (infertile) Bequem, comfortable tm&equem, WBcomfortable wtljtg, quiet unrufyig, wnquiet 48 THE PKEJTX UN. jufrietcn, contented unjufriebcn, discontented geljorfam, obedient ungefyorfam, disobedient aufmerffam, attentive m unaufmerffam, inattentive gereefy, just ungered)t, unjust ^Bflid), polite un^bfli4 impolite artig, courteous. unartig, naughty Reading Exercise XXIV. @te ifl getyorfam, cr ifl feljr ungeljorfam. 2Btr finfc glMid), f!e fint unglMid}. 3f* £einrtd) fteifjiger alt SJtarie? Sftarie ifl trage mi unartiger er. Smtlic ifl aufmcrffamer aid i^rc ©djwefler. Diefer SKamt ifl fetjr gefctyicft, aBer tie grau ifl fefyr unge* fcfytdt. Die $Bd)tn ifl jje^orfam, tier Rofy ifl ungefyorfam. ©tefes ipaus ijl unBequem, tag £auS fetneS Dtyeims ifl fefyr Bequem. ^orl ifl immer aufmerffam, a&er fetn SBruber 9to6ert tft immer unaufmerffam. Theme XXIV. He is attentive, she is very inattentive. Do you know my pupil Eobert? Is he as obedient as Frederic? No, he is very disobedient, but his sister is diligent. This boy is very skillful, that man is very unskillful. Is this land (Sanb) fer- tile ? It is very unfruitful, but my garden is the most in- fertile. The king is unjust, but the queen is just, and the empress is the most just. This boy is always lazy. Charles is as large as Sophy. Are you feeble ? I am strong. Conversation. 3ft fcin SruDer unge^orfam? 9Jein, er ifl gefyorfam unfc fletfjig. SBelcfyer ^btiig tjl am geredjtejfcn ? S)er ^omg son §)reufjen ifl am gerecfyteflen. 3fl Smtlte unaufmerffam? <3ie ifl ebenfo unaufmerffam afo 2Jkrie. 3Md)er «%nn tfl geftycft ? ©lefer SUtann ifl ungefcfjtdt. 3ft 3^ £aus Bequem ? 5Wein £au<3 ifl fefyr unBequem. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 49 3(1 §etnri$a Zaatt ^&fH<$ ? @le tft fe$r un^bfli*. 3(1 fein ©atten frudjt&ar ? ©etn Sant ift frudjtbar. Sifl lu e&enfo fleifjig als Caroline ? SRetn, mem #err, id) iin faui. ^ .I » ■■ «. LESSON XXV. Scftton 25. Possessive Pronouns. Obs. — Besides the conjunctive form of the possessive pronoun (pp. 18, 23, 25), there is also an absolute form, which is used when a possessive pronoun is not imme- diately connected with a noun, but simply refers to a substantive already mentioned, or understood. "When this form is used without the article, it takes the ending of the (wanting) article, viz.: tx (masc), t (fern.), cS (neut.) ; e. g., meiner, teinc, feitteg (comp. toiefer under Declension of the Def. Article, on p. 13). Accom- panied by the article the absolute possessive pronoun generally inserts tg between the root and the ending, which is e in the nominative sing., and en in all other cases, except the accusative sing, feminine and neuter (always like the nominative). Singular. Plural. Masc. Fern. Neuter. . for all genders. bcr meine or (igc) tiemeln(ig)e tai mein(ig)e tie metn (ig) en, mine terteine or (tge) blebein(ig)e toos betit(ig)e tie betn(ig)en, thine ter feme or (tge) tie fein(ig)e ta3 fem(ig)e tie fein(ig)en, his ter t$re or (tge) We %(ig)e bfl8 Wfl) e bie ^Ws)™! hers ter, tie, tas unfr(ig)e ; plural, tie unfr(ig)en, ours ter, tie, bad 3$r(ig)e or eurtge; plural, tie 3^( { S) C «, y ours ter, lie, ba3 i^tr(ig)e; plural, tie tfyr(lg)en, theirs £er ©artner, the gardner £>a« fapter, the paper ter Srtef, the letter tie Ufyr, the watch tie Santpe, the lamp ber ©omtenfcfjlrm, the parasol er^alten, received tueter— nod), neither— nor jeriwdjen, broken genommen, taken 50 POSSESSIVE PBONOUNS. Reading Exercise XXV. 3ft 3|r ®artcn ebenfo grog ati ber meinige ? fir ift ebenfo grofj afeter3^rige. 3(1 2uifen3 ©rojjmutter ebenfo alt ati tte 3^ige? <5ie ift otter ati tie meinige. 9JMn £ut ift nid)t fo gut ati ber teU nige; benn ter teinige ijt neu; aber ter meinige ift alt. <5ie fint nictt fo reid) ati imfer Sta^ar^ aber fte fine jufrtetener unt gliicflidjer ati er. Staxl Ijat fein 33ud) unt lai meinige serloren. 2Bir ^aben tit geber bee Severs unb We feinige gefunlen. £at ber $nabe mein fDteffer genommen? Stein, er |at baS ityrige genommen. £iefe« $ferb ift nid)t mein, too ift iai feinige? Theme XXV. -Is that house yours? Yes, it is mine. It is very large; it is larger than yours. My brother is not so diligent as yours, but he is older. Your garden is prettier than mine. He has lost his pencil and mine. Charles has broken his watch and mine. Why has Frederic bought a stick? This pen- knife is not so pretty as thine. His horse is younger than yours, hers is the youngest. Have you my parasol ? No, I have hers. He has found neither his penknife nor mine. Conversation. 3ft btefeS $ apier gut ? • Stein, baS unfrige ift beffer. 2Do ift 3f)r ©o^n ? 6r ift.in ber ©cfeule. 3ft er ebenfo fleijjig ati ber meinige ? @r ift fleljjiger al$ ber 3§rige. 3ft 3^r ©arten ebenfo grojj ati ber ®r ift grofjer als ber 3$rige. meinige? ■pat bie ©riifm meinen SBrief er* ©ie $at 3fyren 33rief nid)t er* fatten? fatten. £at er etnen Sfttog ober eine Utyr ? (£r §at meter eine U$r nod) ainen SRing. aCarum $at ber ©iener mein SKeffer ©r $at ti nicbt genommen. genommen ? £at ber $nabe bas ®lai jerbrodjen ? gr §at nid)t bat ®las5 aerbrodjen, er |at ben Spiegel jerbrodjen. IMPERFECT TENSE OF feitt. 51 LESSON XXVI. Seftion 26. Imperfect Tense of feitt. 3d) war, I was wir waren, we were bu warft, thou wasi ifcr waret, ) 1 ; ' ' t you were er war, he was @te waren, ) jtc (es) i»ar, she (it) was jte waren, they were ©er Spiegel, the looking-glass !Der Sinter, the (man-) servant ber SKantet, the cloak ber $aufmann, the merchant in granffurt, in or at Frankfort biefen SJtorgen, this morning treu, faithful iaerfauft, sold tf)euer, dear eitt wenig, a little wofyl, well i$m,him unwo'&J, unwell Reading Exercise X XVI. 3dj war treu, bu warjt unartig. fir war fetyr unwofl biefen 9Kor* gen. @ie war fc^r franf. 2Bir waren ein wenig unartig. 3^ waret -nidjt fo ^ijflid) ate wtr. £er ©rofjsater unb bie ©rojjmutter waren in granffurt. 9Jletn SKantel ijl eknfo t^euer ati ber S^rige. 2)ein Jpunt ijl treuer ali ber meinige. SBar .Rart in grantfurt? Stein, er war in Sonbon. SKein SSater war mit i^m. SBaren @te biefen SWorgen ju £aufe? 9lein, id) war nid)t 3U ipaufe; id) war in ber ^irdje. Der (Spiegel war jer&rocfyen. Theme XXVI. I was lazy. Thou wast a little naughty. He was very sick. We were not so attentive as they. You were always very faithful They were very dear. Is Charles here ? No, Sir, he was here this morning, but he is in Frankfort now. They were not always contented. Who was with her (i$r) ? Her sister was with her. That child was not very polite. It was a little naughty. The merchant had (war) arrived. 52 DECLENSION OP ADJECTIVES. Conversation. SBar ber SWantel t"§euer? &aben ©ie i$n serfauft ? 2Bo war betn D|eim ? SBarjtbu unwell? SBaren ©ie immer jufrteben ? 2Daren fie nid)t in ber ©djufe ? £a6en ©te einen Srief erfyalten ? SCcr $at ten Spiegel jer&rodjen? £a&en ©ie einen fftegenfefyirm ober einen ©tod genommen? 3a, er war tljeurer ati ber 3fy%. 9lein, idj tyafce iim serforen. Sr war in granffurt. 3a, id) war ein wenig unwoM. 3Btr waren nid)t immer jufrieben. 9tetn, fie waren ju £aufe. SKein, wir |akn feinen Srief er* fatten. 33er ©piegel war jerfcrodjen. 3d) tyafce weber einen 0tegenfd)irm nod) einen ©tod genommen. LESSON XXVn. Zeftion 27. Declension of Adjectives, PRECEDED BY THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. Obs. — The adjective, when preceded by the definite article, or by biefer, jener or writer, is subject to the same rule as the possessive pronoun. See Lesson XXV, Ob- servation I. Masc. Sing. Nom. ®er alte Srief Gen. be3 altcn 33rlefes Dat. bem often Sriefe Ace. ben altcn Srief Plural. Nom. !Die treucn Diener Gen. ber treucn ©tener Dat. ben treucn ©tenem Ace. bie treucn Diener Fern. Sing. Die gutc Sampe ber gutcn Sampe ber gutcn Sampe bie gutc Sampe ■Neuter Sing. £as fdjonc fapier be3 fibncn Rapiers bem fdjbncn papier ba3 fdjbnc papier Sing, with w e I d) e i. 2Md)e« neuc Jpaus weld)e3 neuen £aufe3 weldjem neucn &aufe weldies neuc £au3 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 53 Die Sfofdje, the bottle StoS Dorf, the village bie SBrieftafcfye, the portfolio ber 2trjt, the physician bad Srob, the bread tier Sifd), the table long, long 3d) fe$e, I see Reading Exercise XXVII. £>er faule ©iener ^at Me gtafcfje jerbrodjen. $)er Strjt |at eine Srieftafdje er|a(ten. £>te treue ©djwejler ^at bad alte Sud). 9Mn Dfyetm Ijat bad alte §aud tiertauft. Die aufmerffame SJtagb tyat tie gute Sampe 3erbrod)en. Die alte Sautter Itebt tijren fletjjigen ©ofn. SBir tyaben bad grofje ipaud »erfauft. £aben @ie aud) unfent grojjen ©arten sertauft? 9lein, td) ^abe tfjn ntd)t serfauft. 3Bo ift bad weipe 33rob ? £ier tft ed. 3$ ^abe meinett goltenen 3ttng »erfauft. Theme XXVII. Our teacher praises (lobt) this diligent girl (ace). Where is the good father ? The good father is in Berlin. We have bought the faithful dog (ace.) of the friend. Have you found the gold(en) (ace.) ring ? No, Sir, but I have bought it (tf)n). Hast thou received the key (ace.) ? Yes, Sir, I have received it (ifyn). This new hat of thy cousin is very large. I see the little village. Have you read my long letter? Who has bought the gold(en) ring? Conversation. SBo ijt bad gute meijje 23rob ? SBir §«bm fein guted Srob.* £ajt bu ctnen goltenett 9ttng ge= 9lein, id) t)abe einen gefauft. funben ? £aben j fein Bee Less. 29. 54 SUPERLATIVE DEGREE '. ATTRIBUTIVE FORM. !pat ber $na6e mcln 9Jtef[er ge* nommen ? £at Die 9Kagb bie Sampe jerfcrocfjen % 3ftbtefe3 2)0rffe$rgrof!? SKetn, Die gute ©cbwejter $at betn SDteffer genommen. Stein, ber unoufmerlfame Diener fyat tie weifje gtafdje jerbrodjen. 9iein, btefeS £orf ifl feljr flein. LESSON XXVUI. Section 28 Second Form of the Superlative. Obs. — The second form of adjectives in the superlative de- gree is the attributive form which takes jtc only, and is declined like other adjectives, preceded by the definite article. It is used only when a noun follows or is understood. See Obs. Lessons XXV and XXVII. ADJECTIVES IN THEIR THREE DEGREES. Positive. Comparative. Superlative. (tar!, ftarfcr ler, tie, bas ftarfftj, or am fiarcften strong fd)Bn, fdiBncr ber, fie, iai fdjbnflc, or arti fd)Bnften beautiful alt, alter ber, bie, bas iilteftc , or am iifteften old gut, (irreg.) Jcffer ber, bie, bag f efic, or am beflen good Die Slufgabe, the exercise bie Arbeit, the work ber £ut, the bonnet, hat ber 2lrjt, the physician ber ©tiefel, the boot golben, golden (gold) Die Wdjte, the niece ber 9teffe, the nephew ber £eto, the hero bag Dorf, the village bag Srob, the bread jerrtffen, torn Reading Exercise XXVIII. Der te Slufgabe ifi tic fcftroerfie 2trbett. £aben ©te etwas »erloren? 3d) ^ciBe meinen beften £ut scrloreu. 2)ein SReffe |at ben langjlen ©tod genommen. 3$« ?Rid)te b,at ten neuejien £ut gefouft. ©ie $aben ben grijften unb fd)bn|ren ®arten. 3b,re Sante tjat $a$ tfyeuerfte .SleiD. Theme XXVIII. The best bread. The whitest rose. Mary is the most dili- gent girl, Charles, the most attentive boy. They have bought the largest garden. I have taken the longest stick. Who is that girl ? She is the youngest daughter of his uncle. This female servant has broken the finest glass. Do you know the best man? Yes, I know him. (The) lead is the heaviest metal. Nelson was the most celebrated English hero. Conversation. £aben ©te ken tybdjjten SBerg ge* SDtetne Sautter fyat ben t)bd)ften Serg fe^en ? gefetyen. SBeldjes* tft btefdjbnfte grau ? ©eine £ante tft bie fcfjBnjte grau. 2Beld)e3 tfl ber fletfjigfte ^naBe ? Unfer Sruber tft ber fletfjigfte ^nabe. S3eld)er Warm tft am ftarfften ? SKein ftafybax tfl ber ftdrf jie SMamt. £aft bu ein 33udj gelefen ? 3d? fy»6* baS befte 33ud) gelefen. 2Ber|atbenbejten©tocf jerbrodjen? 2>er Diener fyat tljn jerbrodjen. ^aben'Sie ttwas serloren ? 3d) lobe metne befte geter serloren. 4>afl bu eine 5Ktd)te? 3d) ijabt bie Befie SRttfcte. « ' ■ < n » LESSON XXIX Seftton 29. Adjectives preceded by the Indefinite Article. 'Obs. — An adjective, when preceded by the indefinite article, or by a conjunctive possessive pronoun (metn, bein, fein, %, unfer, 3^r, ti)r), or by fein(no), takes, in the nominative sin- gular, the terminations cr (masc), t(fem.), and c§ (neut.). * For this use of tttfc&tS see p. 194, 103. 56 ADJECTIVES PRECEDED BY THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. In all other cases it takes en, except the accusative of the feminine and neater, which ends like the nomi- native. EXAMPLES. Masculine. Feminine. Nom. tin gutre Warm tint gutc 3mu Gen. etnes gutcn SJtanneS eitter guten Srou Dat. einem guten SDlanne eincr gutcn %tau Ace. einen gutm SKann eine gute %tau Neuter. tin MntS ■ftinb eines fleinen Miritei einem Heinen $tnfce ein HeincS Mirii (Sin has no plural, but with meitt, bent, fein, JC, the ad- jective is declined, taking the ending en, according to the Observation of this Lesson. 2)er ©d)ub,mad)er, the shoemaker fojtbar, precious ber 9tb,ein, the Rhine fcer glufj, the river nadjt&fjlg, neghgent gefd)rieben, written gejlem, yesterday berittymt, celebrated angenefcm, agreeable fdjarf, sharp breit, broad Ileb, dear gemadjt, made 6toa3, anything, something englifd), English tcutfd), German Reading Exercise XXIX. Unjer 9tad)bar ijt ein guter Wlarm. Sure 9tad)barln ijt eine fdjledjte grau. <3ein ©djufymadjer ijt ein junger Wlann. Qai ©oft ijt ein fofibares SWetafl. 3^r ®roj#ater ijt ein guter alter 9Wamt. £aben @ie nteine gofoene Vfyt tterloren ? £abt ib,r einen langen Srief gr* fdsrteben ? Jpier ijt ein altei 3)fert>. $ennen ©ie fciefen reidjeit Wtann ? 3d) fenne weber fctefen reidjen SJlann nod) jenen armen Wann. $at unfere 9?id)te einen langen Srief gefdjrieben? 3«, fle §at einen fe^r langen SSrief gefebrieben. Theme XXIX. Tour neighbor has a large garden. The Rhine is a broad (breit) river. Who has taken my sharp knife ? I have taken THE ENGLISH AUXILIAET TO DO. 57 neither your sharp knife, nor his long stick Here is his old horse. We have seen our good king. Have you lost your gold watch ? That old man likes his faithful dog. The count has bought a young horse. (The) silver is a precious metal. My dear sister has received a beautiful dress. The rose is a beautiful flower. You are the oldest tailor. Conversation. §at ber ©raf eta neues fyavti ge* 9iein, er |at eta neueg JpauS »er* lauft ? fauft. ipaben <8te eta altti $ferb ? SBtr 6,aben eta altes unb eta junges fferb. 3ft betae ©rojjmutter etae alte %cav8 @te ift etae feb,r atte grau. Jpat iljr 9tad)bar einen ©arten ? Sr fc,at etaen grojjen ©arten. 3(1 ta3 (Sifter eta WlttaU % Daa ©ilber ift eta foftbares 9KetaB. £aben @te 3$re golbene Utyr »er* 5Rein, tdj |abe meineit golbenen loreit ? 3ting »erforen. 28er |at meta fdjarfes 9Reffer ge* 3d) ^afcc weberbetn fd)er £ifd), the table £>er ©omnter, (tbe) summer ber Sifdjicr, the joiner ber SEinter, (the) winter Reading Exercise XXX. 3d) Hefce mcine gute Gutter. £>u lte6ft beinen aften Sater. ®r licit fcinen reidjen D|eim. SBir lie&en unfern grofjen ©arren. 3^ liebt euer jiungcs $ ferb. @ie Iiefcen Ifjr fdjarfea SWeffer. ©u faufft einen SBIciflift, cr Braud)t einc ©taljlfeber. SSir fitdjen unfern alien ©tod. tfennftbujenenSTCann? 2Ba$ fud)ft bu ? ®er Sifd)Icr fud)t ben Sifdj. 2)er ©ommer ifi angeneljm, after ber 2Binter tfl imanges ne|m. @ie liefcen 31j« £ante; fie lieien unfern ®ro{j»ater. 3d) fcnne Jenen iungen Sftann. tonft bu feinen Scorer ? ©udjen @ie 3^ SDtntenfafj ? 3d) ftnbe btefes 33ud) fe^r gut. Theme XXX. I know his little sister. He seeks thy new parasol. Tou want a new umbrella. Thou dost buy an inkstan'd. They like your steel pen. I want a good book and a pencil. Do you buy a cap? No, I do not want a cap. "Where is Mary's copy-book? she is seeking it, (she seeks it). I like that beautiful flower very much (fef)r). Do you like it also ? What do you seek ? I seek my gold(en) ring. Which pen does he want ? Who knows our ugly little girl ? They do not know her. Do you know our merchant? Conversation. Sie&t Jener alte SJtann ? Sener atte SWann lie&t fetnen treuen ' Jpunb. 3ft ber 9tf)etn ein Slug ? £er SR^cin tft cm fereiter glujj. auxiliabies: SOtitffcn, fiJnnen and mogen* 59 fiennft bit ben fletjjtgen ©djuler? £akn @ie ben f^ijnen SSrief meines Setters gelefen ? SBarum lauft ber SSater neue ©tiefet? ©djretfct 9ttd)art> and) feine beutfd)e Hufgaie? SBaS futfjt unfer Staler? SMe ftnbeft bu btefe geber? 3d) femte ben fleifjigften <3d)uler. 3d) l^e i^K nic^t gelefen. £)er atte ©tiefel be8 Eaters tft jerrtffen (torn). 9lein, er fdjretfct feine engltfdje Slufgabe. fir fudjt ben £ifd). 3d) ftnbe fie nid)t fe^r gut. LESSON XXXI. Seftiott 31, Auxiliary Verbs: SKuffen, tinmen unb ntogen. 2Mffen. SBtr muffen, we must Jrntuffetormugt,) ust @te muffen, J fie muffen, they must 3d) mug, I must ku mujjt, thou must ermufj, he must ffe (ti) tnujj, she (it) must 3d) lann, I can, may bu lannft, thou canst er lann, he can fie (es) fonn, she (it) can 3d) mag, I may (like) bu magft, thou mayest er mag, he may fie (ti) mag, she (it) may fdjretfcen, to write tefen, to read fpredjen, to speak ge^en, to go franjiSfifd), French jtonnen. SSBir fiJnnen, we can i^r fbnnt, ) „„„ „„„ Z. »,. r you can @te fonnen, ) fie fiJnnen, they can Wl B g e n. SBtr mijgen, we may ik mijqet, ) J., " ' t you may @te mogen/ ) J J fie mBgen, they may fud)en, to seek laufen, to buy Weifcen, to stay (remain) au3ge|en, to go out otme, without 60 auxiliaries: OTuffen, liinnen and mogen. Reading Exercise XXXI. 3d) mufj cincn Sricf fd)reiben. Du mujjt Seine Ueberfefcung lefen. ®r mufj franjofifd) fpredjen. SSir miiffen unfern ©iirtner fud)en. 3fyr mitfjt ein neueS S3ud) laufen. ud), the dictionary ©as Sweater, the theatre fommett, to come »er!aufen, to sell mann, when morgen, to-morrow tie Ue&erfej3ung, the translation 3entant, somebody, anybody tie S^eSjeit, the season SRiemant, nobody men, whom ? fur wen, for whom ? fudjen @ie, do you (seek) look 34 l«fo 2uft I have a mind or for ? I would like to wo^nen, to live {dwell) er woljnt, he lives {dwells) Reading Exercise XXXII. 3d) wtfl auSge^en. 9Mne <3d)wejter will 311 Jpaufe Blet&en; fie wtff eht 33ud) lefen. SBotten @te in ten ©arten gefcen? 3d) fyafce feine 62 auxiliaries: Swollen, follen and biirfen. Sufi, ju Heikn. 3$ will to ka« Sweater geljen. "Das 9Jlab$en Witt Me Ueberfefcung fctyretben; ftf M* b « 8 SEiJrtcrtu^. @oE id} ju* bem Slrgt geb,en? ©u fottft nad) bem Sweater fommen. SBonn fotlen »lr in bic ©djute geb,en. 3^r fotft ten Srtef fcferelben. @ie fotlen ble Slttfgabe Icrnen. Darf id) in ba<3 Sweater- geljen? S5u barfft lommen. ®r barf fein Sffibrterbud) serfaufen. 2Bir biirfen ju Jpaufe (at home) bleiben. Theme XXXII. "What will Charles write ? Henry will write a French let- ter, and I will learn my lesson. You shall read this beautiful book. Thou shalt sell neither thy house nor thy garden. We may sell our horse. May you stay here ? I may stay here, but I will go tof the theatre. When will you go to* Berlin? Thou art permitted to go. May I go out? "We will go out, you shall stay at home. Mayest thou (art thou permitted) to remain at home? They shall sell their dictionary to-morrow. Conversation. SStflfl bu franjbfifd) lefen ? ftein, id) fait fetne Suft. SBottt U)r in fcas Sweater ge^en ? Stein, wit biirfen nidjt ausgefcn. ©otten @ie nad) Seriin geb,en? Stein, td) fott ju £aufe bleiben. Darfft bu beln $56rterbud) »er* 3«, tdj barf ti serfaufen. f aufen ? SSann molten , during SBegen, on account of ®er SJhtfffleljrer, the music- sieBetcfet, perhaps teacher auSgegangen, gone out ber ltf)rmad)er, the watchmaker wo^in ge^en u ju bera ©cfyneiber geljen? £aftbu etn 23ud) son toeinem Setter erfjalten ? 2Bo tuoljnt fern greunb SRofrert? SWit went woljnt rer ©raf? 2Bo|tn gefjt tier U|rmadjer ? SDBo^in ge^en @ie ? Ddrfft bu morgen ausgeljen? Stein, id> wttt nadj granffurt getjett. Stein, tdj foil junt £ifd)ler ge$en. 3ag ®atg, (the) salt bas 33ter, (the) beer eitt $funb, a pound get)brt, belongs NOUNS IN THE PARTITIVE SENSE. 65 fcer 2$ee, the tea getrunfen, drunk fcringen @ie mir, bring me g«g#K, eaten gefcen <5te mir, give me gegcfcen, given lettyen @ie mir, lend me getieljeit, lent id) fdjtcfe, I send gefdjtdt, sent icb gebe, I give wie »iel, how much ? id) gleicfje, I resemble went, to whom ? mir, to me or me ttym, to him or him Reading Exercise XXXIV. SDottcn @ic Sffieirt ober Sier lja&en? 34 will 33ier t,a6en. £a3 Sicr ifi fc^r gut; ti ift beffer di 2Beln. ©as ©alj ifi fetjr nipdj. (Men a3 $tnfc fyu ^affee getrunfen. 2Bo ifi tcr Sucfer? 3Ber mitt gleifd) fyi&en? 5Bic Did Coffee unfc 2$ee wiUft fcu tyaben? ®eien glcifd), cin g)furtt ©aljv unb cin SPftwb Sutter. £ajl bu 33ier oter 9KiI4 getrunfen ? 34 $«&« gutes gleiftf) unb toeifje3 23rob gegeffen. Mr molten leineit S£'a\t. Theme XXXIV. Bring me some coffee and sugar. Will you have tea or coffee? Give me a pound of meat and a pound of cheese. Do you want anything? I want a pen, some paper and some ink; I must write a letter. Bring me some tea. Bring me also some butter. What has the child drunk? It has drunk some water and some milk. The cousin has drunk wine and beer. How much coffee does your servant want ? He wants a pound (of)* coffee and a pound of sugar. The gardener's wife wants some salt and some cheese. Pray, give me some bread. Lend me your dictionary. Conversation. Sffiie Bid <5alj 'fya&en , ugly grofj, bid, big Daa ®raa, the grass ber $afe, the hare ber tfopf, the head ber ©eutfdse, the German ber granjofe, the Frenchman baa Styer, the animal 3d) roetjj, I know jwei, two * ®er $err, Mister (the gentleman) also. takeB this inflection. (See page 167, Second Declension). MASCULINE NOUNS IN K 67 Reading Exercise XXXV. £er 9tejfe bes granjojen %ai einen Somen. £iefe$ £|ier ifl cin 2ljfe. 3ft btefer -ipcrr ein granjofe ober cin Deutfdser 'i 3f* tas £ljier cin §afe ? Stein, ber $afe ift cin £t)ier. £er Sbroe f)at eincn grofjen unb ^afjlic^en $oj>f. liefer Sube ift ein reicfoer Sftujfe, aber jener arme $nabe ijl cin granjofe. 2Gie fyetfjt btefer Heine Stnait % ©tefer nngetjorfatne $nabe Ijetjjt 2ll6ert. Die Somen ftnb fefyr ftarf. !Dct Sttffe bes Jperrn Sftartin. £ier ifl tie Ufyr 3f>reS Steffen; fie ijt jer* broken.. 2eib,en ferb. 2Bi(t biefer $nabe fetn 33ud) 9lein, er mitt fein SBorterbud) ^aben? b,aben. 2Ba3 fyat ber £afe gefreffen ? Sr b,at ®ra3 gefreffen. £at ber Dd}3 einen bicfen $opf ? Stein, er $at einen grofjen .Ropf. §<&zv. 3tjre £naben biefen ©tub,! 3d) weig ti ntt^t; id) ^a&e es nld)t jerbrodjen ? gefeb/n. SBotten <5te bent granjofen 3^ Sdjfennebengranjofenmdit; aber SBorterbud) leityen ? id) milt t§m mein SBbrterbudj Ieifyen. 2Ber tft biefer junge Warn ? SrlftberSteffeunferes^aufmannca. $aben ©te einen SQeffen ? 3d) $abt jmel Stcffen. 68 PLTJBAL OP MASCULINE SUBSTANTIVES. LESSON XXXVI. Seftion 36. Plural of Masculine Substantives. Obs. I. — Masculine nouns not ending in e, rf, Ctl and ft take C in the plural, and modify their vowel. (Seep. 169). Obs. IT. — All substantives take n or en in the dative plural, if they do not already have that ending. Examples. £er Saurn, £>er Sifcty, £er @tu$I, the tree. the table. the chair. Nom. £ie 33aume £ie £ifd}e tit ©tutye Gen. ter 33ihtme ter Stfdje ter ©tittle Dat ten SSimmett ten Stfdjen ten ©tiif)Ien Ace. tie Saume tie Stfcbe tie ©tittle £er Sift, the branch ie Saume fatten 3lefte. SKctn Setter tyatte bret @ti> unfere Jpiite genommen ? $arl tyatte fie genommen. 2Ber mid fctefc Sftegenfcfyirme foufen ? 233ir fcrau* d»en jwei ©tocfe. 2>te gifcfye fatten feine giifje. £atteft bu einen Kegenfcfcirm ? Die ©ityne tea Suben finb angefommen. 2Bir fatten Safen unb giffy. Die Somen tyaben »ier giifje. ^>attet ityr Jpafen ? Stein, toir fatten D$fen. Theme XXXVI. Do you know the sons of Mr. Robinson? They are my cousins. Have you received any letters from my friends ? I have received letters from the Jews. "What has Henry broken? He has broken four chairs and three sticks. Do the fish live (leben) in the rivers ? With whom do you speak (fprecf)en) ? The Jew has four sons and one daughter. I have two feet, but the oxen had four feet. The German physicians are very clever. I had bought two umbrellas and my aunt had lost two parasols. Conversation. 2Sie ftnben @ie blcfc ©tiifcje ? 3$ ftnbe fie fe$r $on. SOBtc ttiete greunbe fyatte 3fyr Sater ? gr 6,atte »ier greunbe. £at Semanb unfere £iite genom* Der 9Jluftfle$rer |at fie genom* men? men. 2Ser wilt btefe 9tegenfd)irme fau? 5Blr brau<$en feine 9tegenfc(jtrme, fen ? toir kaucfcen bret ©toife. $ennen @ie tie ©ijljne bes 2lrjte3 ? 3 in bem Sweater. 2Berflarl? tie ©trafjen 23er(tns 6rett ? £atte aBitycfot einen©tocf? Sffite lange ijat ber Svtot gefdjla* fen? ©inb Me garfcen tier Stofen uxt ©ie ftnb fe|r »erjc()ieben. fd)ieten ? SfiterDeuti'd^eingutigerSJtann? ®r tfl ein giittger 9Jtann unb er? fuflt immer feine $flid)tett. Sr ijl auSgegangen. ©ie ftnb breit unto fc^Bn. fir $atte jwei ©tocfe. fir tyat j»ei oter bret g'efd)Iafen. ©tunben lesson xxxvin. SeWon 38. Plural of Monosyllabic Neuter Substantives. Obs. — Many monosyllabic neutev nouns form their plural by adding et, and modify tWe radical vowel. (See p. 170, 11. Third Declension}. Examples. Das Dorf, the village. Die Dbrfer Die §aufer ber Dorfer ber Jpaufer ben Dorfern ken £aufern tie Diirfer Me £aufer Nom, Gen. Dat. Ace. Das $inb, the child. Die Winter ber Winter ben ^inbern bit Winter Das Jpaus, the house. 72 PLURAL OF NEUTEB MONOSYLLABLES. Da3 33latt, the leaf Die blotter, the leaves ba3 Surf), the book Me SBudjer, the books tai ©lag, the glass bag $leib, the dress, robe bai 3>oif, the nation bag 9lcft, the nest 11 Ca3 Si, the egg bag S^al, the valley bag $ufot, 1 the fowl bag Sanb, the ribbon tie £enne, J the hen ro$, red, hjctg, white fyii6f(i), pretty, nice serloten, lost legen, to lay gefe^en, seen Reading Exercise XXXVIII. Die Winter fatten 3t»ei ©liifer, aber fie $aben fie jerbrodjen. Die $(etber ber $tnber finb jerrtjfen. 3fl bie £emte unferer 9lacf)barin roeifj ober rorb, ? Dag Jtyal tfl grim. Die gritnen timber. Die £ub,ner legen Sier. SBo ift bag 9lejl ber Jpenne ? Dag teutfdje SSoif. Die ©Bfyne meineg 9fad>barg finb unoitig. SDteine SSitdjer finb aft; bie beinigen |inb neu. Der $bmg tyat iriele ©differ unb stele Saume. Die Scaler unfereg Sanbeg finb fe^r fdjon. Die $naben ^aben brei Stejler gefunben. Die fdjimjten Sdume fyaben bie fd)bnfien Sfatter. Theme XXXVIII. How many glasses has the servant broken ? He has broken three glasses. Tour ribbons are not very nice. Do you like the red ribbons? The ribbons of my niece are green, white and red. Those nations are very happy ; they have a good emperor and a good empress. Have you seen the valleys of Switzerland (ber ©dweij) ? These three boys have lost their books. The eggs of the hens lie (tiegen) in the nests (dot.). Conversation. I Sffen bie finglanber gter ? @ie effen siele ©ier. §aben bie Soume 3b,reg ©arteng 3a, fie fyaben grime Slatter. Starter ? fatten ©ie bie Scaler ber ©djtoetj 3a, fie finb fe|r fdjito. gefe^en ? PLURAL OF ADJECTIVES PRECEDED BY AN ARTICLE. 73 fiegen tie Jpufyner Sier ? Die £it()ner legen jefcen Sag tret Sier. ©tnt Me ^letter ter Winter Ijubfd)? 9tein, fte fint alt unt jerriffen. Sjl Mefes SSolF glucfli($ ? 3a, e* if* tin fe^r gKuHttya Soil. LESSON XXXIX. Scttion 39. Plural of Adjectives, when preceded by an Article. Obs. I. — The plural of adjectives, when preceded by an article or some word, replacing it, has the same termination as masculine substantives, ending in t. See Lesson XXXV. Nom. Die guten Starter Gen. t>er guten Slatter Dat. ten guten Slattern Ace. tie guten Starter Da3 3)funt, the pound fcas $aar, the pair fcaS Durjenb; the dozen tie Jpantfcfeu|e, the gloves tie $irfdje, the cherry ter ©tord), the stork ter Jpals, the neck ein $funb 3wcfa\ a pound of sugar Examples. Die rotljen ©trumpfe ter rotten ©trumpfe ten rotten ©trumpfen tie rotten ©trumpfe Die Site, the yard, ell tag §emt, the shirt lai £udj, the cloth tie ©tritmpfe, the stockings tie Seute, the peopie tie Seinroant, the linen ^untert, a hundred rriige, lazy efyrtici), honest Obs. II. — "With the future, the infinitive is placed last. Future Tense of t) a h e n. 3$ tuerte ^akn, I shall have 2Sir merben fjaben, we shall have tu tuirjt tjafren, thou wilt have er, fie (e3) mirt tyafcen, he, she (it) will have 1. < ■, \ youwillhave ©leroertenfyakn, ) fie merten tjafcen, they will have 74 FUTUBE TENSE OP I) a b e n and feltt. Futuee Tense of fcin. 3d) Werbe feih, I shall be 5Bir roerben fein, we shall be bu Wirfl feltt, thou will be U)r tuerset fein, ) wiU be er (fie, ti) wirb fein, he (she, it) @ie roerten fein, I will be fie tuercen fein, they will be Reading Exercise XXXIX. 3d) roerbe 33rob fjaben. Du nrirft SDetn $abm. Caroline wirb ein 5Jfunb %udtv tyaben. @le wirb ' ein faar ©rriimpfe Ija&en. 2Bir reerben 3»el Dufcenb Jpemben fyaben. 3^ toerbet (or ©ie werben) tret faar Jpanbfdjulje fyaben. Die @d)itler werben brei ©tten £ud) Ijaktt. 3d) »«*e fleifjiger fein. SCirft bu SJiorgen in Serlin fein ? Sriige Seute werben immer arm fein. SStrb bein Dnfel gu $aufe fein? 3d) Hebe bie roeifjen SRofen. Die guten Jpanbfdjufye roerben immer ttjeuer (dear) fein. Die $irfd)en roerben balb (soon) reif fein. Die aar and !Dit(}enb are invariable when preceded by a number, t Of, after names of measure and weight, is not expressed in German. FEMININE NOUNS : PLCEAL IN C- 75 3Bertrtt$rfllrf$eri$a&m? £at ber ©tordj einen £al3 ? 3Berten <3ie gutes Sud) fyabeji? SBieoielfoftetbieeileSud)? 5Bte stele £emben fyat ber arme $nabe ? §at ber 3ube tic langen 33riefe getefen ? SBerben tie grofjen Simmer fieffer fetn als tie fleinen? •ftein, ttrir Werben 2lepfel (apples) ^aben. Sr fc,at einen feljr langen JpalS. 3d) merte baa befte £ud) fyaben. Die Stte £ud) foftet fiinf 2|aler. £r b,at fiinf ober fec^s £emben. £r fiat fie at(e gelefen. Die grofjen Simmer toerben Diet beffer unb angenetytner fein. «'■ ♦ ■'» LESSON XL. Scftion 40. Feminine Nouns adding e in the Plural.* Obs. I. — Some feminine nouns form their plural by modifying the radical vowel and adding t only. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Die 9Jku3, the mouse Die Sliinfe t>er 9ftaufe ben Sftmtfen bie 9Jtaufe Die ©tatt, the town tie yiafyt, the night bie Suft, the air tie §anb, the hand bie ®an3, the goose tie 9tujj , the walnut tie $u1j, the cow We grud)t, the fruit Examples. Die Srour, the bride Die Sra'ute ter Sraute ten SSrSuten tie SBrSute Die gauft, the fist Die gihtfte ber Sdufie ten giiuften bie goujle Die $unft, the art Die iftmfte ber $iinfte ben itunften: bie ^iinfte Die ©tatte, the towns bie -Wadjte, the nights tie Sxifte, the airs bie Jpanbe, the hands tie ©anfe, the geese tie SRiiffe, the walnuts tie Rii^e, the cows tie grudge, the fruits See page 171, Fourth Declension. 76 feminine nouns: ieeegulab plural. Obs. II. — The words Wl u 1 1 e r and Softer modify their vowel in the plural, but do not add t. Die Gutter, the mother Die flitter, the mothers tie SEodjter, the daughter bte SEo^ter, the. daughters tie geber, the feather ber Stufjbaum, the walnut-tree ber Seroo^ner, the inhabitant tterfdjxeten, different fett, fat flicgen, to fly fongen, to catch im (contraction of in-bem). Reading Exercise XL. Die Sewoljner grofjer ©tiibre unb tleiner Dbrfer ftnb fetyr serfdjie* ten (different). Die ©tra^ett ber ©tftbte Serlin unb tyaxxi ftnb Breit. Die reicfyften Seute roofynen nid)t immer in ken grbfjten ©tabten. ©tnb tie ^iad^te linger im SBinter ati im ©ommer? Die Mafym fan* gen 9Raufe. Die grudjte ber SSutne roerben BalD (soon) reif fein. Dtefe M|e (into fett, abtx unfere ©iinfe werben fetter fein. Die guten £ij$ter unferer 5Ra(Skrin. 3$ |afo jroei £iinbe unb jroet giijje. fyabtn ©ie tie Hcinen $a(5en gefe|en ? 21So |inb bie SSbgel ? ©ie ffnb in ben ^iiftgen. (Men ©ie biefe Srtefe 3$«n £od)tern. Theme XL. The monkeys have four hands. What have you there (ba) ? I have two mice. Are the cherries ripe ? No, they will be ripe soon. The geese have feathers. I like the fat geese. The fruit(s) of the trees will be ripe. The walnuts are very good. The cows are not so big as the oxen. The gardener will have five cows. The inhabitants of these vil- lages will have many cows and geese. The walnuts are the fruit(s) of the walnut-tree. These daughters love their mothers. Conversation. . gang:n tie SWSufe bte £a|scn ? 3Wn, bie flajjen fangen tie SKaufe. 2So ffiegen bie SSbgcI? £{ e SUget fliegcn h ber Shift. NEUTEB NOUNS : PLUBAL IN e. 77 SHefcen ©ie Me grofjen ©tabte ? SEBie finD tie ©trajjen biefer ©tabt? SBertet i|r ©onfe fyaben ? 2Baa Ijaben bie ©iinje ? 3Bie side ipanbe tyaBen tie 2lffen ? 9tein, id) licBc tie fleinen ©brfer. ©ie ftnb Brett unb fcfjbn. 9iein, mir werben $ulje tyaben. ©ie laBen lange ^ebern. ©ie tyaben »ier Jpiinbe. §abenbie £bd)terber ©rafin ©bfyne? Stein, fte $abm teine tinier. LESSON XL1. Seltion 41. Keuter Nouns adding c in the Plural.* Obs. — Some neuter nouns form their plural by adding e only, f £as Slop, the float Norn. £ie glbjje Gen. ber glbjje Dat. ben glbpen Ace. bie glBjje Examples. ©as SPferb, the horse SMe spferbc ber ^Pfetbc ben $ferben tie spferbe ©as ©ctct, the prayer ©ie ®e6ete ber ©efeete ben ©ebeten tie ©ebete IBaa $ferb, the horse baa ©d)af, *h e sheep baa Satyr, the year baa £tyier, the animal baa ©d)iff, the ship baa ©d)n>ein, the pig ber Slatrofe, the sailor bie 25Me, the wool bie 3at)I, the number bie StaJjrung, food jetyn, ten, awanjtg, twenty ©ie $ferbe, the horses bie ©d)afe, the sheep {pi.} baa ©piel, the play, game baa Jpeft, the copy-book baa £fcrt>c, jtuangig ©d>fe unb jefyn $itye. £)te SEljore ber ©tabte (Inb often, ©inb afle 3tyere niifclid) ? £ie SRaljrung ber latere ifl »erfd)ieben. £er ©raf ^at alle fetne $ferbe serfauft. £atte er Bide $ferte ? fir ^atte jeljn $ferbe. gin 3"be Ijatte (ie gelauft. Dte Sljiere faufen SBoffcr. £ie -Sftatrofen finb auf (on) ben englijdjen Stiffen. S)ie ipaare ber Winter finb fdjtoarj. Siefcen bie Winter tic ©piele? ®u fcift jet)n Sa^re alt, icfo n>ert>e jwanjig 3<$« alt fein. SBie alt ifi biefeS @d)»ein ? £ie reine SSoIIe ber ©djafe. £ie ©djafe unb tie $ferbe finb bie jatjlreidjften S^iere. ©inb bie Jljore ber ©tabt often. Theme XLI. The gates of the towns are shut (gefd)(offen). Have you any pigs? The horses are larger than the sheep. The boys like the games. Where are the copy-books of your pupils ? They are not very clean. The sheep have wool. We eat the meat of the sheep, of the oxen, and of the pigs. The meat of the sheep is better than that (ia$) of the pigs; it is healthier. The ships of the English are very numerous. Conversation. £afcen ©ie ^ferbe ? 9iein, after »ir werben 3e^n ©djafe tjaben. ©inb bie $ittje nu&Itdjer ate bie Die 5?utje finb bie iut|3tid)[ten ©djroeine ? Jljiere. Sftbie SMeberSdjafenii&Iid}? ©ie SMe ber ©djafe ift fe*- niifcUrf). ©inb bie £aare beg $tnbes fd)»arj ? ©ie finb tsetjj. £rinrt ber £unb 2Baffer ? SXtle Styere faufen SBaffer. 2Ba3 $at ber 3ube gefauft? fir Ijat neue #emben gefauft. £afcen ©ie bie ©d)tffe ber finglan* 3d) tyafce siele ©djiffe gejeljen. ber gefeljen ? 2Bie alt finb ©ie ? 3d) Mn jwanjig 3a$re aft. IEEEGULAB PLURAL: MASCULINE MONOSYLLABLES. 79 LESSON XLH. Scftiott 42. Some Masculine Nouns with an Irregular Plural.* Obs. — Some masculine monosyllabic nouns form their plural by modifying the radical vowel and adding tX. Examples: £)er Sett, the body Der ©eijt, the spirit £er Drt, the place Dcr Sftcmb, the edge Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. £tte Setter ber Setter ben Settern bic Setter £ie ©eijler ber ©eijler ben ©eiflern bic ©eijler t|um. ©efcen @te btejen armen fKannern 33rob unb ^iife. gretTenf (eat) bie SBurmer bie SBogel? SBir fennen bie 3teid)tljumer ber tonight. 2Bem gefjbren bicfe SBaloer ? ©te gefjoren bem reiefcen $Kad)Dar. £err Gutter tjat aUe feine 3leid)tf)umer wtoren. ©ie Setter ber 9Jtenfd)en jinc fierblld) (mortal), ctter bie ©eelen ftnD unfterWid). 5Do leben bie SBurmer? ©inb bic ©otter ber ipeiben at!? mad)tig ? * See page 166, Third Declension (Exception IIL). t The word freffett (to eat) is applied only to animal*. 80 PLURAL OF MASCULINE AND NBUTEIl NOUNS. Theme XLII. The worms live in the ground (earth). Do the worms eat (freffen) birds? No, the birds eat worms. Have the gods wealth ? The count has lost his wealth (plur.). The gods of the heathens. These men have taken my gold watch. Do you know these English men? Had your uncle any woods? No, the rich count has large* woods. The beautiful horses belong to those poor men. God hears (§ort) the prayers of the poor people. Conversation. 2Co flnb tie S3BgcI? $3er Ijat meine gottene U|r ge* nommcn ? tfennen <3te ttefe SJtimner? 28em ge^iiren ttefe SBafter ? ©tnfc tic Setter ter 9J?enfd)eit jterMtd) ? ©tab tie ©otter ter ipeiten oD* mac^tig ? a3 9Jtabd)en, the girl 2)as ^inblein, the little child Nom. "Hie SfJtandjen Gen. ber SJiab^en Dat., ben2KaBd)en Ace. bie SUJabdjen Tie ^inblein ber $inbletn ben ^inblein bie iUnblein 1)er 23ader, the baker tier Sbffel, the spoon Her gliigel, the wing ba3 Sftefler, the knife (tlbem, silver (adj.) fdjarf, sharp nur, only 5)er (Stiefel, the boot ba3 ^inblein, the little child tnefyrere, several wenige, few tceife, wise tybren, to hear Reading Exercise XLIII. Unfere 25ftter rearen alt. Die Siefce ber SSater unb ber Gutter. Diefer ©artner |at jroei ©arten, wir roerben einen ©arten fyakn. £te 23bge( leben in ber Suft (air). 2Bo roofynt ber SSiicEer ? SBtr fyakn feme Sader in btefer <3tabt. Diefe 9Jlabc^en ftnb bie Softer bes SBddfers. "Die 9Jiagb 1}at bie Sbffet unb bie 9ttejfer jerbrocr>en. £afcen bie Siiget gluget ? £a6t t|r golbene ober fttterne Sbffet? SBir |akn ine^rere Sriiber. 3fyr $<&t nur fdjarfe SJtejfer. Theme XLIII. The fathers are wiser than the sons. Where are Charles's brothers? How many brothers has he? He has four brothers. Has she (any) sisters? She has only two. The 6 82 IEEEGULAIt FLUIEAL: MASCULINE NOuNS. gardens of the queen are beautiful. These bakers are poor. The birds have wings. The tailors make (mad)en) coats; the shoemakers make boots and shoes; the -watchmakers make watches. The servant has lost only four gold spoons and two silver knives. Conversation. SBer fins btefe jroet 9Jtabd)en ? ©te finb bte Sodjter bea Ufyrmadjera. Jpat ber ©iirtner Dtcle Sfel ? &r Ijat nur eaten gfel, afcer er $at Bier $ferbe. ffiic stele 33. — Some masculine nouns ending in tt, d and or, form their plural by adding n ; words in ot add en. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. £er ©tad;el, the Bting ■Die ©tadjeln ber ©tadjeln ben ©tadjeln bie ©tadjeln Examples. £er ©csatter, the god-father £ie ©eoattern ber ©e&attem ben ©eeattern bte ©eoattem £er 9Jtulu3fetn £te Saiern ber SRusfeln ber Saiern ben 9Rusfetn ben Saiern bte SJtusMn bte SSatern * See page 167, First Declension (Exceptions). IRREGULAR PLURAL: MASCULINE NOUNS. 83 Der Sauer, the peasant Dte Sauern, the peasants bet Setter, the cousin bte Settem, the cousins btx 5Rad)bar, the neighbor tie 9lad)6arn, the neighbors bn $antoP, the slipper tie $ antoptn, the slippers Reading Exercise XLIV. Die Scttern unferea ©euatters ftnn Sauern. Unfer 9tad)6ar i|t eiit Saier, feine 9tadj6arn fmt Satern. £afcen tie SRofett ©tadjefa? at jener Warm ftarf e SftuSf etn ? 9tein, feine SKuSfeln finb fd)»ad). £afct i^r eitten Setter? Stein, after rotr werben brei Settern fyafcen. ©ittb biefe SDtamter granjofen ? Dtefe banner ftnb Satern. 84 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES USED SUBSTANTIVELY. LESSON XLV Seftton 43. Adjectives and Participles used as Substantives. Obs. I. — Adjectives and participles, when used substantively are declined like adjectives, varying according as they are preceded by the definite (see Observation, Lesson XXVII) or indefinite article (see Observa- tion, Lesson XXIX). Singular. 1)cr 9tetfenbe, the traveler Nom. Her 9tetfenbe Gen. tti 9teifenben Dat. bent 3Heifent>en Ace. ten SMfenben Examples. Plural. Die Stetfenben, the travelers ©ie fReifenben ber Steifenben ben Steifenben bie 9tetfenben Sin grnnber, a stranger Sin Srember etneS Sremben etnem gremben einen gremben Obs. II. — There being no plural to the indefinite article the adjectives and participles, when used substan- tively, take the inflexion of the definite article. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Examples: Sin ©efangener, a prisoner ©efangene, prisoners ©efangener, of prisoners ©efangenen, to prisoners ©efangene, prisoners Sin Sfteifenber, a traveler Sftetfenbe, travelers SReifenber, of travelers SReifenten, to travelers 9teifenbe, travelers £er Steifenbe, the traveler ter ^rembe, the stranger ber ©efangene, the prisoner ba3 ©efangmjj, the prison Sin Sebienter, a servant ein ©efanbter, an ambassador etn ©ele^vter, a learned man ber SitiMar.rh'r, the bookseller THE INTEKBOGATIVE PKONOUJSS. 85 Reading Exercise XLV. Sin frember SJlcifenber $at km ©efangenen ge6rad)t (brought). £;er 8ud$anbler judjt etnen ©eleven. Der Sebtente beS ©efanbtcit ifi im (contraction/or in 5 em) ©efangmjj. £iefer £ut ge^ort bent Sremten. 3ener Sfteifenbe ijl cm g«mber. Bennett tefe ®elef)tten ftnb 33aie;n. 3d) get)e mit mciner ©djroejler ju unferer £ante. Theme XLV. Our neighbor is a learned man. These learned men are Bavarians. Who is this stranger ? He is a traveler. Is a learned man an ambassador? No, but this ambassador is a learned man. The booksellers have received these apples? To whose house (or to whom) are you going f I am going (3d) getye) to my aunt's with my little sister. Where is the prisoner ? He is in the prison. We have seen a stranger at the merchant's. Conversation. 2Qer ijl biefer grembe ? Sr ijl ber er gtngerfyut, the thimble tad Stud), (the) cloth gestagen, beaten ker ©ufoen, the florin gcrufen, called tie Stte, the ell, yard toflet, costs mit tnir, with me Bejrrctft, punished mit ^ntn, with you (to you) nod), still iefct, now Reading Exercise XLVI. tBai fiir ein Sudj woflen @ic? 2Bas fagen (say) @U? SEcr fommt mit Sfyntn »on Sertin ? SBcn |akn ©te gcrufen ? 3Ber ijl jener Steifenbe ? Sr ijl ber -Keffe bes 33ud)1janb(er3. Unfer SEtfdjler tyat biefe WoM gemadjt. 2Ben $at ber ©djneiber gerufen ? SBem getyort biejer ®orten ? ©r geljort tern $rofeffor. Her junge £i|"d>Ier Ijat biefe fd)imen ©tiifjte unb otte SJciSIJel in biefem £aufe gemadjt. 2Cer iat 2Bifl)etm gefdilagett ? SCeffen 3tod f)a(i bu jerriffen ? £arfe 9*od tft jerriffen. 3d) ^a6e beine ©ramtnatif bent Sftofiert gelte^en. 2Dem $at i$re Soufine ityren ginger^ut gelietyen ? fBen tyafcen ©te eingela* ben (invited) ? 3d) l«6e meine fceften greunbe eingelaben. Theme XLVI. "Who has made this beautiful table ? The old joiner has made all our furniture. "Who has beaten the bookseller? AUXILIARY VEBB fiafcett: COMPOUND TENSES. 87 The learned man has lent me a book. How much is (wie Siel fofter) a yard of this cloth ? To whom do you give this ring? Whose thimble is this ? A yard of this cloth costs two florins. "Whom hast thou punished? The son of the prisoner. Conversation. • 2Ber ift jener gremte ? @r tfr etn ©ofyt ted ©eleven. SBeffen Sftocf tjt jerrtffen ? £er SRod m Sifdjta. Spat ter 33ii6el gemadjt? 5Mn, bcr £tfd)Ier |at fie gemad)t. 2Bem gelj&rt Wefer ©tuljl? Sr getjort meinein ©rofj»ater. SBeffen gingerfcut §aft bu ? 3$ ^abe ben gingcr^ut beiner ©rofjmurter. SBarum tyat er tie S^uren mtfge* 6r 6at tie S^urett unb g^njicr auf* maty (opened) ? gemadjt, weit ti tuarm tfl. 2Baafurein33u$|a&en@te? 3d) $afce ©djttler^ ®ebld)te. LESSON XLYIL Settion 47. Compound Tenses* of the Auxiliary Verb #ofie«, TO HAVE. Participle Past: ®tfjdtt, had. PERFECT TENSE. 3d) $alt ge^afct, I have had Mr pfcen gepfcr, we have had bit $attet tljr gigarren getyabt ? $$ir fatten gute'gigarren gefyabt. £afl bu SBein getjabt ? 2Btr fatten SBaffer geljabr. fBeffen gigarre ^aben ferb fafcen, wenn er ®efo' genug t)atte. 9Mne ©Bljne wiirben auSgefyen, wenn fie nidjt unwoljt iuaren. Unfer Sifdjler witrce nid)t fo arm fein, wenn er fletfjiger ware. Die Sante witrbe nid)t fo fyungrtg fein, wenn fie StwaS gegeffen ijatte. 2Mrben @ie auf tas Sanb gefycn, wenn bas 3Setter nidjt fo fdjtedjt ware ? Die Winter wiirben ©ptelaeuge |a6en, wenn fie fpieten wiirben. Die gremben wiirben nidjt fo burftig fein, wenn fie SBaffer ptten. @ie wiirben nidjt tabeln. ' • After teenn, the verb is placed at the end. See Lesson 71. 94 AUXILIARY VEBBS t) 6 t XI AND f C i tt. FIRST CONDITIONAL. Theme L. I should be glad, if I had* those playthings. Thou wouldst bo thirsty. He would be hungry, if he had not eaten (gegeffen). Would you be sorry, if he were just ? She would be just. If thou wert glad, he would be glad also. They should have plums and apples, if they were ripe. Would she be happier, if she had more friends ? Would they be sorry, if they were more diligent ? They would have won (geroomten) the battle. Conversation. fflBiirbeftku ®efo fyafon, wemt fcein SSoter 3U #aufe taaxt 1 fBurben fie fro$ fein, tucnn ffe tai ©pteljeug fatten? SBiirben @te 2Bein trlnfen, wenn Sirnen. 3tyr ^iJrtet wai jncin Dnlel fagte. 2Bo$nten @ic ntd)t in Scrlin ? @ie getyordjten fcem t tyaBen, I should have obeyed. PERFECT TENSE. I have made 3dj babe gemadjt fcu Ijaft gemadjt er $at gemad)t roir IjaBen gemad)t iljr $aBt gemad)t ©ie ^aBen gemadjt fie fyafeen QCmad)t FIRST FUTURE. I shall build 3d) toetfee Bauen bu wirft Bauen cr wlrb Bauen wtr werben Bauen % tterbet Bauen ©ie toerben Bauen (ie werben Bauen SECOND FUTURE. I shall have bought 3d) werfce gefauft babcn Ju wtrft gefauft B,a6en er wirb gefauft f;a6en t»ir tuerben gefauft $aBen i|r werbet gefauft tyaBen ©te roerben gefauft faBen fie werben gefauft fyaBen PLUPERFECT. I had made 3d) twite gemadjt bu fyattcft gemad)t er batte gemad>t tt>ir fatten gcmadjt ibr battet gemadjt ©ie fatten Qcmad)t fie batten gemadjt FIRST CONDITIONAL. I should obey 3d) nmrfce geB,ord)eti bu wurbejt getyordjen er roiirbe geB.ordjen wir wiirben ge^ordjen xtyr tuiirbet ge^ordjen ©ie jviirben ge$ordjen fie witrben gefyordjen SECOND CONDITIONAL. I should have bought 3d) njwrfcc gefauft babcn bu roiirbeft gefauft fyaBen er wurbe gefauft tyaBen tcir wiirben gefauft tyaBen tfcr tmirbet gefauft B^aBen ©ie wurben gefauft tyaBeit fie roiirben gefauft tyaBen 98 REGULAB OB MODEEN VEEBS: COMPOUND TENSES. Additional Reading Exercise.* $nt unfer <5d)ub,tnad)er btefe ©We gemadjt ? 9letn, er f>at fie nid)t gemad)t. ©oft bu Me Slffen aud) gefe^en ? 3d) ^ btejeS £aus geBaitt. ©atte ber ©djiiter tie 2Iufgafte gelernt? Stein, er wire fie t)eute lernen. Sir wurben baS SBBrterBud) gelauft tyaben, roenn tttr ©elu geb,abt pttenf- 3* werbe tie Seftion morgen (to-morrow) Be* ensigen. SBirft bu ben Brief beenbtgt B,aben, e^e e3 bunfel tft ? SCir roeri>en bie 3ted)nung Beja^It IjaBen, e^e @ie aBretfen. <3te wiirben bie SBudjer gefud)t ijaBen, wenn fie 3eit geb,aBt fatten. Additional Theme. Who has made these tables ? I have learned my lesson. Charles has not read his book. The watchmaker had sold all his watches, we will sell ours. Would the children have played, iff they had had playthings? Where will your teacher live? Will you buy a new house in Berlin? Our sister would buy the dress. The merchant would have sold his house, iff he had lost his son. I should have believed it, if I had heard it. If you had loved me, I 2 shouldi have loved you also. The Professor would have praised Charles, if he had learned his lesson better. Conversation. SJofynten 1* iflt jwolf donate. £)iefer SSftonat |at cin unb breifj ig £age. 3« Wefcr ©tabt (Into taufenb £iiufer. SBic siel Ufjr ijt eS ? ©« ijt brei Ufyr ober |aI6 »ier. Der $i3nig lot tne^r ali ^unbert 9>ferbe. SBie stele 2Iufga6en ^at ber ©filler 6t« jejjt (as yet) geternt. S3 finb fed)je$n ipitfytdjen in bent £ofe. 9Wein 9ieffe ^at titer unb jwanjig ©tabte unb fed)3 unb adjtjig ©orfer gefe|en. Theme LII. How many horses has your uncle ? He had six horses, two dogs (£urtbe) and four oxen. How old is your eldest son ? He is fourteen years old, and my eldest daughter is eighteen years old. The hunter has shot to-day nineteen rabbits. Our gardener has caught more than twenty-seven chickens in your yard. There are eighteen florins in my purse. A week has seven days ; a month has four weeks; a year -has twelve months, fifty-two weeks or three hundred and sixty-five days. Conversation. 3Cte biele ©djiiler tyctt £err Sange ? ®r $at fiinf unb jwanjig @djuler. JJBte eft finb 3$re Softer ? £ie Sltefle tfl fiinftefot 3<^re aft. 0ED1NAL NUMBEBS. 101 2Bte Bid U$r i(l e<3 ? (£3 tft cut Stertel auf stet ober |aIB bier. 2Bas $at ber Sager gef^offen ? ©r Jjat jtuei ^aninctyen gefct)offen. 2Bo 1}at ier ©tetter tie ^ndjen ©r $at fie in tern £ofe gefangert. gefangen ? er jrocmjtgfte, the twentieth ber jweite, the second ber bretfjigfte, the thirtieth ber britte, the third ber ttterjigfte, the fortieth ber Sterte, the fourth ber fimfjigfte, the fiftieth ber fiinfte, the fifth ber fedjjigfte, the sixtieth ber fecfjste, the sixth ber fiefcenjigfte (or ftefcjigfte,) the ber fiefcente, the seventh seventieth ber acfjte, the eighth ber adjtjigfte, the eightieth ber neuttte, the ninth ber tteunjigfte, the ninetieth ber jetyttte, the tenth ber ljunbertfte, the hundredth ber lejste, the last ber jmetljuitbertjle, the two lum- ber ffiteirielte, what day of the dreth month ber taufenbfte, the thousandth Obs. I. — The ordinals are formed from the cardinals, up to the 19th inclusive (ber erfte, britte and ad)te excepted), by adding t, and from the 20th upwards, by adding ft, and are preceded by the article. They terminate in e in the nominative, and are declined like adjec- tives. See Lesson XXV, Obs. V, page 49. Obs. II. — In compound numbers the last only is ordinal, the others remain cardinals ; as, the 1238th, ber jtublftyunbert ad)t unb breijjtgfte. 102 OBDINAI. NUMBEES. Obs. HI. — In German the names of months and days require the definite article. £>er 3attunnerftag, Thursday ber iJftontgg, Monday bcr grcitag, Friday ber jDtenfteg, Tuesday bcr ©amjkg, (or ©onnaBenb) ber SWittood), Wednesday Saturday Obs. TV. — To denote repetition m a I is added to the cardi- nals; e in ma I, once; jroeimal, twice, etc. They are sometimes written e t n Wlal, 3 tt> e i Wlal, jc. Reading Exercise LIII, ®er erfte Sag bcr britten 2Bod)e. Etc Xe^ten Sage bcr »ortgen 2Bod)e. Unfer ^einridj if! immer bcr jtocite ober britte in jetner ^tajfe. ®er 3<*«»Krc ifl &« «f*e -Wonat bed 3ienfrag ber britte Sag ber 2Bod)e. griebrt^ foirb am ©onntag ober SJlontag ju 3tynen lorn* men. SBUtyelm ber firfk t|t ber ftetente Jtbnig son ^reujjen. Subwig ber SBierje^nte war iionig »on granlreidj unb ©ufksj Slbolf ^tBttig son ©ctoeben. 3d) Bin breimal in Sonbon gewefen. £>en t»ic sieften bed SKonatS |aBen t»ir tyeute ? SBtr $aBen tyeute ben neunjeljnten. Theme LIII. The first week in May was beautiful. Henry the eighth, king of England, had six wives. Saturday is the seventh day of the week. I have lost the second volume of Schil- ler's works. Mary is the third, Sarah is the fifth, and Eliza- beth the last. How much money do you have? I shall pay him on Thursday or Friday. I read my (news) paper every morning at eight o'clock.* "What day of the month is to-day ? * At. . . .o'clock, render urn- . • .Uljr. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 103 Conversation. 3jl bein Secret je in SBeriitt ge* 3a, er ifi bret ober stermal tort roefen ? geroefen. 2Bte lange r,a6en <3te in ©eutfdj* 3d) Ijafce trei donate unb »ier lanb gelefet ? Sage tort geleW. 2Gann toirji bu ju tnir fommen? 3$ werte morgen ober am Son* nerftag jit Sfjnen lontmen. £akn @ie fcbon Me 3"tu«3 &* 3a, id) Icfe (te jeben florgen um lefen? ftefcen U^r. SBann frar6 3ato6 ber Qtodtt ? Slot fcierjetynten ©eptemoer 1701. 2Sar ©onntag nidjt ber breijeljnte ? Stein, ©onntag war ber neunje^nte. LESSON LIV. Set tivn 54. Demonstrative Pronouns. Obs. I. — ©tefer, biefe, biefeS, this; plur. btefe, these; jener, Jene, i e n e 3 , that ; plur. j e n e , those ; are declined like the article. * Obs. n. — I! erjenige, biejenige, basjenige, that, the one; berfel&e, biefeUe, baffelbe, the same; also ber natnltdje, the same, and e o e n b e r s felBe, the very same, combine the declension of the article and the adjective. Declension of berjenige and the Abridged Form. Singular. Masc. Fern. Nom. berjenige or ber f btejenige or bie, that G-en. besjentgen or be(fen berjenigen or beren, of that Dat. bentjenigen or bem berjenigen or ber, to that Ace. benjenigen or ben biejenige or bie, that * Instead of b i e f e § Germans often use b i c $ and baa, and also e i. Ex. Dies finb meine SEBorte, these are my words. j- This abridged form of the demonstrative pronoun receives more stress than the definite article. 104 DEMONSTRATIVE PHONCUNS. Neuter. Norn. bcigjcntge or bag, that Gen. tegjenigen or beffen, of that Dat. bemjenigen or bent, to that .Ace. bagjentge or bag, that Plural. — Masc, Fern, and Neut. Norn. biejentgen or bie, those Gen. berjenigen or berer, of those Dat. benjentgen or benen, to those Ace. Mejenigen or tie, those Obs. IIL — In German if this or that is separated from its subject by the verb to be it takes the neuter form of the singular without any regard to the gender or number of the following noun. Ex. This is my son, Dtefeeift metn @o^n. Reading Exercise LIV. §ier iji metn §nt unb berjenige (or ber) beg 33rief6oten. #ler if} fetne Seber unb biejenige (or bie) unfereg Sebienten. 3°»" UJ)r i(l fleiner, alg bie meiner Sante. %enti .Stinb ift grijfjer, alg bag ^ijni Wa&jbaTi. !Der unartige Jfnabe fyat ntd)t nur fein 33ud) serloren, [on* bent audi bag fetneg Severs. 2>teg waren bie 2Borte unfereg StrjteS. Sag ift bag SSerl. SBir fpredjen toeber Bon unferem SSebienten nod) son bemjenigen (or b e m) Styti ©eneralg, fonbent son bent teg £errn ^o|Ier. SBeffen 33aU tft bieg? S)er Sefyrer $at kibe Sitdjer genome men. liefer 33anb beg SBerfeg ift auggegecen. Theme LIV. Elizabeth's silver thimble is better than that of Louisa. Have you taken my hat or that of Charles. We shall sell not only this house, but * also that of our uncle. I have taken neither your umbrella nor that of Miss Miller. I have taken Frederick's umbrella. Henry has spent his money and that * But after a negated clause is generally rendered [ onficvn (see p. 239). RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 105 of his niece. The rabbits, which we have shot, are fatter than those, which the hunter has caught. Emily has lost her watch and that of her mother. Gustavus has eaten his peas and those of his brother. Monday is my eighteenth birthday. Conversation. &ot ber Secret %fy S3udj Berloren ober bagjentge metneg 33ruberg ? Spredjen @ie »on 3|rem ©otyne ober uon bent beg £erat Sane? S03e|fettU^i|iMe«? 3JUt went witnfdjen <5ie gu fpredjen ? 3ji btefeg 3$r Jput? 3ji biefer ©arteit ju serfaufen ? SMdjeg »on biefen 9Jtef|em werben @le faufen ? 3ft jeneg £aug grijfjer, ate bag 3^res SRadjBarg ? SBerben <3te mein 9>fcrb ober bag beg £errn SSJMtter faufen ? Sr Ijat bagjentge 31j"3 SruberS Serloren. 3d> fpredje raeber son meinem ©ofyne nod) »on bem beg £errn 33anf, fonbem son bem beg Slrjteg. Sg tjt bte meiner Softer Smtlte. 3d) wjinfdje nut bem alten SBrief* Boten ju fpredjen. Stein, id) ^a6e feinen Jput. ©tefer ©arten unb bet unfereg 9lad)6arg jtnb ju serfaufen. 3d) toerbe toeber bag etne nod) bag anbere faufen. 3eneg §aug tft »tet gr&jjer unb befler, ate bag unfereg 9tad)krg. 3d) tserbe toeber 3^ $ferb nod) bag beg £errn SMtler faufen. LESSON LV. Seftion 55. Eelative Pronouns, Obs. I. — In German the relative pronouns » e I d) e r , to e I d) e, tt) e I dj e g , and ber, bie, bag are used without regard to persons, animals or things, and require the verb at the end of the sentence. Obs. II. — In English the relative pronoun may be omitted, but in German it must always be expressed. 106 EELATIVE PRONOUNS. Declension of meldjer. Singular. Plural. Mase. Fern. Went. For aM genders. Nom. welder tt>eltf)e Weltf)e3 weid)e, who, which, that •Gen. tefen beren kef en beren, whose, of which Dat. ttetc^m welder weldjem wetdjen, to whom, to which Ace. wctd)en weldje weldjea tteldje, whom, which, that Declension of ber. Singular. Plural. Mase. Fern. Neut. For aM genders. Nom. ber Me ba« Me, who, which, that Gen. befen beren befen beren, whose, of which Dat. bent ber bent benen, to whom, to which Ace. ben Me baa tie, whom, which Reading Exercise LV. 2Do ijt bet Sifdjfa, wetter unferen neuen £tfd) gemadjt $at ? £aben @ie bas £aus gefe|en, Welches ber 9Ke&ger gekwt la:? 2Me $nakn, metdje bie ^trfdjen gefauft |a6en, jtnb Me meinigen. ame, bie mtr einen 3legenfd)irnt geltefjen Ijat. (£$ tft ber SBriefbote, in beffen £aus mein Dnfel wotynt. 3a, id) fenne t§n, er ifl ber greunb ber SBtttwe. £)er 9Mer, beffen £od)ter biefen Srief gefdjrteben Ijat, ^etjjt 2Betfj. (S3 entljalt (contains) ad)t 3""* mer unb eine ^iidje. 3d) fjabe beibe 33ud)er gelefen. LESSON LVL Seftion 56. Personal Pronouns, Obs. I. — The personal pronouns are t d) , I; b u , thou; e r (mas.) he; fie, (fern.) she ; and eg (neut.) it. 108 DECLENSION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. Declension of the Personal Pronouns, Singular. 1st Person. 2nd Person. For all genders. For all gender*. Nom. id), I bu, thou Gen. metner, of me beiner, of thee Dat. mir, to me btr, to thee Ace. midj, me bid), thee 3d Person. Masc. Fern. Neut. Nom. er, he fie, she eg, it Gen. feiner, of him itjrer, of her feiner, of it Dat. Qm, to him t|r, to her if)m, to it Ace. i|n, him fie, her ea, it Plural. For aU genders Nom. tolr, we tf)r or <5te, you fie, they Gen. unferer, of us eucr or 3^er, of ; (unfer) you i^rer, of them Dat. una, to us eud) or 3^nen, tc 1 you i^ncn, to them Ace. unS, us eud) or @ie, you fie, them Obs. II. — © u is employed, in German, in addressing the Deity, and is used between near relations, intimate friends, and to servants and inferiors generally. SBorterfmcfj @3 t|ut mtr leib, id) lann ti 3|nen lei^en ? nic^t leityen, e3 iji bei bent 33ud)* btnber. itbnnen © te nid)t ansge^en ? *Mn, toir miiffen ju £aufe Hei^w . LESSON LVH. Settivn 57. Indefinite Pronouns. The indefinite pronouns are: SJtan, one (French, on), they. 3ebermann, everyone, everybody. Semanb, some one, somebody. Sftietnanb, no one, nobody. @toaS, anything, something. 9Md)t3, nothing, not-anything. <3el6(l (or felber), self, fiinanber, each other, one another. Reiner, e, i, nobody, none, no one. Obs. I. — 9Ji a n occurs only in the nominative, (if another case is required the corresponding oblique case of einer is used (see lOT), and requires the verb in the singular. It is expressed in English not only by one and they, but also by the passive . voice : 9JJ an fa gt , they say, one says, or, it is said (French, on dit). Obs. II. — 3cbermann takes § in the genitive, the other cases remain unchanged. 3entanb and Wit* manb take g or eg in the genitive. In the dative INDEFINITE PRONOCNS. Ill the ending is ettt, and in the accusative Ctt. Quite frequently these endings are dropped. Obs. HI. — Uemanb) fann jiucien (two) Jperren bienen. Jpat Jir bas 3emanb gefagt ? SKetn 33ruber lobt ftiemanben. Theme LVIL My brother does not love anybody. Has somebody told you that ? Nobody can serve more than one master (£ c r r). They say (or it is said) that he is ill. One must love one's (feinen) neighbor as oneself (fid) fell) ft). He has come himself. I shall do it myself. One is happy when one is contented. Be* polite to (g eg en) every body. Had the man received anything? No one is without faults. Several have made the same mistake. Conversation. £at man tt)n gefeljen ? 9?ein, er war ntdjt ju §aufe. Jpat bir bas 3emanb gefagt ? Sfteineg DnMs Sodjter tyat ti mtr gefagt. Sobte ble Gutter tfyre Softer fetbjt ? Sftein, unfer Dnf el lobte (le. Siebt betn Sruber Scmanien? Stein, er Hebt Stiemanben. 2Bar SemanB t)ter ? 9tein, ti war 9ttemanb tyer. £aben SJJtefyrere benfelben %tijltx $arl unb 3"^ann wnb nodj anbere gemadjt? tjaben tt)n gemadjt. * For the imperative of to be, see p. 200. 112 PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE. 3|* bteS 3ebermarats $PfK<$t ? @3 ijl ni^t 3ebermann3 g>flt$r. ©udjen btefe ^nafcen etnanber ? ffteitt, fie fpredien ntdjt mit eiiu anber. §o(l bu je (ever) etoas ©djBne* 3$ |i6e nic (never) etoas ©d)o* res gefe^en ? neres gcfe^ctt. 3jl Reiner ofyte Seller ? Sttemanb (Reiner) tft oljne getter. LESSON LVm. SOtwn 38. Prepositions Governing the Accusative. Obs. I. — The following prepositions govern the accusative case only. See Lesson XXXTTT, page 63. ©itrdj, through, by means of, by D|nc, -without fiir,* for urn, around, about, at gegen, against, towards ttJtBer, against The Diminutives djen and Wit. Obs. II. — In German nearly all substantives may be formed into diminutives by affixing d)cit or lein. Nouns ending in c drop this letter in the diminutive form, and those containing the vowels a, o, U are modified. The diminutives are neuter, and are used not only to express small size, but also affection, and in some cases, oddity. Reading Exercise LVIII. ©as SKabdjen faufte eiit SSeitdjen fiir meine ©d)»efter. 28ir werben burd) ben SSalb geljen. £)iefe .Rtrfdjen finb fiir bag SE&djterleiri wnferea ° % ur is never a conjunction in German, the word corresponding to the English conjunction for is b e nti. THE DIMINUTIVES d) t It AND I t i It. 113 SDte&gers. Su tljuft ties witer feinen SBitten. SBirft tu turd) baa 2Bajfer getyen? giir n>en ift toicfer Srief ? -Er ift fitr metn @dj»e* Perc^ett. ©as £untd>en ter SBittroe lauft (runs) gew&tjnltd) turd) tie ©trafje. 3me$ Sftanndjen fyatte tin §au3d)en. a6er e3 lot e3 nidjt metyr (any longer). Unfere Sefjrftunte tft soriiber, follett wir Ijier HeiBen oter nod) Jpoufe geljen ? Sin 9to3letn roiidjft (grows) auf ter 33riide. SKit went ift tctn Sriiterdsen angefommen ? S3 ift mit jwei antcrn 9teifenten anaefommen. ®egen ntid) Theme LVIIL Through the little forest (3Baftd)cn). That little man stays more than an hour. My dear wife (SEetfcdjen) is commonly not very troublesome. ' A little dog sits upon the bridge. This is only one little trunk, where are the trunks. This book is for my little sister. At four o'clock. Against the wall of the house. I cannot* buy it without money. How much money do you want for it (tflfitr) ? He is against me. We shall sit around the table. Shall I do it against (letter) his will? By (mit) what means have you bought this little tree ? A little rose and a little bird. Conversation. $a6en@te metn£iintd)en gefetyen? 3a, rnein Jperr, es3 ift efcen urn bag £aus gelaufen (run). ®egen wen foil man Pflid) fein ? ©egen 3eb«mann. SJo^in flog (new) las SSogetdjen? S3 flog turd) tas genfterlein. SSteibfl tu ju Jpaufe witer ten Stein, unfer Sefyrer ift franf, ttrir 3Bitten teineS Severs ? tjafcen Ijeute fetne ©tunte. Durd)»eIdie5RittelMjttugefunt? DurA tie SKittel tes £errn (of the Lord). pr wen ift ttefea Sriefdjen ? S3 ift fur tein ©dtroefterletn. SSirft tu turd) tai SBajfer ge^en ? Stein, id) merte gegen ten 33erg ge^en. ©inb ©te ofyte ©etc ? 3d) tin o^ne etnen pfennig. * For the place of the negation see p. 219, 136, and p. 254. 114 NAMES OF COUNTRIES AND PLACES. LESSON LIX. Scftion 59, Names of Countries and Places. Obs. I. — Names of countries and places have in German, as in English, no article,* and form their genitive by adding g, except those ending in g, r and 3, ■which remain unchanged, but are preceded by the preposition son. Obs. II. — When the governing word stands before the name of a country or place, the genitive of the latter is not formed by the addition of §, but the preposition son precedes it, as : 'Lit tonight son g n g I a n b , and not tic $ontgtn g n g I a n b ' S. guropa, Europe Deltoid), Austria 2lmerifa, America ©panien, Spain gnglanb, England Stalien, Italy granfretd), France $reu£en, Prussia ©eutfdjtanb, Germany Sftufjlanb, Eussia 2Bten, Vienna 3tom, Eome Reading Exercise LIX. 3d) get)e nad) granfretd). £er $rofej[or Sartt) tefetc in SJeutfdslanb. £>iefe SluSibanbever Berloffcn ityre £etntat^ unb ge|en ttad) gnglanb. 2Bie ^eip tic ^aifcrtn »on granfretd) ? @ie |eijjt gugenie unb bie $bnigin »on $reujjen ^etfjt 2lugu|te. "Dcr 9tame beg ^aifers son Sftujjlant ift SHeranbcr. 3fi Portugal Hetner ali ©panien ? Defheid) ifl nid)t fo grojj ati Slmerifa. SMdjes ijl bas grijjjte 2onb in gitropa ? Stalien ifi ein .Ronigreid), 9tujjtanb etn $atferu)utn. ^ommen @ie »on $arU? 2BeId)e« ijl ©eutfdjlanb'a £auptftabt? granlfurt am SOtatn. £akn ©ie ben SSater ber beutfdjen gtuffe gefe^en ? 3(1 & ber SftMn? Except bie @ nid)t ge* roafdien ? Der 2Ctnb Hies geftern ftarfer. £at bte $ijd)in bas gtetfdj geBraten ? £)er SWonn ftel som !Dad)e. SKtt ©pecf fangt man SOtdufe. pr wen B,ielten @ie iB,n ? Stamen fie mtr ei fyangen git (affen ? SHa fen @te mid) ? 3d) ^aBe te$te 9tadjt ntdjt gut gefdjlafen. SBarum ftbjjeftbumid)? ? Theme LX. The baker bakes good bread. With whom did you drive yesterday? "We drove in an elegant carriage. Are you digging a hole ? "Why did you beat the woman? The Ger- mans say: One hand washes the otlier. Will much. tobacco grow in Germany? Where did it formerly grow? What did God create in the beginning ? Is the gun loaded ? Does the wind blow to-day? Are you cooking the meat? "When did the man fall from the roof? How are mice caught ? They took him for a thief. I advised him to go to Paris. I called you twice. I slept more than eight hours. Why did you push the old woman ? Go (thou) to bed. 118 IBBEGULAR VERBS: SECOND CONJUGATION. Conversation. SBerben er etn ®vab gegrafcen ? £at ber $odj bas gietfd) gefcraten? Jpa&en ad)fiber2:ak$ tft gewanbt. ° See note on page 118. IBBEGULAB VERBS: SECOND CONJUGATION. 121 Theme LXI. Who commands the soldiers? The captain ordered me (dot.) not to break the glass. I think this milk is spoiled. I was frightened and ran when he came. I gave him all my money. Henry was born on Saturday. John has been (ttwrbe) stung by a bee. Louis XTV. died in the year 1715. This, boy spoils his coat. I spoke of Frederick the Great. Thou didst not hit the mark. I gave you a pen, have you given it to my brother ? This boy ate too many strawberries. I have commanded him not to take it. This boy reads very low. Why did you measure this cloth ? The blind do not see. You have spoiled this book, I shall not take it. We know your qualities. Who burned my letter? Didst thou send it yesterday? Conversation SBaS frlft bag 3>feri> ? <£$ frijjt ®ras, Jpeu unb $af?r. ©afcjtbubeinemSeljrerSrbfceerert? Sftetn, id) glaufce er ijjt jle ntd)t gent. Jpajl bu bas £udj gemejfen? gs mafj Bier unb eine fyaflje SHe. Sraffl bit ben SKe&jer ju Jpaufe ? eutfd) ju lernen? ©er Jpunb 6ifj mid; in bie £anb. ©er $nabe glitt unb brad) ein Sein. SStrjl bu iljn greifcn ? 3d) $alt siel gelitten. ©ie gleidjt iijrer Gutter. 3ft e* geriffen ? Sr ritt ju fdmefl. 3fyr (fritter wie JpelDen, aber mufjter entity weidjen. £)er 2Binb pftff burd) bie SSaume. £aft bu bid) in ben ginger gefdjnit* ten ? 3c6 befafyt meinem ©tener betn 9ftej]er ju fd)Ieifen. £einrid) blieb 3«5ei ©tunben auf bent $affeeb,aufe. ^ennjt bu ben SSerfaffer ber jeneS S3ud) gefdjrieben ^at ? SSarum $ajl bu tfm nidjt gemieben ? ©ie muffen ntd)t fdjreten. 2Bie tjeifjen ©ie ? ©eine SKutter ^iejj 3ob,anna. SBenn bu gefd)h>iegen ^artejt, mitrbefr bu tftiemanb beteibigt Ijaben. Sr pries ©ott. 2lls id) ©ie faij, flieg id) aud) auf ben Serg, obgleid) bie ©onne fefyr warm fdjien. Theme LXII. Your dog bites everybody. We perceived a large flame. John applied himself to learn German. He compared my theme with yours. He cut his name in the tree. Have you made (cut) a pen ? We strode across ^ fiber) the field and found a dog. Does she resemble her mother ? He rides too fast. Did you suffer much during your illness? Henry ■whistled. I cut (myself in the) my finger. I commanded our servant to sharpen your razor. How long will you remain here ? I wrote a letter of six pages. A shepherd drives the sheep. Has (3ft) the flax thriven ? Why did you scream ? The teacher pardoned him. The good men praised God. Conversation. £aben ©ie ©id) befliffen Deutfdj 3d) Mteb taglid) jwei ©runben bei ju ternen ? nteinem Sefyrer urn ti ju lernen. Jtemten ©ie ben Serfaffer, ber 3$ fenne ifyn nidjt, fein 9tante ifl jenes Sud) gefdjrieben |at ? auf bent Sitelbtatte nid)t ange* geben. SSarum Ijaben ©ie ben Untgang ©ie fd)ien fefyr t;i>flid) unb e^rlid) jener grau nid)t gemieben,? ju fein. Slieben ©ie lange in Serltn ? 3*»ei ober brei SRonate. IRBEGULAR VERBS: F0UETH CONJUGATION. 125 $at 3i)nen ber SGe^gler ©eft "Sdein, meiti !Ra^6at He| e3 mir. gelieljen? 2Bie *>ie& 3|r Dtjelm ? gr ^tcg ©astfefoftt. mtifyn icir unferer Gutter ? ftetn, @ie glei^cn 3b,rem SSater. LESSON LXm. Seltion 63. fourth Conjugation (Imperfect and Past Participle with o), Obs. — This conjugation has both in the imperfect and past participle a as the characterizing vowel. It is divided into three classes, the first of which has e for the radi- cal vowel, the second ie (or i), and the third the modi- fied vowels ii, 3, ii, or the diphthong nu. Fibst Class: Eadical Vowel c Infinitive : 2B e b e n , to weave. Past Part. : g c tr> o 6 c n, woven. Present (Indicative). 3d) to e 6 e , feu tuebji, cr t»ebt S3ir webert, tfjr icebet (©ieweben), jten>eben Imperfect. 3* »ob * htfoobft, cr roob 3Btr icoben, tfjr st>obet (<2tetDoben),ftetroben webe, weave (thou) tuebet or fteben o g e n , considered. Present {Indicative). 34) crwagc, bit er? tragft, er erroitgt 2Btr erroiigen, t|r er* ttdget (Oieerwagen), fie erwiigen Imperfect. 3d) e r m o g , tot er= rcogft, er erroog 2Bir ertuogen, il>r crs tuoget (a$ 3)ferb fduft ju oiel 3Baffer. Tier ©djein triigt. Sr fcetrog mid) rntr einmal. £>er S^e tot mir neunjig Scaler fiir mem $ferb. $cmn bein SS6gctd)en fttegen ? Die ^onijier genoffen it)r einfadjea 9MjI. £er S^ein fricrt fetten. £aft bu je $ul»er gerodjen ? ©teben bie ^artoffeln ? 3d, fie roerbeit Mb gefotten fein. 2Bir jogen in bie ©djladjt unb fdjmoren ju ftegett ober ju fterfcen. Jpoji bu beitt ®efc Uerioren? S3 war toofyl erroogen. Die $ferbe fdjno&en. 3(1 es gegoljren ? Theme LXIII. What induced you to leave Germany ? Will the light of the sun ever become extinct? We have shorn our sheep. 'He milks the cow. The soldiers fought bravely, they swore to conquer or to die, not one soldier fled The fire glimmers long. The bees suck honey from flowers. You must never lie. The river is swollen. Who has woven this cloth ? This Jew does not cheat. The wagon bent under the weight. I offered 120 dollars for the horse. The hunter shot, and the bird flew away (bewon). We enjoyed our supper. The rain poured in streams. The door does not lock. The snakes creep. The rose smells agreeably. The potatoes are frozen. What are you boiling ? My uncle has lost all his money. The leeches suck blood. Does it screw ? The fire melted them. It is forbidden to smoke here. * Sofdjen and sertofdjen, to extinguish, are regular. 128 IBRECTOLAB VEBBS: FIFTH CONJUGATION. Conversation. 2Ba3 Betoog @te $eutj$Ianb ju 3$ fonnte feme SlrBeit ftnfcen. setlaffen ? £afcen Die ©oteotm tapfer ge* @te fofyen arie £efoen, benit fte fod)ten ? fatten gejc^ttwen, ju fiegen ofcer ju jterten. fl&nnen@ieMefen@tcln$eien? Sttetn, er ift ju j$»er fiir mid), after mein Dnfel^at itjngegoben. $aten @te fctefes £ud) gewofcen ? Stein, Ser £utf)mad)er $at eg ge* wokn. SBann ftyeeren @ie 3ftre ©ckafe ? 2Btr kfcen fte immcr tm gru^ja|r gefdjoren. SBcrbc'n tie Sartojfeln klc gejbfc* <3ie werben in torei SJttmtten ge* ten fein ? fottcn fcin. LESSON LXIV. Zeftivn 64. Fifth Conjugation (Eadical Vowel i [or w], Imperfect with a [or a]). Obs. — This conjugation is divided into three classes, all of which have i for their radical vowel. In the imper- fect i changes to o. In the past participle t changes in the first class to u, in the second to o, and in the third to e. Fikst Class: Past Participle with u- Infinitive: S i n b e tt , to bind, tie. Past Part. : g e 6 u n b c n , bound. Present (ImMeatiee). 3d) Mnfce, buMnbcfl, cr btnbet Mr Mnben , ifc> Btnbet (<5le btnben), fte Bins ten 3d)Banb, bu Bcmbft, er Banb 2Bir Banben, tijr Bantet (@te Banlen), fie knben Imperative. Mnfce, bind (thou) Btnbet or Binben @ie, bind (you) irreguar verbs: fifth conjugation. 129 Thus are conjugated: fcringen,* to urge (press); empfmten, to feel; ftnlen, to find; getingen, (impers.), to succeed; flingen,* to sound (tinkle); rtngen,f to wrestle (wring); fd)lingen,* to sling, twine; f(fett)inCen, to vanish, disappear; fdjmhtgen,* to swing; fingen,* to sing; (mien,* to sink; fimngen,* to spring, jump, crack; fttnfen,* to stink; trtnfen,* to drink; tointett, to wind ; jwtngen, to compel (force) ; Mngen,* fcung, gekungen, to hire; and fdjtnfcen, fdjitnb, gefdjmrten, to flay. Second Class : Past Participle with o. Infinitive : Seginnen, to begin. Past Part.: Begonnen, begun. Present (Indicative). 3d) Begtnne, fcu Be* ginnft, er Beginnt Mr Beginnen, ttyrBe* ginnet (r Bittet (@ie Bitten), fie Bitten 3d) Bot, tot Bateft, er Bat SBir Baten, iljr Batet (@ie Baten), fte Baten Imperatvee. Bitte, beg (thou) Bittet or Bitten <3te, request (you) * The verbs marked with an * omit e in the ending of the second and third person singular of the present : bu bringfir er bringt. i Umrittgett, to surround, is regular. 130 IBEEGULAR VERBS: FIFTH CONJUGATION. Thus are conjugated : liegen,* to lie down; (Ijjen, fafj, gefeptt, to sit; and the compound verb 6eji|3en, fcefajj, kfeffen, to possess. Reading Exercise LXIV. £ajl bu bas 33aumd)en an eincrt $fa|I gefotnben? 3d) fanb Sertfjolb im ^affeetyaufe. Die ^reujjen brangen auf SBaffenftillftenb. Die ^ugel ifi bem ©ofoaten burdj iai Setn gebrungen. T>a& 9>ferto unfereS 9tad)fcar$ fprang tiber einen ^oljen 3<*" n « ©ofrateg trant ben ®ift6ed)er. 2Ber $at bid) gejwungen e3 ju t|un ? Dad ©dsijf fan! gejlern 2ttenb, roafyrenb tuir utt3 unter^ielten. 2Dtr werten fpielen, (tits gen unb trlnfen. 3c^ Mtte bid) e3 nic^t ju t^un. SBci^t bu roer iljn gebungen Ijat ? Das ®elb flingt, ble ®Iocfe tbnt. Sefimtjt bu ltd) feiner nid)t ? Die %tamn unb 9Jlabd)en tyafcen SIumenMnje gemuns ben, um bie tapferen ©olbaten ju fdjmiidfen. 2Ba3 bewog ©ie nad) Slmerifa ju fommen ? Soften bie ©ofoaten nidjt tote £efoen ? ©ie IBnnen biefen ©tein nidjt aufkfcen, er ifl 3U fdjwer fitr ©ie. SBtr $a? 6en btefes Sud) ge»o6en. Der2Ded)3rern>irb31>nen®elbIei§en. 2Benn ©ie ben Umgang JeneS SJlannes gemieben fatten, wtirben ©ie retdjer fein. Du ^afl bid) Befliffen beutfd) ju lernen, jefct jbHft bu franjiiftfd) lernen. SBeffen ©rammatif (grammar) fyabm ©ie gefcraudjt (used)? Theme LXIV. I cannot find my dictionary, do you know where it is? The bookbinder has taken it, he will bind it. Your dog has bitten me. His sister was called Mary. How long did you remain at the coffee-house ? What did the German teacher give thee? Have you seen the blind man? Did you know that I had been at Paris ? They catch mice with bacon or cheese. I advise you to go to Berlin to learn German. He is very lazy, he does not tell the truth. Did you drink any * See note on page 129. IEEEGULAK VERBS: FIFTH CONJUGATION. 131 beer ? We bound the thief hand (plur.) and foot (plur.). Emma sings beautifully. The dog jumped over the table. Who forced you to become (a) soldier ? If the captain had been cautions, the ship would not have (fein) sunk. Lord Byron swam across (uBcr) the Hellespont (ac.m). The servant sat by the door. The poor man begged me to help him. Where did the apple lie ? Do you know who has hired that man ? Do you recollect how much I owe you ? We medi- tated 2 all (ithe) 3 day. Our neighbor possessed much land, but he has lost it. Who has spun this flax 1 Conversation. So fanbft bit bas $inb \ SEBetjjt bu, tuestjaft tie Srotnpeten erflangen unb bie gatynen ge« fdjtmmgen ttmrben ? SBaS Ijafcen ©ie gejlern 3lBenb getfian ? Sefinnen ©ie |td) meiner ? &at ber $rieg fd)on Begonnen ? §a6en ©ie tnetnen Sebienten ge* bungen ? SBerben ©ie mid) gtuingen ben SBrtef ouf bie $ojt %vl tragen ? ©clang e3 ^nm bie ©lode ju Iduten ? Snrrann ber ©efangene unferen ©ofoaten ? 3d) fanb ei fdjtafenb unter einem SSaume. !Die Zxompttm erflangen unb bie gafjnen trurben gefdjtmmgen, Weil ber ^aifer na^ete. 2Cir fptetten, fangen unb tranlen. 9letn, tdj fcefhme nttd) 3t)m mc6t. 3a, er kgann im griifyjaljr. Sftein, 14) glaufce, bajj er litgt. 3d) trug i|n felber »or einer ©tunte batyin, fonfl rcurbe id) ei tfyun. 9tein, id) war nidjt ftorf genug. ©r enrrann tfnten, akr jte fingen tljn traeber nad) einer ©tunte. Reading Lesson. Styrunnct. Sin2tyrann ffillt* ben ©eijt frii^er ati ben R'ixptv an;* idj metne, er fud)t fetne ©ftoen Dormer f bumm ju madjen, e^' er fie elenb mad)t, Weil er t»eif , bafj Seute, bie einen ^opf tyafcen, ifyre §anbe bamit re? e % a I 1 1 — a n , sep. verb a n f a 1 1 e n , to attack. \ First 132 compound verbs: separables. gtcren unb fie gegen ten Sijrannen a u f 6, e & e n. £>er ipenler a § mt it)m n a d) untserfcinbet* bent SDttffetfyater tie 3lugen besor er tljn foltert. 9t t d) t e r (Sean 3>aul). ©rtcdjenfanb. £ie gretfjeit unt tie ©onne ge^en niemals unter auf ter Srbe, fonbern nur etotg auf. Jpijrt ttjr,f tajj tie (Sonne flerbenb er-' bteidjet unt im Djean entfdjiiift, ober tie greityeit; foj Hidft nad) Slmerifa, ta gldnjt morgenfrifd) § tie Sonne, unb neben iljr tie grei^eit. 9U d}ter (Sean faul). LESSON LXV. Seftioti 65. Compound Verbs. Obs. I. — In German most verbs permit certain particles, adverbs or prepositions, to be prefixed to them, and thus become compound verbs. There are three classes of compound verbs. In the first the prefix is in certain tenses detached from the verb; in the second it is inseparable, and in the third it may be separated or not. Separable Compound Verbs. Obs. II. — Verbs whose prefixes have a signification of their own (generally prepositions or adverbs) and have the primary or full accent, are called separable compound verbs. Obs. III. — The prefixes are detached, and placed at the end of the sentence (except when there is a conjunction or relative pronoun in the sentence), in the present and imperfect indicative and in the imperative. * Covers. f If you bear. % Then. § In full splendor. COMPOUND VEBBS: SEPARABLES. 133 Conjugation of a Separable Verb. 2lusge|en, to go out. INDICATIVE. Present Tense. 3d) ge^e aug, I go out 2Cir ge^en am, we go out fot geljfi au$, thou goes out t^r ge^et aui. ) Qut cr geljt aui, he goes out @ie ge^en auS, ) (le (eg) getytau3,she (it)goesout (le gefyen a\ii, they go out Imperfect. 3dj ging auS, I went out, etc. 1st Future. 3d) roerte ausgetjen, I shall go out. 1st Conditional. 3$ wurbe auSgefyen, I should go out. Perfect. 34) Hit auSgegangen, I Aaue gone out. Pluperfect. .3d) tear auSgegangen, I had gone out. 2nd Future. 3$ n>erbe auSgegangen fein, I shall have gone out. 2nd Conditional. 3d) witrte auSgegcmgen fein, I should have gone out. IMPERATIVE. ©elje— aui, go (thou) out ®$n @te } ~ fttt *' g0 ( you ) out PARTICIPLES. Present. StuSge^enb. going out. Pas£. 2(u3gegangen, gone out. Obs. IV. — The prefix ge of the past participle always remains next to the verb, so, that its place is between the particle and the verb. Obs. V. — The separable particles are the prepositions, 06, on, ouf, aui, Bet; nut, in, nads, ttor, gu; the adverbs, bar, ein, empor, fefyl, fort, fyeim, Ijer, t)in, Io3, meter, ttjcg, jurttcf, jufammen ; or ba, Ijin, tjer and »or, compounded with prepositions or adverbs ; as, tiafcet, Ijinauf, IjcraB, boran. Obs. VI. — The prefix is not separated from the verb in ac- cessory sentences beginning with a relative pro- noun or a suhordinative conjunction, because these require the verb at the end of the sentence. 134 COMPOUND VEKBS: SEPABABLEB. Reading Exercise LXV. 3d) rclfc tyeute ah ®e$en @te morgen aud ? 3d) fling gcflern aui ; tuemt ba3 SSetter nid)t fo fd)ledjt i»iire ttwrbe id) aud) tyeute ausgeljen. ©oil id) bteft 2lufgabe abfdjreiben. ©djrieb griebridj Me fetnige ob ? SDfadje bag genfter ouf. £aft bu baa $adet aufgemadjt ? SBeldjen 3tod jicijjt bu an ? 3d) werbe belne neuen £ofen anjie^en. 3d) t^eilte tljm cine angeneb,me Stadjrtdjt mit. 3d) iuoHte 3^nen ge(iern ben 3«* |alt btefes Sriefeg mtttfyeiten, aber @te famen nid)t. 2Barum fd)itenftag ai* gleitet ? reifen. SBarum fteilten ©ie biefe 9lad)* 3d) woflte fie 3^nen mittb,eilen, ridjt metnem Sruber mit ? aber id) fanb ©ie nid)t ju £aufe. ©oil id) bie genfter aufmadjen ? 9tein, e3 ift ju fait, madjen ©ic bie Z^nxt auf. compound verbs: inseparables. 135 LESSON LXVL Sefttott 66, Compound Inseparable Verbs, Obs. I. — Compound inseparable verbs are formed by prefixing to the simple verbs prepositions or ad- verbs having only the secondary accent, or un- accented syllables that are without any meaning of their own. Obs. II. — The prefixes of the inseparable verbs are the un- accented syllables Be, emp, ent, er, »er, jer, ge, mtfj r the preposition toteer, and the adverbs Soli and Winter.* Obs. m. — The inseparable verbs never admit of the prefix ge in the past participle; (as jerflikt and not gejer* ftiSrt), and are conjugated like simple verbs. If regular, according to the rules in Lesson LI, and if irregular, according to those in Less. LX — LXTV. Obs. IV.' — The following verbs compounded with nouns, ad- verbs or other prefixes, are also inseparable, but take, contrary to the general rule (see Observa- tion III), the prefix gs in the past participle, and have the primary accent on these prefixes. argwBfynen, to suspect atttoorten, to answer frof)Iod:ett,t to exult raf§fd)[agen, to deliberate frutyjhufen, to breakfast wdrtferttgen, to justify §anb§aBen, to handle, maintain urt^etlen, to judge, criticize leircttfyen, to marry tDetflfagen, to prophesy fuBftugelrt, HeBfofen, to caress tuettetfent, to emulate mutfjmajjett, to conjecture, guess tt)illfa^ren,t to gratify * The last four prefixes, when serving to compound a noun or ad- jective, have the pri/ma/ry accent. t The two verbs froljlotfen and j»iltfa$wtt mostly omit tne prefix g e in the past participle. 136 COMPOUND VEEBS: INSEPARABLES. Reading Exercise LXVI. Sin SRomer jerftorte ben £empel. 33tr werben immer ben SScrlufl unfere* greunbeS fceweinen. Srfennjt bu mid) ? £er £te& entri^ mtr ben Seutel unb »erfd)»anb. 2Mrbeft bu ifyn ntd)t mtt einem tfflantel bebecfen? Sextet 3teifenbe ift cin S3ctriiger, er fcetriigt Sebermamt. 3ft bcr ©olcat serrounbet ? #afcen ©ie unfere Slufgakn serbeJTert ? 2Bir erfyalten jeben ©amftag (or @omta6ent) ctnen Srief; manijmat aud) ant £ienftag. 3d) rcitrbe S^nen bie 3eitungen gefdjtdt fyafcen. Jpaft bu erne 2lntoort auf beincn 33rief erfyalten? @ie| bid) »or, ba3 9>fert fdjliigt au3. ©djtage ein Slatt um, ba3 papier fdjldgt burd). 2Ger toeiffagte btc Strftonrng 3erufalem8 ? 9Jtan fyat tnir bie ©telle, son ber ©ie fpredjett, angetragen. ftiety bie U^r auf. Theme LXVI. The poor woman covered her hands with a cloth. The merchant, whose son is in Berlin, loses everything. This thoughtless girl has broken her parasol. The professor is correcting your exercise, he will probably tear it. Henry will probably lose his mother, she is very ill. Your neighbor cheats everybody. The diligent scholars will be rewarded. The Eomans destroyed Carthage. Did you understand me ? Our ting abdicated in favor (?u ©unjten) of his son. Have you received your newspaper ? Frederick is very thought- less, he neglects everything. Dr. Johnson has criticized my book very favorably (giinjiig). This young man has misused our confidence. Would your sister marry her cousin ? Many physicians in this country are quacks. Conversation. Er^aften ©ie oft 33riefe uon 3^er 2Bir erljatten jeben £onnerftag £od)ter ? etnen Srief. £aben bie gehtbe uttfere ©tabt ©ie aerftiirten 2lfle«, felbft (even) jerjtbrt ? baa ©djlog . £aft bu mid) serftanben ? Stein, id) t)iirte nid)t »a« ©ie fagten. 2Ber Ijat btefen ©ptegel jerbrod)en? 3d) tueif ei nid)t. compound verbs: separables and inseparables. 137 Sot Jperr 25r. Sotjnfott Styr Sud) 3a mein £err, er |at es fe$r gtmftig fceurtljetlt? ieutt&etlt. £at bet 3>rofe(for unfere 2lufgafcen gr tfl nod) nidjt fertig, er serkjjert serfcefferr? fie efon. 9ted)tfertigte ber junge SUlamt bas fTlein, er mtjj6raud)te e<3 unb fcetrog 2$errrauen,ba(3ifyr in tfyn fester? una. ffiaimmrfatyefogrofjenSdjrecfen Die 9?ad)rid)t eon ion <3iege ier in eurer ©tabt ? geinbe. Urn wie siel U$r frit^jWlden @ie ? Mr frulftitcfen gewolmttd) urn fte* Sen Ufyr. LESSON LXVn. Sefttosi 67. Separable and Inseparable Yerbs. Obs. I. — Verbs compounded with turd), iiBer, unter, urn and id i e b e r , are either separable or inseparable according as they have the primary or secondary accent. Obs. II. — Verbs retaining their original meaning and that of the prefix have the primary accents on the prefix and are separable, while those that have a figurative meaning, have the secondary accent on the prefix and the primary accent on the verb, and are inse- parable. Examples.* b it r d) gdjen, to run away burd) g e | e n , to peruse it 6 e r fefpen, to cross itfcer f e jj e n , to translate u B er laufen, to run over tiller 6 r i n g e n , to deliver it n t e r fletyen, to go under shelter unter ft e ty e n , to dare « m werfen, to upset urn a r m e n , to embrace tt> t e b e r Ijolen, to bring back tuieber tj o I e n , to repeat * Most verbs admit of both the separable and inseparable form, but some are either separable or inseparable only. 138 COMPOUND VEBBS: SEPAEABLES AND INSEPARABLES. Reading Exercise LXVII. ipaben ©te 3^ Sor^abcn b ur d) gefe^t ? 2)a3 $ferb unferes Stadj* bar3 gtng burd). SCir werben nad) einer ©tunbe untfefjren. SBarf bas 5>ferb, ate eg burd) gtng, ben SBagen urn? Lai ©djtjf, tit weldjem toir »on £eutfd)Ianb famett, ging untcr. £ie Wlity litujr tiber. £ajt bu bie Slufgabe iiberfejjt? £cr ©d)ijfer feljte iiber ben gtujj. Itfefe jwei greunbe umarmten ftd). SBerbcn ©ie Deutfdjlanb unb Sranfretd) burd)relfen? 3lm £ienjtag werte id) b u r d) $art3 retfett. ©3 nurS regnen, loir tniiffen u tt t e r jteb,en. ©ie 9Wmer uttter j o d) t en siefc SMfer. ©fitter unb ©oetfye ubera i r e f f e n afle beutfdjen ©tdjrer. Theme LXVII. ' Who has translated Goethe's Faust ? I have a mind to cross the river. Our emperor has passed through the whole empire. I pray you to come again. Have you carried through your design ? The boat is sinking, we must leave it. The boy has upset the table. I returned after two hours. The horse ran away and upset the wagon. When shall we return? Schiller excelled all German poets in depth of feeling. Who will instruct you during the winter ? That water is boiling, it will run over. My uncle and his brother have traveled all over France. Examine that trunk. Could you undertake this ? Conversation. £aben ©ie ©oetlje^ ©ebidjte tiber* Stein, id) &erfle|e nidjt ©eutfd) fefrt ? genug. ©agten ©ie, bag ©d)itfer atte 3d) fagte, bag er fte an Siefe beS beutfdjen "Hitter itbertrtfft ? ©efulls uberrrifft. 3ji bics ber ©djiffer, toeldjer una Stein, id) glaube er ijt ti ntdjt. tiberfefcte ? 3Bas tt)aten ©ie aU ti regnete ? 2Bir finb untergejtanben. SBirft bu £eutf*tanb unb £ftu^ 3d) tr-erbe e<5 t^un, tuenn id) ©elb lanb burdjreifen ? genug Ijaben werbe. 3fl baa spferb cures 9iad)bar« @s ging burd) unb warf ben 33a* burdjgegangen ? gen urn. ^REPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE. 139 Reading Lesson. 8ci$icl ben gnt^altfomfctt. SHeranBer Ber ©rofje fam auf feinem 3«ge,* Me SBelt ju cro B em, Burcfc cine lange GanBmitfte SlfEeitg, in Ber |tdj nirgen&S SSaffer Be* fanB.f gnBIidj (>atte cin ©ofoat etmas aufgefuncen unB Brad)te eg in feinem £elm tent 2lIeranBer. ©a Biefer afcer fat), Bap feine ©ofoaten eBenfo tote er »or Eurjl led^ten fprad) er; „©oU id) Ber Ginjige fein, Ber Ba trintt ?" unB gofj Bos Staffer auf Bie grBe. Sllie, »otf 33etounBerung tifcer Bie gntB>Itfamfeit Be« .RBnigS, riefen;$ „2tuf! fu$re una fort! § ttir ftnB nid)t ermattetj rcir finBntdjtBurftig; ttir fatten uns nt^t fur fterBIid), fo lange una ein fofcBer ^onig fityrt." Jpetnftus. LESSON LXVni. Scftion 68. Prepositions Governing the Dative or Accusative. Obs. I. — The following nine prepositions require the dative when the verb in the sentence implies rest or motion in a place, answering to the question " Where ? " and the accusative, when it expresses a direction or motion from one place to another, answering to the question "Whither?" on, at, in, on, to u B e r , over, above, across auf, on, upon « n t e r , under, among I) i n t e r , behind Dor, before, ago i n , in, into 3 tt> i f d; e n , between it e B en , by the side of, near * Expedition. f @id)-!>efanb, there was to be found. % 5Ri e f e n is here equivalent to a u $ r i e f e n , exclaimed. § Up, let us hence ! 140 CONTRACTION OF PBEPOSITIONS WITH ARTICLE. Contraction of Prepositions with the Definite Article. Obs. II. — Some prepositions are frequently contracted with the last letter of the definite article into one word, and are in very general use. They are : an bent into am* an baa into ang M bem „ fcetm aufbas „ aufg in bem „ im burd) ba3 „ burdjg Don tent „ ttom fiir baS „ fiirg 3» bent „ giwn in iai „ ing 3U ber „ 3ur urn iai „ umg »or tas „ »org itfcer bag „ iifcerg Reading Exercise LXVIII. £as JMenftmiibdjen ge'fyt on benSrunnen; fte feirb SSajfer fy>len. Mr (tanben lange am (or an bent) genfter. £er SKaurer jleigt auf tai (or aufs) Qafy. T>ai 25bgeld;en fi|3t auf bem 33aume. SKeine SJlttjje tfl tn3 (or in baa) SEaffer gefallen. £er Setdmam Hegt nod) im (or in bem) 2Baffer. £er Sager fteflte fic^ Winter bie SWauer. £aft bn beinen Sail gefunten ? 3d) fanb ifyt Winter ber SWauer im (or in bem) ©anbe. §ange ben SRocf nefcen bie Satire. 3|r Mantel fyihtgt neben bem ©piegel. ©telle biefen.33tumentopf »or« (or »or bas) genfter. Sor bem SCinter fliegen »tele SSbgel fibers SDteer. 2Ba3 lag xifcer bem ©arge ? £>er £unb Hegt unter bem Sette. ©tefc,t 3|r £au3 nidjt auf einem fleinen £ugel, 3ti>ifdjen bem gluffe unb tern Serge ? 211$ fte mid) falj, lief fte jum SBater. Theme LXVIII. My neighbor and your uncle William are in the garden. We stood at the foot of the hill. Put this book upon my table. We waited for you at the gate, but you did not come. ° It will be noticed that the n of prepositions is merged into m of the article. peepositions with dative or accusative. 141 Did you say he had a black cap on his head? Pray sit down on this bench. The fish live in the water and the birds in the air. The child which has fallen into (Ace.) the water has been carried to the grave-yard. Who knocks at the door? Tell me the nearest way to the castle (of) Frankenstein. We can have a beautiful view over the valleys en the moun- tain. My birds sit on the roof of your house. My cane has fallen into the water. Hang this broom behind the door very near the window. Are the flower pots before the window ? Tour pupils speak often of (son) your school. Conversation. SBo^itt gef en ©ie ? SBeStjalb ftetgt ter 3&ger «uf ten Saum? 3ft 3|r £ut ins SEBaffer gefatfen? 3Bo ftnt unfere Sauben ? 3ft Sraulein Suife im £aufe oter im ©arten? £aben ©ie meinen Mantel |inter tie Satire gefyangt ? 2Bo fya&en ©ie ttefe 33Iumen ge* funten ? ffiSaram getyft tu fo oft am genfter? 3Ba3 Ijat Marl tiber Me SKauer geworfen ? Sag tad fdjroarje £udj unter oter tiber tern ©arge ? 2Bir geljen in ten ©arten. Sr fudjt ein SBogelneft. ir flog mir »om Stotft unt pel in 1 <3 SBaffer. ©ie ftjjen auf tem ©adbe. ©te ift meter im ©arten nod) im Jpaufe, fie tft aufs Sant gegangen. 9Jein, id) tying iljn nefcen tad genfter. 2Btr tyaben fie im gelte gefunten. SCetl idj meinen ?freunt ipeinrtd) ertuarte. Sr Ijat fetnen Salt uber tie 9ttauer geworfen. S3 lag iiber tem ©arge unt Be? tetfte ten Seidmam. Reading Lesson. 9tn ten SRonb. 31 uf tid) Wictet, auf Mr roetlet oft mein Slug 1 * in fflfer Suft,f 21 n ttr tyaft 1 id), an tid) fent' id) mand)' ©efitfjl axti froljer SBruft. * The apostrophe stands in place of e; as, Slug 1 f Enchantment. 142 NBUTEB AND mTBANSITIVE VEEBS. 3n bid) fefcet, in Mr ftnbet mcine ^antafie Sid ©cenen, Unter Me fie gem fldj triiumet, unt er benen tort Me fdjonen ©eelen, u'Ber biefe grb 1 erfyofyit,* iiBer ©r&fcern wanbeln. S o r mid) trittf bann, » o r ntir fte^t bann ber Gntfdjlup, red)t gut ju ^anbetn. 3 tt> i f d) e n Mefen ©triiudsen ft^ t*, jwif^en fie ftieBJt fid) £etn ©traljl, 31 e 6 e n mid) ffnft, J n e 6 e n mir ruty fie, Me greunbin meiner SBaljI ; Winter mid; ftitl Mngefdjltdien, fianb fie Iad)enb Winter ntir, Unb »ir reben Don ben ©ternen, unfern SieBen § unb son Dir. LESSON LXIX. &eftivn 69. Neuter and Intransitive Verbs. Obs. I. — Verbs that ascribe to their subject a state or condi- tion which is neither active nor passive, are neuter; as, i d) ft e B, e, I stand; id) f d) I a f e , I sleep, etc., and such as express an action that does not pass over to an object, are intransitive; as, id) laufe, I run; id) f p r e d) e , I speak, etc. Obs. II. — The conjugation of the neuter and intransitive verbs does not differ from that of the active verbs, except in the compound tenses, where those that express a mere activity, a continuous state, without a change or transition of their subject from one state into another, such as, I e 6 e n , to live; f t £ e n , to sit, are conjugated with 1) a 6 e n , and those that express a change or transition of their subject from one state into another, a motion from one place to another, such as, ft erB en, to die; geljen, to go, are conjugated with fein. * That have been raised above this earth, ■f Presents itself. t © i n f t cannot be rendered literally here ; the translation of n e i t n m i dj f i n f t is descends near me, followed by and. § Of those we love. NEUTER AND INTRANSITIVE VERBS. 143 Conjugation of a Neuter Verb. Present. Imperfect. 1st Future. 1st Conditional. Perfect. Pluperfect. 2nd Future. 2nd Conditioned. !ommcn, to come. INDICATIVE. 3d) fomme, I come, etc. 3d) font, I came 3$ roerbe fommen, I shall come 3d) toiirbe fommen, I should come 3d) 6 t n gefommen, I have come in Wft gefommen, thou hast come er ift gefommen, he has come tt>ir ftnb gefommen, we have come tf)r feito (er Sfinnbcrer unb btc Quelle. gin Skttberer f am im feijjefkrtf ©ontmer ju einer Dttette. gr war fdjneU unb lange gegangen; ©tfype tfr ftanb auf feuter * Render to become of, wcrben au&. f In the heat of. THE ADVERBS. 145 ©time unb felne 3unge war »om ©urfte fafi » e r t r o d n c t. £)a falj er »ie« filterijette Staffer, glaubte, tyter neue tfrafte* ju fammeln, unb rranf ntit giertgen Biigen. Slber tie tfiilte, tuelt^e ju fd}netoenb unb 3U fdjnea aowedftelnb f war, toirfte fo f<$ablid} auf i§n, Jap er ju Soben fan!. — „2ld), fc&anbltdjes @tft !" riefcr, „n>er wtoe unter einem fo retjenJen J 8lnfd;em fold) eine So^eit sermutfjet J)a»en?" „3$ cin ®tft?" fprad) tie Quelle.- n 2Ba^rIt(^, bu uerlaumbeft mid). @ie|, Me glur rings um|er gritnet unb left burd) mid). SSon mir triinten fid) § tie £eert>en, unb £aufenbe beiner Sritber fanben fyier grfrifdjung unb etnen Sabetranf. Sftur Uebermafj unb Un»orfi«^tigIeit son beiner ©rite || mad)en bir ben ©enufj j$abli$. 3d) bin fd)uMos an beinen ©d)merjen unb felbft an betnem Sobe, foflte er bir aud) be* »orfte|en.t SBagner. LESSON LXX. SeUion 70. On the Adverbs. Obs. I. — Adverbs modify verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs. They denote manner, place, time, quality, comparison, quantity, etc., and are invariable, with the exception of those of manner, quality and time, which are compared like adjectives. Most adjectives are also frequently used as adverbs of quality without a change of form, even in the comparative degree. In the superlative they are preceded by a m or auf 1 3, instead of the article, as: am fdjiinften, auf'S 6,od)fte, ?c. Some take the terminations enS instead, as: b e ft e n $ , f p a t e ft e n i. » ■ * Translate Jhoiftc in the singular. f 3u fcfynefl afcroedifelnb, too sudden change. \ Inviting. § 2Jon mtr tranfen )?<$, must be translated here, of me drink, dropping entirely the reflexive pronoun f i 6)'. || On your part. 1 2Mr tfcsorfletym, lit., bebeforeyou, to be translated here, come upon you. 146 THE ADVERBS. Obs. II. — The prefixes ^ in and tjer of the adverbs $ineitt, herein, fytnaua, fierauS, are separable, and are fre- quently preceded by a noun with the preposition ju, as: ©er SWann fam jur £$ure herein. ^Obs. HE. — Instead of adverbs of time, the genitive of svbstan-. tives is used when the time is indefinite, as: fc e & SKorgenS, or TtoxQtni, and when the time is distinctly expressed the accusative of substantives is used as an adverbial expression of time; as: jets en £ag. Obs. IV. — Adverbs of time precede other adverbs or adver- bial expressions, and take their place after the subject and the verb, but when an adverb or ad-- verbial expression begins the sentence, the verb precedes the subjects. Degree of Positive. SBofl, weH Bait, soon gem,* willingly oft, often fefy", very itfoel, evil Bid, much wenig, little Comparison of Irregular Adverbs. Compcwatiw. fceffer, better f fritter, 1 etjer, Iiefcer, better cfter, oftener sooner arger, worse metjr, more minfcer, weniger, less am befien or auf'2 iejle, the best f am etjeften, the soonest | Balnigft, very soon am Itefcften, best am tyauftgften, the oftener, (most often) |ijd}fr, dujjerft, extremely am argften, the worst am mciften, most am minieftcn (toenigjfrn) the least Reading Exercise LXX. SBle »ict foftet biefea £aus ? 3$ werte fpateftenS urn acfyt llt)r ju £aufe fetn. £ehtrid) fi£t aueroenDtg mtt tern ^lutfdjer. ©icfc 3i»et ©era, Hefcer, am liebflen, correspond to I lilje. Hike better, I like best, in English, and are mostly used in connection, with a verb, as : 3$ laufe gem, I like to run ; id) fa$re ttefcer, 1 like better to ride, etq. THE ADVERBS. 147 SMfadjen ftnb tmmer beifammen. ft bu gefd)Iafen ? Derjenlge, welder am beften reiten unb am fdmeHften laufen fann, tsirb ben $rei<3 erfyalten. SJton getobijnt fid} nad) unb nod) baran. 3b> 33ettcr griebrid; wirb iiBer* morgen mit un<3 3U ftRittag fpetfen. 3$ tann morgen fritter Jommen, wenn ©ie ti wunfdjen. Die Deutfdjen fagen: „3 U weni 9 untl 3 U siel oerbtrbt atfes Spiel." ©r igt ©emiije lieber ati gletfdj. Unsor* fidjtige Seitte irren am puftgften. 3$ weljjf bafj $einrid) e3 gern ofter ttyun toirb. 3d) J&nnte & M* WW f a 8C"> 3$ fcitte urn nod) eine Staffe 3$ee. Theme LXX. We shall praise the most 3killful persons most. George and John are improving very much in German, "When will you depart ? To-morrow or the day after we shall go to Berlin. How much did the tailor ask for your coat? I like to ride in a carriage, but I like better to ride horseback, and I like best to ride by (ttttf with def. art.) railroad. This careless man makes mistakes (the oftenest) most often. The general dines precisely at twelve o'clock. The price of this cloth is extremely high. I shall bind the dictionary very soon. The scholar who can read and write best, will receive the prize. Henry has been at least three or four times here. Conversation. fBoljer lam 3^ 33ruber ? fir fam jit gufj son $otn. 3dj*><*»e3i)tt<5d)ti>efterlangenid)t ute t»ab> fdjeinlid) jit £aufe. 2Birb £einridj auf mid) warten? Sin toenig aber nidjt lange. ©eb>n @ie gern ins Sweater ? 9iein, id) geb> IteSer in bie Dper. 2Md)e Seure irren am metften ? Die Unoorftdjtigen irren am \au* ftgften. £aben @ie ben 9Jlann gefe$en, Stein, id) $abe ben SKann gefeb>n, welder am beften ritt ? judder am fdjneflften fufr. 148 THE CONJUNCTIONS. Reading Lesson. 3)cr altc Sanbtnann. VltV* Intnter Sreu 1 unb Sftebltcfeteit S3 i i an betn futjles ©rafc, Unb tneic^e feinen ginger brcit Son ®ottci5 SBegen afc. D a n n wir|t bu wic auf gritnen 3lu'n ©urd)3 (Srbenlefcen ge^n; S) o n n fannjl bu o|ne Surest unb ©rau'n ©cm Sob ins 2Iuge fe^n. £> a n n fegnen Snfel beine ®ruft Unb wetnen Zfyx'antn b r a u f f Unb ©onnenMumen »oH »on Suft, Sliif 'n a\ii ben S^ranen auf. £i5llv. LESSON LXXI. ScfttOtt 71. On the Conjunctions. Obs. — In German some of the conjunctions have a great in- fluence on the position of the verb, and must therefore be divided into three classes: the co-ordinative, ad- verbial and sub-ordinative conjunctions. Those of the first class (the co-ordinatives) serve merely as links to sentences, and have no influence on the position, while those of the second class (the adverbials), when be- ginning the sentence, cause the subject to be placed after the verb, and those of the third class (both the simple and compound sub-ordinatives), require the verb governed by them to be placed at the end of the sentence. * The apostrophe stands in place of e, as : ii i ' for ii 6 e. t S> a r a a f. THE CONJUNCTIONS. 149 First Class : Co-ordinative Conjunctions. Witt, fonbent, attein, but forootyl-als, both-and term, for, since unb, and ober, or Second Class : Adverbial Conjunctions. 3flfo, therefore, thus ettblid), at last, at length and), also, too entoeber — ober, either — or auferbem, uBerbem, besides erft, guerjl, at first bait — Balb, sometimes — some- fertter, further ba, bann, alsbann, then [times fjernad), nad$er, afterwards bagegen, ) on the contrary faum, scarcely fjingegert, I on the other hand nidjt nur, ) — fon? ( not baljer, teftoegen, 1 therefore, on nidjt attein, V- bent -j only — barum, befjijalB, j that account nidjt Bloa, ) aud) ( but also bemnadj, folgfidj, ) ,, nod), still tntfljtn, 5 consequently nun ( .^ nQW) then bennod), and yet, still fo, so, thus beSgleidjen, likewise ; nod), nor fonft, else, otherwise beffenungeadjtet, ) neverthe- ttjeiis — tljeife, partly — partly nid)tebeftot»entger, J less iiBerbteg, besides bepo, ) the (with a com- liBrtgenS, as for the rest, how- urn fo, ) parative.) ever )effer I 1 onbrerfeitS, j on the other hand bod), gIetd)t»of)l, \ yet, still, tiielmeljr, much more, rather {ebodj, inbeffen, ) however weber — nod), neither nor etnerfeitS, ) on the one hand wofyt, jtoar, indeed, it is true Reading Exercise LXXI. 3d) t)aBe fljn ge^ijrt, aBer id) fc^Be tfyt nidjt gefe|en. ®r aerftanb @le nidjt, bcnn @ie fpradjen ju fdmel ©u ntujjt Me. Seftton fd)retfcen ober id) roevbe es bem 2eB,rer fagen. 9ttd)t nur ber 25ater fonbern aud) tie SSJhttter toerben ti erlauBen. SBeber ber ©artncr nod) bie ©artnerin iljuen ttjre 3>fHd}t. @ie mtipn entoeber fletfjtger arBetten ober tnein Jpau« »erlaffen. 3d) fann nidjt auSgeBert ba id) franf Bin. ©agen ■ although fdjon, ) tote, how, when, as rate aitdj, however raieraofjl, although raofern, if, in case, that wofttr, wherefore Wonad), whereafter raoran, whereat raorcmf, whereon raottott, whereof, etc. urn ju (with the Infin.), in order to (Ai, when, as fcettor, efye, before Hi, until ba, as, since (reason) tomit, in order that bafj, that fatlS, in case that intern, while, as je — the— (with the comp.) nad}5em, after je nadjlem, according as 06, whether, if obgletdj, ofcfdjon, ) though, ofcrooljt, raterool)!, ) although feit, feitoem, since (time) fo oft (ali), whenever fo iato (ali), as soon as fo tange (ali), so long as THE CONJUNCTIONS. 151 Additional Reading Exercise. 211$ id) tijtt tannic, war er nod) em Mxd. 3d) fonnte (te nid)t fe^cn, ba ti ganj bunfel war. 2Ber fagte Sir, bag id) angefommen bin ? 9tad)5em nrir gefrutjjtudt fatten, gingett nrir aufs SanO. 3d) tciirbc 3^ncn ben SSertfy bea SudjeS bejafjlen, ofcgleid) id) arm bin. SQBir Ijafcen griiutein gjJuQer nidjt gefe^en, feit fie in 9Mnd)en wofynt. ©uftas fdjlief ben ganjen 9tadjmittag, TOat)rent» grielrid) jeten 2lu* genHid wafyrnatjm. 2Bu»en bie SJlenfdjen ntdst gIMidjer fein, roenn fie jufriebener waren. Sr fdjfoor, inbem er feinen' 2irm ausftredte. @ie Ijalten tfjn nid)t fur faul, fonbern fur So^aft. 2Bir getyen langs fam, batmt »ir ntdit miibe roerben. 2Biltft bu warten, bis id) metne 2Iufgabe gefdjrieben t>aBe ? Slje man ijjt, foil man ®ott banlen. ©o lange man gefunb ijl benft man felten baran, bap man aud) franf »er* ben fann. Additional Theme. Do you know (rotjfen) whether the stars shine ? Although I hadj seen 3 this! man 2 when he was a boy, I 2 recognized] him not. Our teacher does not like Henry as (5a) he is neither diligent nor attentive. The workman thinks that you will 8 pay 2 him.! My uncle told me that you had been in Munich, so I believed it. We must take a walk, though it is unpleasant. We shall come if you wiU 4 go 6 out 3 withj us. 2 She has not heard from Miss Miller, since we left Philadelphia. I have written my theme, while you read the newspaper. When can you eat ? I cannot eat now, because I am not hungry. One does not know, whether any body lives in the stars. As soon as I shall have acquired the German language, I shall study the French language; There will always be strife among (the) men so long as they are discontented. Conversation. SDie falj er aus ate bu i|n fa^ft ? 3d) erfannte i&n laum, er fear fo Heid). ftonnteft bu ben Setriiger ftnben ? 3d) fanb ttyn nid)t, ba ti bunfel war. 2Ber fagte bir, bap id) $ler bin? granj fagte ti mir fd)on geftern. 152 THE AUXILIARY WCV C It AND THE PASSIVE VOICE. SBann retfte 3k DnMafc? Dicfen SDforgen, nad)bem er ge* fritljftucft fyatte. SBirb ber Strkiter tm $ar! ar* 9tid)t okie bajj fie i§n bafitr k= 6 eiten ? ja^en. 2Bti$ bu bem Jpeinri^ serpen ? gttdjt efyer ate bis cr fid) kffert. SBerten @ie tai Sud) kfyalten SBtr roerben i$ ktyalten, ba bu n ober nid)t ? kad)tejt, ofcgleid; id tyeuer ifh Sett wann $abt ik £emt tfityler ©eit tetr 9Kund)en serliefjen, fya* unb griwlein SKutter nid)t ges kit »ir fie nidjt gefektt. fekn? 2Ba<5 tljatefi bu, wa^rcnto beine grft arkitete id) tut ©arten unb greunbe foajieren gingen? bann fdjrlefc id) meine Slufgak. SBitrbeft bu beutfd} lernen, menn 3d) rotirbe nidjt atletn beutfd), bu ®elb 1}atteft Uttterridjt ju fonbern audi ba« granjBfii'dje netymen ? lernen. Reading Lesson. $ic fdjonftc Gljrifttn. £enft eud) cine tt)et&Iid)e ©eele, wrick ttiel leibet; after fiete ju ©ott auffdjauet, weldje, ftc mag innen toeinett unb {fatten trie fie tntU * immer rote etne greube »or SKenfdjen ausjieljt, f unb rorick bie ©turme ber SBelt » e b e r »erriicfen nod) serfinftern : roo ftek tkSknMIb? — 3lm §tmmel: ba flek ber 5tegen6ogen; ikt kroegen bte 28oIfen unb bie SBtnbe ntd)t, bie auf i$n fliegen, fonbern er fdrtmmert fort sor fetner ©onne, unb fetne Slropfen roerben garkn, u n b er Hegt am £tmmel a I i gtanjenber SRorgenffjau eines fdjoncn Sages. Stidjter (3ean 9>aut). LESSON LXXH. Seftton 72. The Auxiliary tncrbcn and the Passive Voice, Obs. I. — The various modes, tenses, etc. of regular and irre- gular active verbs are formed, for the passive voice, * SB i e fie n>UI, must be translated here, ever so much. f Ever appears befjre men an image of joy. THE AUXILIARY WCrfcCtt AND THE PASSIVE VOICE. 153 from the corresponding tenses of the auxiliary verb to e rb e n and the past participle of the verb to be conjugated. Obs.II. — The past participle of the auxiliary wetben, to be, to become, is geworben, but when used to form the passive voice of verbs g e is omitted, and tu o r t e n only is used. Conjugation of Verbs in the Passive Voice. INDICATIVE. Present Tense. 3d) toerte g e 1 06 1 , I am tu roirft gelobt, thou art cr tt>itt> gelobt, he is loir icerten gelobt, we are tt)r roertet gelobt, ) you <3ie wertett gelobt, J are fie toerben gelobt, they are •a B. CO CD Imperfect. 3d) tuurbe g e 1 1 e B t , I was tu nmrbeft gcliebt, thou wast er wurbe geliebt, he was tuir raurben geliebt, we were tljr rourtet gcliebt, ) you @te murben geliebt, j were fie tourEen geliebt, they were o < 0> 1st Future Tense. 3d) totxit g e ft r a f t t»erben, I shall be punished bu nrirft geftraft werbett, «. 1st Conditional. 3d) witrbe , g e f a fj t toerben, I should be hated bu wurbeft getyafjt toerben, k. Perfect. 3d; bin g e a d) t e t toorben, I have been bu bift geadstet toorben, thou hast been er ift geadjtet toorben, he has been ►3 CD O O &4 tolr finb gead)tet toorben, we have been tfjr feib geadjtet toorben, ) , , @ie finb geadjtet toorben, j you nave been fie fint geadjtet toorben,. they have been Pluperfect. 3d) war uerborben toorben, I had been spoiled bu warft serborben toorben, k. 2nd Future. 3d) toerbe g e t a b e 1 1 too»en fein, I shall have been blamed bu totrjt getabelt toorben fein, jc. 154 THE AUXILIABY tD t T t t It AND THE PASSIVE VOICE. 2nd Conditional. 3d) wurbe B c I o B, n t worben feitt, I should have been rewarded bu wiirbeft Betofynt toorben fetn, jc. INFINITIVE. ©eloBt ioerben or getoBt ju werben, to be praised IMPERATIVE. SBerbe gefoBt, be (thou) praised SJerbet getobt, be (you or ye) praised Reading Exercise LXXII. 3$ toerbe son metttem Secret getofct, toenn id) mcinc ShtfgaBen lerne unb getyorfam Bin. 2>u ttnrft son beinen ©Item ntdjt gelieBt roerten, benn bu Bift md)t fletfjtg unb geljorfam gcwefen. Sin tugent>B,after SBienfd) totrb »on Sebermann geadjtet, unb fcine greunbfdjaft tmrb son alien ®uten gefud)t. SBtr werben oft fur unfere gutcn ^ontlungen getabelt unb felten BeIoB,nt; ntd)t3 beftoroentger tft e$ unfere 3>flid)t ®utes ju f§un. Dtefe $naBen fine nad) £aufe gefd)tcft ttorben. SHefe ©tabt nmrbe son ken getnben jerjiiirt worten fetn, toenn unfere ©ofoa* ten ntdjt toefer gefod)ten gotten. 3^ne arme Blinbe grau wurbe son bent jtaufmann Betrogen. !Diejenigen, weldje eljriid) waren, wuraen gefd)aj3t. ©eadjtet raerben ift Bejfer ala gefyafjt ju roerben. ©tefe ?luf* gaBen ftnb jweimal aBgefdjrieBen worben. , Theme LXXII. I am punished by my parents, when I am disobedient and do not work diligently. Thou art often praised by thy teacher. Tou are called by your father ; why do you not go to him ? Emma is often blamed by her music-teacher, be- cause she is so negligent. This letter was given me by your servant, it must be sent to* the post-office. If I had not been here, your watch would have been stolen. Those who were polite, were not only esteemed but also rewarded. The workmen have been paid well, because they worked well during the heat of the day. A false and faithless man is feared and hated by every body. ■ ^ * Render to here auf. THE AUXILIARY IP C X b C tt AND THE PASSIVE VOICE. 155 Conversation. £>u toirft son belnem Secret oft 3$ IJaBe nur beg SIBenbg 3cit unb getabelt; toarum lernft t>a Seine fe(6ft bann werbe tdj oft bdran StufgaBe nid)t Beffer ? oerfejnbert. S5on went ift biefe 2lufga6e oers <3te ift son mir oerBeffert toorben, Beffert toorben ? t»eil o'er Se^rer feinc 3eit t)atte. SBorum (tnb biefe SSriefe jroeimai SEBetl ftc fo f(^ieci)t gefdjrieben toa* abgefdjrieBen toorben ? ren, bajj idj fie nid)t lefen fonnte. SBon toem toirD ber tugenb^afte Sr toirb oon 3eberntann gead)tet ■Kenfcfy geadftet ? unb feine greunbfdjaft totrb oon alien ©uten gefudjt. SBurben biefe SJliibdjen oon ffjrem ferb eineg Sauerg to u r b e Bet Sftadjt aug feinem ©tatte g e ft o $ I e n. ®er SSauer BegaB ffcfc, better auf einen $ferbe= marft, toetdjer aeijn fJJteiten oon ba g e ft, a 1 1 e n to u r b e , in ber 916* ftdjt, ein anbereg ju faufen. Sr war fe^r erftaunt, unter ben fferben, bie jum Serfauf auggefteflt toaren, bas fetnige ju erlennen. @r na^m egfogleid) Beim $avimt unb rief aug: n Diefe8 9>ferb geft^rt mir. SSor bret £agen ift eg tnir g e ft o 1 1 e n toorbe n." „31jr irrt euferE geftotylen ^atte, aber ber eg nid)t genau unterfu^t fyatte, tourbe ganj Betroffen. 3lBer ba er Sttoag fagen inufte, anttoortete er aufg ©eraHjetooB/h* „9luf bent linfen Sluge." — * At random. 156 BEFLEXIVE VEIiBS. „3lr irrt fittd)," fpracfj b« Saner, „bas 2tyer i(i nicbt' Mtnb oitf tent Unfen Sluge." „Dl>!" rief ber SM, „td) |abc mid) tuir serftrodien, mit tent red;ten 2luge jtefyt ti ntd)t." £terauf c e ct t e ber S3auer bte Slugen tea $ ferbeS a u f unb fagte: „®s tjt jejjt offenkr, bafj bu ein ©djurfe Mjt nnb em litefc. ©etyt, baa gjfert) i[t gar ntd)t Mtnb. 3$ $«6e ticfc gragen nur get^an, urn ken iDiefcjtafyl Ijeraugjubrtngen. ©er Dieb t» u r b e genBttylgt, bae fPfcrto juriictjugeBen unb B e* jl r o f t , wte er es serblent tjatte. LESSON LXXm. Scftiott 73. Reflexive Verbs. Obs. I. — Reflexive verbs are such as have the same person or persons for both subject and object. The latter is always a personal pronoun and stands, either in the dative or accusative; as: 3d) jtelje mid) an, I dress (myself) 3d) Wfe mir, I help myself Obs. II. — In German, as in English, nearly every transitive verb may be changed into a reflexive verb, but .there are a great many verbs used only as reflexive verbs, of which, in English, some have the additional pronoun; while others express the same idea by the active or passive voice of simple verbs; as, 3d) freue mid), I rejoice 3d) Bilbe mtr etn, I fancy Conjugation of Reflexive Verbs. INDICATIVE. Present. 3$ Wfdje mid), I wash or I am washing (myself) bu mafdjeft bid), thou washest (thyself) er mfefet ftd), he washes (himself) REFLEXIVE VERBS. 157 5Bir wctfdjen una, we wash (ourselves) fie Wofdjen fid), they wash (themselves) Imperfect. 3d) irrte mid), I was mistaken . feu irrtejt fetdj, jc. 1st Future. 3#) w«*e mid) cmffeifeen, I shall dress myself feu ttrirft bid) onflettcn, k. lsi Conditional. 3d) miirfee mir eirtiilfeen, I should fancy feu ttmrbejt t>ir etriMiben, thou wouldst fancy Obs. HI. — The compound tenses of reflexive verbs, are with one exception, * formed with the auxiliary verb | a 6 e n. Perfect. 3d) tyabt mid) gefoiSfmt, I have accustomed myself bu Ijafi bid) gewBfjnt, thou hast accustomed thyself er $at ftd) gemotynt, he has accustomed himself 3Bir tyafcen vmi getub^nt, we have accustomed ourselves tt)r Ijafcet eud) gctub^nt, 1 you have accustomed @ic ty&tn ftd) gemo|nt, j yourselves fie tyftm ftd) gewBijnt, they have accustomed themselves Pluperfect. 3d) Ijatte mid) getwt, I had been mistaken feu ^attejt fetd) getrrt, jc. 2nd Future. 3$ werbe mid) au3gef(eifeet f^dbtn, I shall have undressed myself ht wtrft bid) auSgefletbet Ijafcen, jc. 2nd Conditional. 3$ toitrte mid) artgefleibet tyaben, I should have dressed myself feu tttttfcejt feid) cmgefletbet |aBen, w. Infinitive. (Sid) Seflagen, to complain * The verb fi<$ btwupt fein, to be conscious of, is conjugated both in the simple and compound tenses with the auxiliary fein; as: 3d) Sin mir iewujjt, jc, 34 6in mir fceroujjt gcmefen, jc. 158 KEFLEXTVE VEBBS. MFEEMTVE. Singular. 2Bafd)e bid), wash (thyself) Plural. 2Bafd)et eud) or tvafc^en @te fidj, wash (yourselves) Reading Exercise LXXIII. 3d) fletbe mid) jeben SDforgen an. ©u |a(l bid) geirrt, tdj Bin nid)t ber, ten er fud)te. Marl wafc^t fid) jeben Sag. ©te IjaBen fid) nod) nidit ausgef letter, ftc werben fid) erft urn jeljn ltf)r auSfletben. £iefe &erren irrcn fid), memt fie gtauBen, bag wir reid) finb. Diefe ©d)iiler jcerben fid) iibcr ityren Scorer BeHagen; fie fagen, bajj er ju frrenge tjt. ©etne ©d)»efter Biltet fid) ein fdjiin ju fein. Sfyr mufjt eud) gut Be* tragen unb eljrtid) fein. ©er ®ele|rte getobljnte fid) fliU ju fifeen. ©ie tciirben fid) gewofynen fritl} aufgufteien. 2Bir fatten uns seraBrebet etnen ©pajiergang ju tnadjen. fttotl banner t)aBin fid) getijbtet. <£i freut i|n fefyr bid) ju fe^en. granj Befanb fid) geftern nidjt too^t; er tear gan? Bieid;; id) gtau&e, bafj er ^opfweB, |atte. Theme LXXIII. I rejoice very much to see you. John, hast thou washed thyself? My sister always behaves well and is {passive) loved by every body. We have not yet dressed (ourselves), we shall dress directly. The children were undressing when I came. There are many people who fancy themselves to be better than others: Frederick had wounded himself with my penknife; it was newly (frifd)) sharpened. I felt (found myself ) better yesterday than Friday. Tou will have been mistaken, Sir. Why would he complain ? The soldier would have killed himself. Mary had just dressed when her uncle came to 2 see 3 her., Those boys should have accustomed themselves to rise at six o'clock every morning. Mithridates defended himself with great courage against the Romans. Conversation. £a6en fid) 9tofa unb @mtlie ge* ©ie IjaBen fid) nod) nid)t gewafdjen, wafd)en ? fie fletben fid) eBen an. SBie Befmbet fid) 3$te gran Gutter ? Siemtidj gut ; id) banle Sljneit. BEFLEXIVE VEBBS. 159 £atftd)$arinid)tgutbetragen? SKetn, er mujj fid) gcto&^nen flitt ju Pfeert. SBilnen <3te fidj ein, bafi e n* ten im ©oncert, there were two students in the concert. But when an indefinite existence is to be expressed, no distinct place being mentioned, use ti and the verb gefcen with its proper case (accusative), as: @S (Ji(c)bt gute unfc fdjledjte Seute, there are good and bad people, Obs. III. — A number of impersonal verbs are also followed by a personal pronoun of the dative or accusative (reflexive form, 'see preceding Lesson), of any person or number. With the Accusative. With the Dative. £g fciinft mid), it appears to me ©$ fcegegnet mir, it happens to me ti Surjlct mid), I am thirsty ti fiiUt mir ein, it occurs to me ti freut mid),f I am glad ti gefatlt mir, I am pleased ti friert mid),f I am cold ti getingt mtr, I succeed ti ^ungert mid),f I am hungry ti ift mir leit, 1 lam sorry e<5 jammert mid), I pity ti tijut mir left, j for it ti reitt mid), I repent ti ift mir warm, J I am warm ti fd)autert.mid),t I shudder ti ift mir tuoljt, I feel well ti fdjmerjt mid), I grieve ti fommt mir »or, it seems to me ti tteririefj t mid), it vexes me ti liegt mtr ttiel taran, it is im- ti nmnbert mid), I wonder portant to me * ©3 is omitted in the interrogative form, as : Is there a bird in this cage? Sfl ein SJogel in bicfem flafig? ■(• Verbs marked thus f are also used personally ; as : 3$ frette mid); icf) ftiere; id) bin burfitg or id) tyabe Durft. % It is improper to say : 3 d) t i n tt> a r m, or i d) jmtJJ Warm. Like, wise is it incorrect to say, id) fifn fait, but-, ti ijl mir warm, ti i fi m i r fa 1 1 , i d) f i i c r e , are right. 162 IMPERSONAL VERBS. With the Accusative. With the Dative. ti fragt fid), it is a question ti fd^tttttbelt tntr, I am giddy ti fd)tcft fid), it is proper ti rotrb tntr tiki, I feel sick t£ oerftek flc^, it is a matter of 3Ba3 feljtt 3kien? what is the course or of course matter with you? Reading Exercise LXXIV. ©3 regnete ntck, akr cs wirb fyageln. ©3 wiirbe fcfjneien, foenn ti nid)t fo tott ware. ©3 Ijat bte ganje 9iat^t gebonnert unb gek"t|3t. ©3 wirt SJlorgen fdjbnea SOSetter fein. ©8 ift kute nid)t fek fait, e3 t|aut. ©a wtrb bid) reuett, baj) bu nidjt nad) Serlttt gcgangcn Mft. 2Bie gefiel e3 S^n in 9Ritttd)en ? ©3 nranbert tnid), bafj grietrtc^ nod) nid)t abgereljt ift. ©8 Serbrofj itn3. $atn e3 bir nidjt »or, ali o& er bic Unwakijett fagte? ©3 ftng on kH jtt werben, ali toix in $art3 anfatnen. 3)a3 Heine SOlabdjen ijt burfttg, gefcen ©ie ik ein wenig SBajfer. ©a tuirb Skien ntd)t3 niijjen nad) 3)arf3 j« gekn, tuenn ©ie nidst granjoftfd) fpredjen fiJnnen. ©3 fragt fid), oo er ein Slnterifaner ift. ©a fetylen mir etntge Sitdjer, wo ftnb fie ? SBenn e8 fein eretgea Sekn gdBe, wtirbe ber Sftenfd) _nid)t fo gliidud) fein ati iai S^ier. ©a iammerte mid) tkt in einem fo ungtMidjen 3uftonbe ju ftnben. Theme LXXIV. Was it fine weather yesterday ? It rained and hailed the day before yesterday. Will it snow to-morrow ? It has been very cold every day of this week.. Yesterday it thawed, to- day it freezes. Were you hungry 2. I am very thirsty now, but I shall be hungry at twelve o'clock. It thunders, it will soon lighten. Will there be many walnuts (in) this year? There is a street in Berlin over two miles long ; it is one of the finest streets in the world. It dawned before we left Berlin. It is very important to me to know how old you are. We shudder when we think (of it), how the poor suffer from the cold this winter. I wonder that he has not written you, for he promised it before he went away. It occurred to me after I had left your uncle. It was proper to send her a dollar, for she is very poor. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 163 Conversation. 2B«3fiir2Betteri|t estate? Jpat eg geftern geregnct ? ©taufcen @le, bafj ti SKorgen fetyr fait fein wirt) ? Sift bu fyungrig ober burftig ? £at es S^nen in SSflundjen ni$i gefatten? 28irt> bas SBetter jtdj iinbern? 2Ba3 tft bir gefdie^en ? 28arum ftnb fie fo traurlg ? ©ibt e« erroas Sfteueg (or 3Ba3 QitWi Vims) ? ©a tft Ijeute ntcfyt fefyr angene|me3 SOBetter, t$ Ijat ben ganjen SMor* gen gefdjnett unt geljageft. Stein, es regnete, tonnerte unb Mijtfe tcafyrenb ber 9tad)t. Ss roirb warm fein, i»enn cs nidjt friert. 3dj Bin feljr t)ungrig, Mtte, gekn @ie mir etn <3tMd)en 33rob. 5Mn, ta geftel mtr in Seriin siel Beffer. ©3 ftyeint mtr fo ; wenigftenS fdngt ts an ju tfyanen. ©g serbriefjt mid), bap tnir ju £aufe HeiSen miiffen. S» fdjmerst jie, bajj fte it)ren treuen SMener serloren Men. §err 2tncotn, ber fur me|r benn ' »ier 3«^e $r&fibent ber SSeret* ntgten ©taaten war, ijl ermor= bet worben. Reading Lesson. 9t^ori8mcn. S s gi6t wtrKicrj fetyr biele 9Jlenfd)en, Me Mop lefen, ioeil fte nidjt benfen biirfen. „23ie gefyt'S ? " fragte ein Slinber einen gasmen. „2Cie @ie fe^en," antoortete ber Saljme, (r ganj paffakl."* ®3 fltngt (adjerlid), aber ti fft wa'fjr: roenn man etoas ©utes fdjreiben will, fo mufj man etne gute geber Ijaben, ^au^tfac^Iict; eine, tie, otme bafj man brucft, teicfytoeg fdjreibt. Quite passable; tolerably. 164 IMPERSONAL VERBS. aBenn 3emank etoas fdjled)t madjt, tas man gut ermartetc : nun jo, fo lann id) ti audi.* di gt&t wenige SKenenSarten, tic fo sicl 33efd)eti>entjeit oerratljen. 2Bemt id) etit beutf(^e3 23ud) mit lateinifdjen 33ud)fta:6en gerrucft lefc, fofommteSmtrsor, aU miijjte id) eS lttir erjt ufcerfefcen ; cfcenfo ictnn id) taa 33ud) uerfe^rt in tie Jpatm ncfyme unb lefc, — cin 33c= WetS, »ie fefyr unfere Segriffe fel&jl son Diefcn fyifytn a6|angm. 2td)ten6erg. * Supply mafytn in this sentence. PAET III SYNOPSIS OF GERMAN GRAMMAR. THE PARTS OF SPEECH. 1. The Parts of Speech in German are ten : I. The Article. VI. The Verb. n. The Noun or Substantive. VH. The Advebb. ni. The Pronoun. vm. The Preposition. IV. The Adjective. IX. The Conjunction. v. The Numeral. X. The Interjection. a) Of these (ten) parts of speech the first six are capable of inflection. The remaining four are invariable. b) The genders and numbers are the same as in English. c) The relation of words to each other, in English ex- pressed mostly by means of prepositions, is in German also denoted by a change of the ending of the noun and the article preceding. These changes of the endings are divided into different classes, called cases, and correspond best to those of the ancient languages. They are: 1. The Nominative, answering to the English nominative. 2. The Genitive, usually corresponding to the English possessive, or to the objective after the preposition of. 3. The Dative, usually corresponding to the English objec- tive after the preposition to. 4. The Accusative, corresponding to the English objective after an active verb, or after other prepositions than of or to. THE ARTICLE. 2. Remark. — The German has two articles, the Definite and the Indefinite. Both are declined, and by their end- ings serve to indicate the gender, number and case of the noun, to which they belong. 166 PARADIGMS. — DECLENSIONS. Declension of the Definite Article. Singular. Plural. MASC. fem. neuter, for the three genders. Nom. fcer bie bo§ bie, the Gen. beg &er be§ bet, of the Dai bem bet bent ben, to the Ace. ben bie ba& bie, the 3. Declension of the Indefinite Article. MASC. PEM. NEUTER. No PVwral. Nom. cin cine cin, a or an Gen. ctneS cinet cined, of a Dat. cincm cinet cinem, to a Ace. einen eine cin, a THE NOUN. Declension of Common Nouns. 4. Remake. — We divide the common nouns into four declensions. The first three contain the nouns of masculine and neuter gender, the fourth the nouns of feminine gender. First Declension. 5. The first declension contains all masculine and neuter nouns ending in el, en, et, and the diminutives in ci>en and lein. They add 8 in the genitive singular, and n in the dative plural.* In the plural the radical vowels a, o, u, are modified. Singular. MASCULINE. neuter. Nom. ber rofef]roren ber 95rofefforcn ben sprofefforen bie sprofeffbren 8. Second Declension. To this declension belong all masculine substantives and national appellations ending in e, a few monosyllabic words 168 PARADIGMS : NOUNS. that were formerly dissyllabic and ended in C, and all foreign nouns of the masculine gender having the accent on the last syllable, except those ending in V, ol, an, and aft. 1 Mascu- line nouns and national appellations ending in c, add n ; all \j others add Ctt through all cases of both numbers (the nomi- native, of- course, excepted). The radical vowel of nouns belonging to this declension is not modified. Adjectives and participles, when used substantively, take the inflec- tion of this declension ; e. g., from alt, old, ber 8lltC, the old man. EXAMPLES. MASCULINE NATIONAL FOREIGN ADJECTIVE DECLIN- NOUN. APPELLATION. NOUN. ED SUBSTANTIVELY Singular. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. ber $nabe be$ ifttaien bem finaben ben ftnaben ber gransofe beg gransofen bem gransofen ben gransofen ber SDionarcb/ ili Sionardjcil bem SRonardjen ben Wlomtfytn ber SHte be« Stlten bem Stlten ben Sllten Plural. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. bie Snaben bet Jfnaben ben Snaben bie Snabcn bie graujofen ber gransofen ben gransofen bie gtanjofen bie 2ftonarcben ber 5Nonard)en ben 3*conard)en bie 2JImiard)en bie aittcn ber aitcn ben Slttcn bie STltcn MONOSYLLABIC NOUN, FORMERLY DISSYLLABIC. Nom Gen. Dat. Ace. Singular. . ber ©raf beS ©rafen bem ©rafen ben ©rafen Plural. \ bie ©rafen r ber ©tafen / ben ©rafen \ bie ©rafen / To this class belong: ber SBd't, bet S&rtfi, ber giirft, ber ®raf, s ber £elb,» ber 4>err4 4 bet 9tott4 bet 9iet»4 bci 9)oet,t ber £f)or, ber 3Renfd)4 and ber Dd)«4 1 Foreign nouns ending in r. tth on. and aft belong to the third de clension. 8 Old German : ber ©ra»e. 8 $elb is dissyllabic in Anglo-Saxon : healeth. * Those marked with an J are still frequently spelled with t and so pronounced by the vulgar in some parts of Germany. PARADIGMS : NOUNS. 169 9. Third Declension. This declension contains all masculine and neuter nouns not already enumerated in the first (el, en, et, c^cn, and lettt) and second (e) declensions. They are : 1. All masculine and neuter monosyllabic roots ; and such as take a prefix. 2. Most of the masculine and neuter com- pound words. 3. Masculine derivatives ending in ig, i$, at, ittg, and ling. 4 Some masculine and all neuter nouns of foreign origin having the accent on the last syllable. 5. All nouns ending in tbttat, and some in nt#. Nouns in this declension add in the singular eS 1 in the genitive, and e 5 in the dative. In the plural they add e in all cases and in the dative besides the e an it. Masculine nouns modify the radical vowels a, o,K. EXAMPLES OF MASCULINE NOUNS. MONOSYLLABIC ROOT. Norn, ber ghtjj Gen. be* gluffeg Dat, bent Slujfe Ace. ben Slug Nom. bie Sliiffe Gen. ber gliiffe Dat. ben gliifien Ace. bie glttffe Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. NOUN WITH PREFIX. ber SSefebl be« BefeSta bem SBefe^le ben SSefe^I DERIVATIVE. FOREIGN NOUN. Plural. bie Sefeble ber Sefe^le ben Sefe^Icn bie Sefefcle ber 5taf»3 be8 tfafigg bem Aaftge ben fiafig bie Jfaftge ber Sapge ben Soifigen bie Safige ber Styfeliaum be« SlpfelSaumeS bem Sfyfelbaume ben Sfyfelbaum COMPOUND WORD. Pltvral. bie 9Tt)fer6iiume ber Slpfelfcoume ben Styfelbauincn bie Stpfetbiiiimc ber Sarbinal btti SarOinaiS bem fiarBmale ben -ffarbinal bie flatbmdte ber fiarbtnalc ben ffiarbtnalen bie JJarbindle "\ Notice that in com- I pound words only t-hn f last componenc is in- ) fleeted. 1 Masculine derivativss in ifl add g only. 5 Most writers elide the c in the genitive and dative singular in dis- syllabic and polysyllabic nouns, unless accented on the last syllable. 170 paradigms : Norms. 10. EXCEPTIONS. I— ®er Slrm, 2ag, £unb, ©ffytlj, ©act)s, 2o$3, Slal, fPfab, ©toff, 9)un!t, ©tab, and §uf do no< modify the radical vowel in the plural. II. — Ser ©toot, ©trotyl, ©djmerj, ©porn, ©orrt, and ©ec add en in the plural and are not modified. ni.— X)cr Wlarm, SBctft, Seio, ©eift, 2Burm, 9lanb, ©ott, Drr, Sormunb, ateictjtljum, and 3rctt)um modify the radical vowel and take cr in the plural. Exception I. Exception n. Exception III. Singular. Nom. ber §unb bet ©rra$l ber SBurm ber 9teie§tbum Gen. bea fcunbeS bea ©trailed- bed SBurmeS bti SReicbtbumeS Dat. btm fmnbe bent ©tragic bem Surme bem JRei&tljume Ace. ben §unb ben Strait ben Sffiurm ben 9iei$tbum Plural. Nom. bie £unbe bie ©trafyten bie SBfirmer bie 3teid)tl)umer Gen. ber $unbe ber ©:ra$len ber SBurmer ber Steidjttyumer Dat. ben Sunbelt ben ©tratyltn ben SBurmern ben Stidjt^umern Ace. bie §unbe bie ©tra^Icn bie SBiirmer bie SKeiiitfjumcr EXAMPLES OF NEUTER NOUNS. MONOSYI/LABIC NOUN WITH FOREIGN word ending in BOOT. PREFIX. NOUN. tt)Uttt. Singular. Nom. ba8 ©$af bad ©ebct baa Eoncert baa Saifert^um Gen. bea ©cbafeS bti ©ebetefi bed SonccvicS bea SatferttjumeS Dat. bent ©cfyafe bent ©ebete bem Eoncerte bem ffaifertbume Ace. baa ©d)af ba« ©ebct baa Eoncert baa .Rinfertfmm Plwral. Nom . bie ©cbafc bie ©ebete bie Eoncerte bie Jtaifertbiimcr Gen. ber ©cfyafe ber ©ebete ber Eoncerte ber .ftaifertfciimcr Dat. ben ©djafen ben ©ebetcn ben Eoncertcn ben Jfaifertbumertt Ace. bie ©tboff bie ©ebete bie Eoncerte bie Saifertbiimer 11. EXCEPTIONS. I— Da* 3lmt, Sonb, Sift, Start, Suet), £oA, Dorf, St, geft, ®eft, ©las, ©ra6, fcaus, £orn, £ut)n, tfalb, tftnb, Mtli, Samnt, PARADIGMS : NOUNS. 171 2tti«), 2«b, 9fcfc Stab, €#„& XW, ma, Sort, gfof ,' ©ema*, ©emutf), ©eftfy, ®efd)Ied)t, tf amijbl', 3teafment', ©pttal', AalfertW and gurftentfjum modify the radical vowel" and take cr in the plural. K— Da« STuge, 33ctt, gnbe, £emt>, 3«fe!t, £%, and baa £er 3 , the heart (which takes enS in the genitive and en in the dative singular, as, be$ fcergenS, Sent Jperjcn), take en in the plural. III.— A few words ending in al, derived from the Latin, take ten in the plural : iai Capital, Mineral, 9MeriaT, &c. Nom. baa Stmt Gen. bea StmteS Dat. bent Stmte Ace. baa Stmt Nom. bie Stemter Gen. ber Stonier Dat. ben Stemtern Ace. bie Stouter Exception I. Exception II. Singular. baa ®tmafy baa Stuge be* ®tmai)tS bea Stuge8 bem ©emadje bem Stuge ba« ©emadj baa Stuge Plural. bie ©emfidjcr bie Stugeti ber ©emadjer ber Stugen ben ©emadjern ben Stugen bie ©ernact)er bie Stugen Exception III. baa fla)>t:al bea JJapitalg bem tfatritate baa Capital bie flapitalien ber itapttalien ben Sai)italicn bie AatritaHcn 13. Fourtli Declension. All feminine substantives belong to this declension. In the singular they remain unchanged. 3 In the plural the monosyllabic nouns add e'and modify the radical vowel, while the dissyllabic and polysyllabic nouns take en, B but do not modify their radical vowel." 1 Slog takes c only. 8 Words in t$um modify this syllable : $ur|renrtyiimet. 8 Feminine nouns had at one time an inflection in the singular, and vestiges of that practice still remain in poetry and in certain phrases; le. g., auf Srben (instead of auf ber ©rbe), on earth. 4 In the dative n is of course added. 6 Feminine dissyllabic and polysyllabic nouns ending in t add tt only ; e. g., bie ©abe, plur. bie ©aben. 6 Die SWutter, the mother, and bie Softer, the daughter, modify the radical vowel, but do not change their ending, as, bie SWiitter, bie Stijd)tcr. 172 PARADIGMS : NOUNS. EXAMPLES. MONOSYLLABLE. DISSYLLABLES WITH II AND Ctt- Nom. bie ©an3 Gen. ber &ani Dat. ber ©an* Ace. bie ®cmi Nom. bie ®infe Gen. bet ©dnfe Dat. ben Oanfcn Ace. bie ©anfc bie ©tunbe bie Sfi>ftd)t ber ©tunbe bet 3lt>fid^t bet ©tunbe bev »fid)t bie ©tunbe bie SIbficbt Plwrdl. bie ©tunben bie Slbftcbten ber ©tunben ber 2lbitd)ten ben ©tunben ben 2lbftd>ten bie ©tunben bie Slbftc&ten POLYSYLLABLE. bie Stufmerffamfeit ber StufmerffamMt ber 3lufmerf|"amfeit bie Slufmerffamfei: bie Stufmertfamfeiten ber Slufmerffamfeiten ben Stufmerffamleiten bie SJufmcrffamfeiten 13. EXCEPTIONS. I. — The following twenty-seven feminine monosyllabic nouns, which were formerly dissyllabic (see Second Declen- sion, Monosyllabic Nouns and Notes), still retain the old in- flection, viz., en in the plural instead of C: Die Slrt, 33at)tt*' Suit, Surg, gaH glut, gtutl), germ, 2 grew, 3 ©lutlj, 3a&, 2afc 9>fUd)t, $ oft," dual, <5d)aar * @d)lad)t, ©djrift * ©djulD, ©pur, £&at, £rad)t, Ut)r * SBafl, SCeft* 3efler ber ©cb>ejler ber ©djwefltr bie ©djtoeftet Plural. bie ©$»efiern ber ©a)roeflern ben ©djroefiern bie ©djme|tern bie SUttbel ber 9tobel bet Sfabel bie Mabel bie OTabeln ber -Wabeln ben Sfabeln bie Scabeln bie SBetriibnifj ber Setriibnig ber Settubnijj bie SBerrubntji bie SetriibnifTe ber Setrubniffe ben SetrubnifTen bie S8etrubni(fe 1 Words marked with an * are Btill sometimes pronounced by the lower classes in some parts of Germany as if they terminated in e. * 9)ofl and gorm are derived from the French, la poste, la forme. 8 Old German : graue. PARADIGMS. PROPER NOUNS. 173 PROPER NOUNS. Declension of Proper Nouns of Persons. 14. The Names of persons are declined either with or without the article (definite or indefinite). 1. In the singular, proper nouns, when preceded by the article, remain unchanged; but, when used without the article they add 8 in the genitive.* 2. In the plural, proper nouns are used only when the same noun is common to several individuals, or as common nouns. Those denoting masculine persons add e,f those denoting feminine persons add en. MASCULINE. Louis Homer N. bet Sutwtg $om'er G. fce8 Suiting $omer8 D. fcetit Sutroig Corner A. ben Sirtwtft £omer Schiller tie ©filler ter ©emitter ten <3d)tflern tic ©djifler Plur. fcetit Sutroig ben Sutrcig Henry tie Jpcinrid)C ter £>etnrid>e ten £etnrid)en Me £>emrid;e FEMININE. Mary Anna fcie Wlaxxt 3lnna tet Wlaxit 2lnna8 let SCJarte 2hma bie Mark Louisa tie Souifen ter Souifen ten Souifen tie Souifen Slnna Joan tie 3ofyanrtcn ter Sofeanncn ten 3o^«nncn tie Sofyannen N. G. D. A. 15. Exception I. — Masculine names ending in 8, ft, fd», 1j, $ , or J take en8 in the genitive. n. — Feminine names ending in e add tt8. HI. — ©ott (God) is declined without the article. In the genitive e8 is added. IV. — Foreign names ending in 8 do not add another 8 in. the genitive, but use the article instead. Note. — E^tifluS and 3efu3 are declined as in Latin, as : N. SefitS £$rt* Hi, G. Sefu SfcrifH, D. Sefu 'SJrtjlo. A - Sefmn S^riflum. * If several proper nouns stand together, the last only is inflected. If the word, §err, JJrau, SSaflam, ^friiulctn, or some other common noun, expressing a title or dignity, when accompanied by the article, precedes a proper noun, only the common noun is declined. ■f In the dative n is of course added. Words ending in t in the sin. gular do not add another e, and the names of male persons ending in el, en, er, and djen remain unchanged. 174 PARADIGMS. — PROPER NOUNS. Ex. to Exc. I. Ex. to Exc. II. Ex. to Exo. III. Ex. to Exc. IV. Francis Emily God Alcibiades N. gronj Smilie ©ott SUcfMabea G. Qranjcn© SmiliCttd ©otte* fce§ Stfcibiabes D. granj Smilie ©ore Sllctttasei A. gran} Gmtlie ©ott 2lIctMabe3 Names of Countries, Places, Eivers, Lakes, etc. 1 6. Names of countries and places do not take the article, but add 3 in the genitive. Nom. ©eutfdjlattb, Germany Scrlin, Berlin Gen. Deutftyfont* SBcrlinS Dat. 2)eut|"4lant) Scrliit Ace. Deutfdjlanb Seriin 1 7. Exception I. — Names of countries and places ending in 8, y, or j, remain uninfected in the genitive, but are preceded by the preposition son. II. — TAt @d>roei3, Switzerland, and tie %Md (Juries), Turkey, are treated as common nouns. 1 8 . Names of rivers, lakes, &c, take the article in Ger- man, and are declined as common nouns. National Appellations. 10. 1. National masculine appellations are formed from the names of the respective countries by adding cr, and are declined as common nouns. 2. National/emwme appellations are formed from the mas- culine* by the addition of ttl(tt) in the sing, and ttltt in the plural ; e. g., tic $oIitmen, the Polish ladies. 20. Exception. — The following are formed irregularly. ber (Sadjfe, the Saxon ber $mtjje, the Prussian tier £eutfdje,* the German ber $ote, the Pole tier Sane, the Dane fcer 3tujje, the Eussian ber granjofc, the. Frenchman ber @d)weoe, the Swede ber ©riedje, the Greek ber ©punier, the Spaniard bcr Jiirfe, the Turk ber Setter, the Bavarian Note.— Adjectives denoting nationality are generally formed by add- ing ifri) to the roots of national appellations, e. g., rulftfd), except btu tfdl. * Feminine, $ie Deutjajs, but ein £>eutf$er, a German! PARADIGMS. ADJECTIVES. 175 The Adjective. 31. 1. The German adjective is, whenever it is a predi- cate, indeclinable, and is generally separated from the noun by a verb ; e. g., Her SBein ift gut, the wine is good. 2. "When the adjective is a qualifying attribute to a noun it precedes the latter, and agrees with it in gender, number, and case ; e. g., bas Heine fyaui, bie Heinen §aufer, the small house, the small houses. Declension of the Attributive Adjective. 3. The attributive or qualifying adjective has three dif- ferent form3 of declension : a) When preceded by the definite article ; 6) When preceded by the indefinite article ; c) When it stands without any article. 33. The Adjective preceded by the Definite Article. Adjectives, when preceded by the definite article, or by a pronoun declined like the definite article, take the inflection of the Second Declension, i. e., e, in the nominative singular; en* in all other cases. The accusative singular fern, and neut. being always lite the nominative are, of course, excepted. MASCULINE. the good man N. bet gute Ttann Q. bed guten SJknneS D. tern guten Wlamt A. ben guten SDtom N. tit guten Wamtx G. fcer guten SJlftnner D. ben guten SDtdnnem A. fcie guten banner Singular. FEMININE. the beautiful woman fcie fdjiine grctu tier fd)onen grau fcie fd#ne %tan fcer fcbijnen grew Phtral. tie fdjbnen grauen fcer fdjonen grauen fcen f^Bnen grauen fcie fdjiSnen grauen NEUTER. the small child &a§ Heine .Rinb fce« Heinen .RinfceS bera Heinen $infce ba<3 Heine $tnfc fete Heinen Winter ber Heinen $inber ben Heinen ^intern bie Heinen Jtinber * Adjectives ending in el» en, or cr> drop the t, when declined. 176 PARADIGMS. ADJECTIVES. 23. The Adjective preceded by the Indefinite Article. Adjectives preceded by the indefinite article, by a posses- sive pronoun, or by f citt (no), add in the nominative singular cr in the masculine and ed in the neuter. MASCULINE. feminine. NEUTER. a poor painter an old woman a sick child N. etn armcr 5Mer cine atte grau etn fronted ,Rmc G. cities artnen Wlakvi einer alten grau eineg frantcn tinted D. etncm artnen Wlalet eincr alten grau eincm Iranlcn $tnbe A. cincn armen 9Mer cine afte grau etn franteS ^inD 24. The Adjective "Without an Article. Adiectives not immediately preceded by an article, or by a pronoun, declined like an article, take the ending of the ar- ticle to indicate the gender of the noun which they qualify. masculine. FEMININE. NEUTER. red wine fresh milk black cloth N. rotter 2Mn frifdje 9KiI$ ffycarseS* Su^ G. rotten SBetneS frifdiet m\% fcfywarjen Zufyi D. rodent SBetnc frifebet SKUd) fdjmarjem Judj A. rotl;e£ SDetn frifefee sma^ Plural. fdjwatged £uc() red wine warm soups new books N. rottje SCcine roarme ©uppen nette Siidier G. rotfjer SBein warmer ©uppen neucr Sitter D. . rotten SBctncn roarmen ©uppen neuen Silvern A. rot^e fflcinc warme ©uppen neue Stiver 25. Adjectives used as Nouns, Adjectives used as nouns begin with a capital letter ; e. g., from gcijig (avaricious), feet ©cijtge, the avaricious man. * In colloquial language, %i is sometimes omitted, as : fctoarj Sitdj, etc PARADIGMS : NOUNS. 177 26. Comparison of Adjectives. Adjectives add et in the comparative and ft in the super- lative, and modify the radical vowels a, o,u in these two degrees; e. g., Superlative. iiingfl, ber iitngfle, or am ittttgften ebcXji, ber ebeljle, or om ebelflcn toeifef}, ber roetfefte, or am tocifelten totlbeft, Her toilbefte, or am wilbeften nltefi, ber dltefle, or am d'lteflen f«|e(i, ber fitfjefle, or am fitgeflen Note. — Notice : 1. That those ending in cl reject c in the compara- tive ; e. g., ebler (not, tbelct). 2. That those ending in e do not add an- other c ; e. g., roeifer (not, Wtifeer). 3. That adjectives ending in B, t, or a sibilant (j, i, |f, fj, fdj), insert t in the superlative before (I. 27. EXCEPTIONS. Adjectives of two or more syllables, monosyllables con- taining the diphthong cut, as, Matt, taut, &c, and those con- tained in the following list, do not admit of the modification of the radical vowel. Positive. Comparative. jung, young iiinger ebcl, noble ebler ioeife, wise tteifer ttilS, wild toilber alt, old filter fujj, sweet fufier blajj, pale Bunt, speckled falfd;, false flad), flat fro$, merry §0§l, hollow Ijolb, kind hl)l, bald t«g, scanty ttttr, clear fnasp, close, scarce lajjm, lame lei, loose matt, tired morfdj, rotten nacft, naked ptatt, fla plump, clumsy rolj, raw, rude runb, round fanft, soft fdjlaff, slack fdjlanf, slender fdjroff, rugged (larr, stiff (lot}, proud flump f, blunt tott, mad »ott, full jafjm, tame 28. Irregular and Defective Forms. Positive. bulb, soon grog, great gut, good tied), high no^e, near siel, much tttttig. little Comparative. e$er, fritter, sooner grofjer, greater 6e(fet, better pb>r, higher nd'^er, nearer meb>, more (»eniger,), eS8 (mtnber, ) Superlative. am etyeflen, the soonest ber grb'jjte, am grb'jjttn, the greatest ber t>e|le, am beftcn, the best ber fyodjfle, am ^odjjrett, the highest ber naa)fie, am nd'd)(lcn, the nearest ber meifle, am metften, the most J™**' [the least ( am mtnbeflen, ) 178 THli NUMERALS. THE NUMERALS. 29. Cardinal Numbers. cm, (ein3), one adjtje&n, eighteen jroei, two neunjefcn, nineteen Mel, three 3»anjt8, twenty »ier, four ein unt jwanjtg, etc. funf, five Metfltfl, thirty fed>3, six »lerjig, forty fteben, seven funfgtQ or funfolfl, fifty City, eight fecf)JtS, sixty tteutt, nine tfebenjifl or fiebjifl, seventy jc^n, ten (Kfyjtfl, eighty elf, eleven ncunjig, ninety gtoolf, twelve ^unSert, a hundred treijefm, thirteen tyunbert unb etna, etc. Bierje&tt, fourteen jwei^uiacrt, etc. filnfjefw or funfjebn, fifteen taufcnD, a thousand fedjjeljn, sixteen eme SRtflion, a million fiebenje&n, seventeen j»ei SJittltoncn, two millions 30. EtaS is used in counting ; e. g.,mi, }»ei; einntal ein8 ift cin8> &c., or when no allusion or reference is made to any particular object ; e. g., £3 fyat eiilS gefi^lagtn, it has struck one. 31. A hundred, a thousand, is in German $imbert, taufenb ; but one hundred, one thousand is cintyunbcrt and cintaufenb. 32. ©in (one) is declined like the indefinite article, but has a stronger accent, and is often written with a capital ; e. g., ©in "3Kanit, one man. With the definite article, it is declined like an adjective; but when alone, referring to a noun understood, it takes the same endings with the posses- sive pronoun (Less. XXV., Obs. I.); e. g., ber ©tne aftamt, the one man ; bent ©men ifl ju warm, tent 2tnberen ju fait, the one is too warm, the other too cold ; £aben or einfdltig, single ; 3t»eifod^ or smetfalttg, double or twofold, etc. 3. The Iter ati ves, by the affix nutl ; e. g., eintnal, once ; jmcinml, twice, etc. 4. The Distributives (Latin, bini, ierni, etc.) are formed by coupling the cardinals by the conjunction unD ; e. g., jroet ttttfe jlBCt, two and two. Instead of unt>, the adverb je (ever) may be used like at a time in English ; e. g., je tret, three at a Urns. 38. The English expressions what o'clock or what time, are trans- lated wie »iel ttljr; e. g., What o'clock (what time) is it, tttesiel U$r iff eS ? When speaking of the hour IfaSb (half) and SStertel (quarter) are placed before the next member? as, 1)aXb Uter, (half past three) literally half (toward) four ; etlt Siettd auf fe$3 (a quarter past five) literally a quarter towards (of) six. 3®. The practice, in English, of placing one or ones after the ad- jective is not admissible in German ; we must translate a good OKC, tin swter (fem. eine gute. neut. eta guteS). 180 THE NUMERALS. 40. Ordinal Numbers. ber erfle, the first ter 3»citc, the second ter tritte, the third ter uierre, the fourth ter fiinfte, the fifth ter fedjfte, the sixth ter ftebente, the seventh ter ad)te, the eighth ter netmte, the ninth ter jrijnte, the tenth ter elfte, the eleventh ter jwBlfie, the twelfth ter tretjefynte, the thirteenth ter ttierjetynte, the fourteenth ter fflnfje^nte, the fifteenth ter fecbjeljnte, etc. ter aroanjigfie, the twentieth ter etn unt jtoattjigfle, the twenty- first, etc. ter tretjjigfte, the thirtieth ter Dterjigfte, the fortieth ter fiinfjigfie, the fiftieth ter fed)3tgfh, the sixtieth ter fiefc(ert)}igjk, the seventieth ter adjtjtgjte, the eightieth ter neunjtgfte, the ninetieth ter tyuntertfie, the hundredth ter fymbert unt erfle, the hun- dred and first, etc. ter jroeifjuntertfle, the two hun- dreth, etc. ter taitjentfre, the thousandth ter jweUaufentfie, etc. ter (tie, tad) lefcte, the last 41. In compound numbers the last only is ordinal; e. g., tlio 1238th, ber jivoljfytnbert ac$t unb breijjigfte. 43. When no more than two objects are referred to ber ttlttere (the other), is used instead of ber jfficite ; e. g., tin Strm i(l tiir;er al« ber an* Sere, one arm is shorter than the other. 4S. SDer erfle and bev letter when referring to two persons or ob- jects, take generally the form of the comparative. 44. From the ordinals the following compound numerals are formed : 1. The Fractional (with the exception of f)alb) by add- ing the letter I ; e. g., tin Drtttel, a third part or one-third. They are declined like neuter nouns. Note. — The adjective fyatfc, half, is placed after the article. 1. The Dimidiatives, by adding the word Imlb. Their signification is peculiar ; e. g., £>rt ttefoolb (literally the third half) means two whole ones and a half of the third. 35tertet)d& = 3i. (Sometimes the C before Ijalb is omitted ; e. g., inert: THE NUMERALS. 181 l)(tib.) It is not usual to say jroettetyatfc, but anbctifyalb. The half means Me Jpiilfte. 3. The Distinctives,* by adding end, the final c of the ordinal being thrown out ; e. g., erftenS (sometimes also tx\tz Itc&), first, firstly, etc. Note. — With distinctives may also be classed some numeral nouns formed from the Cakdinals by suffixing «, to indicate the age of a per- Bon, the names of certain coins ; e. g : cin ©reijjiger, a man of thirty etne ©e$jigerin, a woman of sixty ein SDreier, three German pennies em ©edjfer, six German pennies 45. There is also a sort of interrogative ordinal formed from tote (how) and J)iel (much) used to put questions as to number, e. g., "What day of the month is it to-day ? fcer tnietnelte tft J>cute? or, ten ttietnelten beg SKottaU tjaben tetr fceute ? The Indefinite Numerals. 46. The greater part of the indefinite numerals are used and inflected as adjectives. They are : Mase. Fern. 3etcr (jebweber, jegli* jefce d)er),f every, each otter (aU), all - die fcin, n leine memefset, manya (an) manage ski, much Stele roeiug, little wentge Mte,pl. both einige (tt\iifyt),pl. some, a fewj v\d)Tttt,pl. several Me meiften, pi. most * The distinctives are sometimes called Ordinal Adverbs. f 3tb»eber and iegli^er are rarely used, except in poetry. % The plurals, einige and ctlidic, relate exclusively to number. Whe» used as indefinite pronouns (which see), they begin with a capital. Neuter. Plural. jefceS (wanting) atte* (all) atte, all fein feine, no mandjeS mature, some Met Mele, many icentg wentge, few 182 THE NUMERALS. 47. SHU is never followed by the definite article ; e. g., all the wine, nllcr SlBcin (not, aUtv Der Sein); all the girls, ailc 2J2iiDi!jcn (not, allc Die 5!)liiaii):.i). In the singulak, when followed by a pronoun, it is . used without the inflection; e. g., instead of, aUtS Utlfcr ©elb, we say, all Jinfcr (9elD ; but, alle metne greunbe. In the neuter singular, it often denotes an indefinite number or amount ; e. g., Slttcfl freut ftdj, everybody is happy. For the English all, used in the sense of the whole, use ganj (which denotes completeness), and not, all ; e. ben @ie SBrob ? Yes I have some ; jtt, id) b>be htel= djei. Have you any pens ? $aben <5te gebern ? Yes, I have some ; ia, id) babe einige. 50. SSiel and reenig are : 1. Uninflected when they imply a reference to measure or quantity: 2. Inflected (like adjectives) when they imply a reference to number : e. g., Berne nidjt auf etnntal SSteled, fonbern niel, do not study many things at once, but endeavor to learn much of one thing : 3. When preceded by an article or pronoun, they are invariably in- flected, no matter whether they imply reference to number, measure, or quantity; e. g., baS fctelc ®elb; fetn DteleS ©elb; fetne fttelen ©efdjafte; biefcr tocnigc SBein; meine tocntgen greunbe. Note. — Instead of ein 3Benigc$> we say also, etn tnenin, to indicate a small quantity of a thing ; e. g., etn toentg @al$, a little salt. 4) Used as indefinite pronouns (No. HI) relating to persons, Diet and ttenig are invariably inflected and begin with a capital ; e. g., SJiele ftnb berufen, aier Scnigc (mb auSerwablt, many are called, but few are chosen. THE NUMERALS. 183 THE PRONOUNS. 5 1 . The pronouns are in German divided into Pebsonal, Possessive, Demonstrative, Relative and Correlative, In- terrogative, and Indefinite. Personal Pronouns. 52. The personal pronouns are ic&, I ; fcu, thou ; cr (masc. ', he ; fie (fern.), she ; and e§ (neut.), it ; tt»ir, we ; tfot (@ie), you ; fie, they. They are declined as follows : l&T PERSON. 2D PERSON. For all genders. Nom. id;, I fcu, thou Gen. metner,* of me betner, of thee Dat. mix, to me fcir, to thee Ace. mid), me bid), thee 3d person. Masc. Fern. Neuter. Nom. cr, he fie, she eg, itf Gen. fetner,* of him ityrer, of her feiner, of it Dat. i|m, to him i|r, to her U)m, to it Ace. iljn, him fte, her ti, it PhiraZ. For all genders. 1st person. 2d person. 3d person. Nom. tt)ir, we t^r or @te, you fie, they Gen. unfer(er), of us eu(r)erj or ^vtr, of you tfjrer, of them Dat. una, to us eud) or 3|nen, to you itjnen, to them Ace. unS, us cud) or @te, you fie, them 53. In German there are two modes of address, t> U and ®te. £u is employed in addressing the Deity, near relations, intimate friends, servants and inferiors generaUy. ©ie is the polite mode of address ; it is used particularly with strangers and superiors, and is distinguished from the form of the third person plural by the initial capital. * SUctn, beitt, feilt, are sometimes used instead of the full forms, met: iter, Seiner, fetner. f ($$ is sometimes contracted with a verb or with a pronoun im- mediately preceding ; e. g., 3$ IjaB'S, Instead of i$ f)cibt tB. J The lengthened form, eurer, is sometimes used instead of euer. 184 THE PERSONAL PROKOtTNS. 54. In German inanimate objects and abstract ideas may be either masculine, feminine, or neuter. Hence the pronoun answering to the English it must in German be of the same gender as the noun for which it stands ; thus, to the question. Where is thy pen 1 the German an- swers, fie i(l §ier; because Seber is a feminine noun. 5o. When the personal pronouns refer to persons, whether male or female, who, for some reason, are put in the neuter gender, (dimi- nutives and words like 3Bei6, graueiuhnmer), the pronoun agrees with the natural sex ; e. g., Wai ma$t 3$r ©o$it<$eit? ill cr nodj ftanf ? — how is your little son ? is he still ill ? 56. ©3 is also employed, like it and there in English, as a nominative both before and after a verb without regard- to any noun understood or expressed and without distinction of gender or number, merely as an aid to the sound rather than to the sense of the sentence ; e. g., It is the teacher, cS ijl ter Scorer; o§ tfi tie ©riifm; e§ fmb mcinc Sritoer, etc. When CS is used in this manner with a personal pronoun, the posi- tion of words is in the affirmative form, in German, precisely the reverse of the English, as: It is I, id) bin ti it is we, tcir fmb ti It is thou, bu lift ti it is you, j | r ^ i& I e* It is he (she), cr (fie) i(t ti it is they, jie fmfc ti INTERROGATIVE FORM. Is it I ? 9Sin id) e«? Is it we? ftn& mir ti ? Was it thou ? tuarft bu ti ? Were it you ? foaren @ie ti ? O 1 * . 68 is sometimes replaced by the demonstrative pronoun (see No. 58) beffm or 6effcl6en. In the dative after a preposition the ad- verb Ba (there) coalesces with the preposition, and is used instead ; e. g., How much has he paid for it* tviesiri Ijat er Safiir beja^It (and not ffir ti). 58. The personal pronoun of the third person, er, fie, ed (in any case), to avoid repetition is replaced by the demonstrative fccrfelfce, biefelfce, baffette (lit. the same) ; e. g., the answer to the question : Havu you given him the sti< k ? I have given it to him, is rendered, t<$ &abe i$ro oenfsiften gegeCen (instead < f ty babe tfjn tym gegeben), (see No. 7g). THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 185 The Reflexive Personal Pronoun! 59. The personal pronouns 1. Of the first and second persons are endowed with a reciprocal power, hence the English self can not, in these two persons, be separately expressed ; e. g., I excused myself, id) entfdjulligte ntidj. 2. For the third person a distinct reflexive and reciprocal pronoun is used in place of ifyn: ft<^ ; e. g., He excused him- . self, cr entfd)uU>igte fic|> > plur., they excused themselves, fie entfdjufrigten fl4». @»3> has only one form for the three genders both in the singular and plural.* 3. When the pronouns myself, thyself, etc., are only em- phatic repetitions of the nominative, use felbftf clone without the other pronouns; e. g., The physician Irmsclf is sick ; he cannot cure even himself, ter 2lrjt fclbft ift franf ; er lonn fel&jl (id) md)t f)eUen. The Possessive Pronouns. ©O. Possessive pronouns, 1. "When in connection with a noun, are called conjunctive possessive pronouns, and take in the singular the ending of the indefinite, and in the plural that of the definite article ; e. g., Have you the book of my brother ? Ijafcen re euer* eueref ttjr tfjre Neuter. mein, my tern, thy fein, his tfyr, her fein, its unfer, our 3^r, | euer, ) J ovx ifyr, their For all genders. meine, my beine, thy feine, his iljre, her feine, its unfere, our 3$«, } euere (eure),) ^ our i^re, their * 3$ro was formerly used instead of 3Jjre» her, and also in placs of (Euer, your, in addressing persons of high rank ; e. g., 36>o (now 31jre or Sure) SDJajcfldt, your Majesty. In written communications, the pronouns (Eure, your ; ©cine, his ; and Seiner» to his, used in addressing persons of great distinction, are commonly abbreviated into (SUn., ©e., Sr. ; e. g., dtO. ©untytaitdjt, your highness ; Se. SRaiefldt ber fiomg, his majesty the king ; @r. SDlajtjld't bem ffionige, to his majesty the king. f The euphonic change to which adjectives ending in r, I, or en, are THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 187 66. Declension of the Conjunctive Possessive Pronouns. ■ar. Masc. Fern. Neuter. Nom. mein meine mein Gen. meineS meinec metneS Dat. meinem ntciner tneincm Ace. ntcincn mctne mein Plural. For the three genders, meinc, my tneiner, of my mein en, to my meinc, my 67. Declension of the Absolute Possessive Pronoun with the Article, Plural. Neuter. For all genders. N. btt metn(ig)e fciemetn(ig)e &aSmein(tg)c bit mein(ig)cn G-. bes meinigctt ber metnigen bes meintgett ber meintgett D. bent meintgett ber meintgett bem meintgett ten meintgett A. ben meinigen tie meintge bag meinige tie meinigstt 68. In German the definite article is used, instead of the posses- sive pronoun, in sentences where no ambiguity exists relative to the possessor ; e. g., He had a knife in his hand, cr tyatte etn 2Ke(fer in t>tt $«ttb. The Demonstrative Pronouns. 69. The demonstrative pronouns are : Masc. Fern. Neuter. biefer MefC MefeS, this jcrer jene jeneS, that folder foldje fotd)C§, such £er berjenige bit Mejenige . ' , I that, the one PaSjemge, ) tierfelbe i)ernamltd)e &tcfel6e, bit namtid)e fc I .. ' „ „ I the same Doe namltdje, J efonfcerfelfce ekn&icfelBe ebenS)of|"el6e, the very same. subject, applies also to possessive pronouns ; e. g., imfere or unfre ; unferer or unfrer ; ber unferige, or better, unfrige; eum or cure; euerer or euro; in titerifje or eurige. 188 THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. Declension of the Demonstrative Pronouns. 7©. £iefer, this ; and jencr, that, have the endings of the definite article, except in the Norn, and Ace. femin. and plur., where t is dropped and C alone is used ; e. g., Stefe (instead of tiefie). In the Nom. and Ace. neut., a changes to e; e. g., liefeS* (instead of tiefae). S&ngvlwr. Plural. Masc. Fern. Neuter. For the three genders. Nom. fciefer ticfc fciefeS, this fctefe, these Gen. tiefeS biefer fciefed, of this fciefer, of these Dat. fctefem biefer kiefem, to this kiefetl, to these Ace. fciefen ticfe fciefeS, this fctefe, these 7 1 . Instead of biefer, or jener, the numerals ber eine, ber anbere, the one, the other; bet erftere, bet lefctere, the former, the latter; ber erfie, bet 5»eite, the first, the second, are sometimes used ; e. g., £>er etiie (biefer) fagt 3a, ber anBcre (iener) fagt Stein, the one (this one) says Yes, the other (that one) says No. 72. 1. 18, thus : fri&er, fel&e, fel&eS. THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 189 same, have the endings of attributive adjectives with the definite article (see No. 22). 75. Declension of the Demonstrative 2>erjemgc Plural. Masc. Fern. Neuter. For all genders. N. fcerjenige fctejentge baSjertige, that bicjentgcn, those G. fceajemgen berjenigen beajentgen, of that berjenigett, of " D. bemjeittgen berjenigcn bemjemgen, to that benjenigen, to " A. benjenigen biejcmgc basjenige, thai btejenigen, those 76. Declension of the Demonstrative $«.* N. ber* tie ias, that tie, those G. beffenf beten beffen, of that beret, of those D. bent ber tent, to that benen, to those A. ben Me baa, that tie, those 77. The genitive sing, of the demonstrative Set is sometimes employed for the possess, pron. of the third person, to avoid ambiguity ; e. g., She has seen our sister and her daughters, their nieces, and their relations, fie \)0i imfere ©c&wefler unb Scren Softer, i^re Siidjten, unb bcrcn SSerWanbtc, oefe^en (tljr answering both to her and their is ambiguous). 78. The third person of the pers. prou. in all its cases, is some- times replaced by the full form of the demonstr. pron. ; e. g., I shall give it to him, id) roerbe t$m Doffel6c geben; instead of i<$ wetbt ti t$m gctien, or referring to a masculine noun, ify tterbe iljm benfeflieit gektt, instead of, ie& roerbe ifju tt)m ge&en. The Relative Pronouns. 79. The relative pronouns are : t»cld)er, Welctje, tt»el« e&eS (abbreviated form, bet, bit, SaS), who, which, or that ; t»er, who, and t»tt§, what. They are declined as follows : * The demonstr. ber receives more stress than the def. art. f Instead of beffen, be ft is used in poetical language. 190 THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. SO. Declension of the Relative SBeWjtr. 1. The Complete Form. Singular. PfatraJ. Masc. Fern. Neuter. i^or oK genders. A. wetd-et roeldje teeMeS welcfec, who, which (that) G. fceffcn* fceten fceffen fcctcn, of whom, whose, of which D. >Kl*em welder n>etd)«m wet* en, to whom, to which A. weldjen tcelcfje »i!(d;e§ weldje, whom, which (that) 2. The Abridged Form. Singular. Plural Masc. Fern. Neuter. For aU genders. N. feet He ha$ He, who, which (that) G. fceffen fceren feeffen bet en, of whom, whose, of which D. bent &er !)em fcea.cn, to whom, to which A. ten He 6no He, whom, which (that) Note. — In the gen. plur. the relative is bereitj not inn. 81. Declension of SBBcr and 9B*S. Mate. & Fern. Neuter. PVwral. N. 1»ev, who ttKlS, what (wanting) G. meffen, (or wefjf), whose roeffen, (or roejj), whose D. went, to whom A. tven, whom tt)03, what 82. The relatives tocldjer, tncldjc, toeldjes, or ber, ftie» bo8 are used indiscriminately of persons, animals, or things. They require the principal verb at the end of the sentence. If an auxiliary is also used its place is immediately after the main verb; e. g., I know the man who loves you, id) tenne ben 3Rcmn, tucldjcr (or tier) @ie licit ; you live in the house which I have bought, ©te roo^nm in bem |>aufc, teeldje (or baS) tdjj gefauft Ijabe. 83. The genitive of the relative tucldjcr or IttXi beffeitf beren> befiem like whose, in English, always precedes the word by which it is ° Scr is in poetical language preferred to beffen. t Wtx occurs also in the adverbs, t»ej$alfc, tncgwegen, why, wherefore, on which (what) account. THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 191 governed ; e. g., A book, whose leaves (the leaves of which) are soiled, tin 33ud), beffen ©latter bcfdjmufct finb. 84. The relative 2Ber» always begins a clause or sentence, but tno§ may either commence a clause or sentence or may be placed after its proper antecedent ; e. g., Witt ntr^t $6ren will, ber mufi fuf)Un ( he who (i e., whoever) will not hear must feel ; t»a3 SRedjt ifl, Meifct 9ta$t, what (i. e., whatever) is right, remains right ; 9UIe§, toa£ id) gcljort f)atte, all that (»'. «., that which) I had heard. These pronouns are employed wherever the antecedent is not definitely known ; e. g., SBer 6*8 gefagt $at ijl cin Starr, (he) who has said it (this) is a fool ; 3$ $8rte nidjt, toaS er fagte, I did not hear, what he said. 83. When the antecedent is definite, toeltfjer, toeldje, toeldjeS must be used; e. g., Sen ©toct> toeldjen bu mir gegeben ^aft, the stick which you have given me. 80. Often, tuer (toaS) has at once the force of both a relative and an antecedent; e. g., SBer bie ©efefee e$rt, t(l ein guter SBiirger, he who (i. e., the man who) respects the law, is a good citizen ; toafS gut iff, i(l nid)t im* mer fdjon, what (i. c, that which) is good, is not always beautiful. 87". In German the relative pronoun must always be expressed ; e. g., This is the horse which I bought at Berlin, biefeS i(l ba3 $Pferb, loeldjeg (or ta§) id} in SBcrlin faufte. 8 8 . Set is used, instead of ieeldjer, after the personal pronouns of the first and second person, when these pronouns are to be repeated, after the relative ; e. g., 3d)r ber id) fo »icl ®efi> Mrloten fy&t, I ° who have lost so much money. 89. SBeldjcr, t, tB, or fcet» connected with ntdji, answer to the Eng- lish but after a negative clause ; e. g., There is no man but has his faults, es giebt feinen SRenfdjen, toeWjer (or ber) nidjt fctae Seller $at. 90. 2BcW)cr is used in the sense of some or any, as a substitute for a noun previously expressed; e. g., |>aft bu HBrob, hast thou bread? 3a, idj Ijabe tseldjcl, yes, I have aowie. 91. The following adverbs are also used relatively, in place of the relative pronoun with corresponding preposi- tions (English, whereof, whereby, etc.) Like relative pronouns, they require the verb at the end of the clause. 6 Notice that in English the personal pronoun is not repeated. The order of the words, however, might be reversed ; e. g., 3d) b*r# instead of ber id), when the English would be I, I who, etc. 19*2 THE COBBKLATXVE PEONODNS. JBOjtt, to which or what ttorauS, from which or wl»*ve trc&ur cb, by which or what Worm, in which or what tJ-otntit, with which or what a*orfiber,at(over)whichorwhat roobef, at which or what worauf, upon which or what \ wofur, for which or what looran, at which or what tto&oa, of which or what tromnter, among which Note. — Notice that r is inserted between the adverb and the pre- position, when the latter begins with a vowel. 92. These adverbs (91), must, however, not be employed relatively to persons. For this purpose the prepositions and the relative pronoun are used ; e. g., with whom I was traveling, mil I) cm (or rocldjcm) id) reijle. Correlative Pronouns, 93. When a relative pronoun is preceded by a demon- strative, the two conjointly are called Cobbelatiyes. Thus : Masculine. ®erjenige, weld-cr, i©ctjenige, ) he who, that btv, or ©et, weldsct (tcr), ) which. Feminine, ©iejmige, welcfce, ©iejenige, bit, \ she who, that or iBie, toetdje (Die), I which. ' Neuter. $)a8jentge, n-eld;e§, $)a$ienige, \ that which, tt»aS, or ®aS, tcddicS (ioa«), J what. Pluralforall Sttejentgen roetd-e, Sttejenigcn, ) those who, genders, bit, or £)it, toeld'e (tic), ) those which. In the same manner are used : Serfelbe (or ebenberielk), tweleber, (or »cr), the same who, which, etc. 38er— (btt), he who— (he) ; never, ber, »er, except when some word intervene. Note. — SBer and toaS may be made more emphatic by adding the ad- verb immer, the conjunctive audi, or audi nur, audj tmmer ; e. g., toaS lie aud) gefagt fiaben mag, whatever she may have said. The Interrogative Pronouns. , 94. The interrogative pronouns are: SBer, who ? 2Betd)er, which, what? 3Boa, what? 9Ca8 fur (ein), what land or sort of? THE INTEEROGATIVE PBONOUNS. 193 93. The interrogatives tt»cr and ttmS are declined exactly like the relatives tcer, t»a3; tt>el$et like the demon- stratives fctefer, jener, etc. Of t»m§ flit ein only the indefinite article ein is declined (see No. 3). 96. Declension of the Interrogative Pronoun mifytt. Singular. Plural Mouse. Fern. Yeuter. for all genders. N. writer welcbe roetcfeeS, which ? weldje, which ? G. roeldjeS wetdjer roeldjeS, of which ? welder, of which? D. raelcfcem wtlfyt* roel&em, to which ? tseld}eu, to which ? A. wet^eu welcbe welcbeS, which? t»eld}e, which ? 97. Declension of the Interrogatives wtr and was. N. l»er, who ? tt»a§, what ? G. toeffen,* whose? toeffen,* of what? D. toettl,* to whom? . _ ) to what? A. tt»en, whom? W08 'j what? 98. 1. SBer is only used substantively, and refers exclusively to persons; SBaS t is, like roer, used substantively, but is applied only to things or indefinite objects; e. g., 2Ber tjt ba? einSIann, eine grau, einfiinb — who is there? a man, a woman, a child; SBnS (not Werj i(l baS ? tin SWmfdjr obcr ein SBaum ? what is that? a man or a tree? 2. SSclffltr refers to particular objects, and answers exactly to the English interrogative which; e. g., Which boy, welder .ftnafce? 3. 8BaS fur tin is used in asking after the land, quality, or species of a thing ; e. g., 2Ba8 fiir ein 3Rann, what sort of a man ? roa8 fiir cine @$ule, what kind of a school? was fiir ein $au8, what sort or kind of a house? 4. SBJeldjcr and tnag fiir ein are used odjectively, and appear as nouns .only when referring to a preceding noun ; SBeidjer in asking after a parti- cular person or thing, tnng fiir ein after a particular kind of persons or things ; e. g., $ier ifi ein grauer unb ein f^watjtr £ur, tneldjen miUft bu faben, here is a gray and a black hat, which one will you have? SBag fiir ein @$neiber ifi jener Sfflann, what (kind of a) tailor is that man? Set) roeig nield)er) D. was fiir einetn ctrer cincm was fiir (roeldjcn) A. was fiir cincn tire cincS was fiir (toeldjc) Note — In conversational language, W(t9 fur is in the plural generally followed by to eld) c. 103. The signification of the interrogatives is this: tt»cr and tt>a$, simply demand to know the species to which the object in question belongs ; tt»n§ fur eitt a more particular description of the nature or condition of the object in ques- tion; and tt)et($er, tt»eld>c, tt>el<$>C$, a precise designation of the object itself; e. g.. 38er ifi bet? who is there? Sin Sfteifenber, a traveler. SftJcS ffit cincr? what traveler (what kind of traveler* ? Gin ©cfmflefcrcr ouS Scrltn, a schoolmaster from Berlin. $8el$er ©djuflcfyrer ? which schoolmaster? £crr Slrnolti, Mr. Arnold, etc. 103. The interrogative pronouns what and which, when im- mediately followed by the auxiliary verb to be (fcin), are rendered by WdijtSt both in the singular and plural. - - THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 195 1 04. 1. gBaS connected with prepositions, substitutes r for £ and is prefixed to the preposition, (exhibited in No. 91) ; e. g., 2Baruitl ftrei* tci tf)v V for (about) what, or wherefore, are you quarreling ? But 2. SESoS is sometimes used in the sense of worum, or the preposition is placed before tuag ; e. g., For what (wherefore, why) are you beating me, nwS fdjldgjl bit mid) ? What are you quarreling about, um tllttS ftvettet i$r sud)? 105. SBoS fur Cin, and toeldjer, toeldje, IfleldjeG, serve also as ex clamations, to express surprise, amazement, or admiration ; e. g., toai fur ein ffllatm ! toeldjer 2)tonn ! roeldje ©djbnfcett ! tteld)e3 ©efdjrei ! what a man I what beauty ! what noise 1 etc. In this signification roeldjer may, like foldjer, drop its endings and place before the noun the indefinite article ; e. g., SfficldJ cin 3)?amt ift bai I what a man he is ! Thus tneldj stands some- times also immediately before an adjective, and takes the inflection of an adjective without the article (No. 24), and the adjective itself the in- flection of an adjective preceded by the definite article (No. 22), or lucid) may remain unchanged, and the adjective take the inflection of an ad- jective not preceded by the article ; e. g., n>eld)er fd)6ne Warn, or tneldj fd)bnet 2)tain ! what a beautiful man ! The Indefinite Pronouns. 10G. The indefinite pronouns are: Wan, one (French, on), they. StroaS, anything, something. 3cbcrmann, every one, every body. 9hd)tS, nothing.not anything. Semanb, some one, somebody. ©eftjl (or felber), self. 9ttemant>, no one, nobody. Sinanber, each other, one another. 107. man occurs only in the nominative, and requires the verb in the singular. It is expressed in English by one, they, or by the pas- sive : SKoit fast, one says, they say, or, it is said. When another case is required, the corresponding oblique case of einer is used ; e. g., bu tttlljt tincm me bein Seiben flaaen, you will never tell any one your troubles. 108. ^Hermann takes 8 in the genitive, the other cases remain unchanged. 3emermann§, of everybody D. 3«crmann, to everybody A. Scccrmatin, everybody 3emanD, somebody 3emani8 or 3emantc§ 3cmanS or 3emante»tt 3cman0 or 3emantcti 109. Not anybody, not— any one, are rendered by SlteiUttltD (nobody) ; e. g., I have not seen anybody, id) babe sRiesnonacit flefebm. Note.— When Germans intend to denote anything to be very in- definite, they place before (Einer, Semimb, or (Ensue the adverb irgentl ; before wo, where, it denotes somewliere (i. e., place not definitely known). 110. Sel&fl* or fel&er is invariable, and may be added f to any personal pronoun or noun ; e. g., id) fel&jl. bu felfijl, etc. ; ber ©o&n fcl&fl. bie £od)ter f elbft ; or felbft may be placed nearer the end of the sen- tence (see No. 59) ; e. g., biefe Seute braudjen ibr ©tlb (dbfi. these people need their money themselves. 111. The indefinite numeral adjectives are used as in- definite pronouns, when the noun which they qualify is only understood. They are : Masc. Fern. 3ebcr (3el»et>er, 3eg* 3c*« Iid)er)J or ein Sttvc, every, each 2Wct (»tt), all Me Reiner, no $eine Sitter, some one Sine 9Jt if the noun to which it refers is in the singular, and by ttieldjr, eiiuge, or Botton, if the noun is in the plural; e. g., SHJoffetl Sit fflein trtnten? will you drink wine? So, gekn @te mir tneldjcn, yes, give me some. 1 1 7. Some (persons), others (other ones), corresponds to the German (f inifje — 9lnBere ; e. g., Some Bay this, others say that, Sinige faficn biea, DlnBerc fagen baa. 118. Any, is an interrogative sentence, is not translated, unless equivalent to every, when it is rendered by jeBcr, e, tS ; e. g., Do you not find that most any (*. e., every) person has his faults, finben @ie nld)t, bag kinase jiDcr Staid) feine getyler §at? * (f tliiijcr is rather antiquated. 198 PARADIGMS : VERBS. THE VEEBS. Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb gtofcen, TO HAVE. Principal Parts : £ a 6 e n , 1 a 1 1 e , g elj afc t. nrerornvE. participle. Preterit. §abcn, to have Present. $aieiti)i having Perfect, ©efjabt l;abcn> to have had Past. ©etiatt, had £aie (bu) ( have (thou) INDICATIVE. i$ $aie, I have bu t)aft, thou hast cr fiat/ he has ttir fyabctt, we have )£**«• [you have ©te $a6en» ) fie Ija&eiti they have id) fyatte, I had bit f>attefi. thou hadst et fatter he had ttir fiattctt/ we had t>t,attet, ( youhad ©ie fatten, i J fie pattern they had IMPERATIVE. £abet, ftafcen ©ie, have (you) SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. IS) We> I have bit fyubeft. thou have er f>a&er he have ttir b>ben# we have St*?' [you have ©ie fytben, ) fie Jaben, they have i* !)attc, I had bu buttcft, thou had cr fydtte, he had roir l)dtten, we had j!!^.'f' [youhad ©te fatten, ) fie fatten, they had Perfect. id) %tfst (je$a6t, I have had bu b,flft ge$abt, thou hast had er bat gcljabt, he has had air 5a6en ge^aSt, we have had tjr^tge^t, U ouhavehad ©te tyaben gefrtbt, ) fie fyattn gefyibt, they have had id) twbc gcljabt, I have had bu twbqt gefyabt, thou have had er fyabe gctyabt, he have had roir t)iibcn gcl)iibt, we have had iir $abet gefabt, U ouhavellad ©ie iaben gebabt, J yOU nave iad fie $aien ge^abt, they have had PARADIGMS : VEKBS. 199 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. id) fatte gefabt, I bad had id) fdtte gefabt, I had had bu fafteft gefabt, thou hadst had , bu fdtteft gefabt, thou had had er twite gef abt,. he had had er fdtte gcl;,abt, he had had wit fatten gefabt, we had had wit fatten ge^abt, we had had ift fattet gefabt, I hadhad ifr f dttet gefabt, ! youhadhad ©ie fatten gefabt, > ©te fatten gefabt, ) fie fatten gefabt, they had had fie fatten ge^abt, they had had First Future. tf) wetbe faben, I shall have id) wetbe faben, I shall have bu witft faben, thou wilt have bu tncrSeft faben, thou wilt havs cr witb faben, he will have et tnerDe faben, he will have Wit wetben faben, we shall have Wtr wetben faben, we shall have ifj: wetbet faben, l youwmhave t£ wetbet faben, ) ^ have ©ie wetben faben, ) ' ©te wetben faben, ) fie wetben faben, they will have fie wetben faben, they will have Second Future. id) wetbe gef abt faben, I shall ^ id) wetbe gefabt faben, I shall , bu witft gefabt faben, thou wilt \ bu werbeft gefabt faben, thou wilt j et witb gefabt faben, he will / j| et wetbe gefabt faben, he will / "| wit wetben gefabt faben, we shall \ a wit wetben gefabt faben, we shall \ „, if t wetbet gefabt faben, ) ^ ( J if t wetbet gef abt faben, ( ^1 | ©ie wetben gefabt faben, J I ©ie wetben gef abt faben, t J fie wetben gef abt faben, they will ' fie wetben gef abt faben, they will ' First Conditional. id) Wiitbe faben or icf f iitte, I should have bu Wfitbeft faben or bu fdtteft, thou wouldst have et Wiitbe faben or et fatte, he would have Wit witrben faben or wit fatten, we should have if r wiitbet faben ) j ift f dttet, i ©ie wiitben faben \ or \ ©ie fatten, \ you would have fie wiitben faben or fie fatten, they would have Second Conditional. id) Wiitbe gef abt faben or id) fatte gefabt, I should have had bu Wiitb'efi gefabt faben or bu fdtteft gefab> thou wouldst have had et wiitbe gefabt faben or et fdtte gefabt, he would have had Wtr wiitben gefabt faben or wir fatten gefabt, we should have had ift wiitbet gef abt faben > i ift f dttet gef abt, > , , , , . ©ie wiitben gefabt faben \ or ] ©ie fatten gefabt, \ ? on would have had fie wiitben gefabt faben or fie fatten gefabt, they would have had 200 PARADIGMS : VERBS. Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb ©fin, TO BE. Principal Parts : ir rcaren, we were id) fei, I be bu fcicfi, thou be u fei/ he be »ir feten, we be % X ^' [you be ©ie feten, ) fie fcien, they be Imperfect. id) toiire, I were bu tbareft, thou wert er Ware, he were wit rearen, we were il)r want, ) ©ie waren, f you were you were (ie Wttten, they were u)r waret, ) .©ie waren, J fie tt&ren, they were Perfect. ii> 6in Betoeftn, 1 have been bu bi|l gewefen, thou hast been er ift gewefen, he has been Kir (tub gewefen, we have been t> fell) gewefen, I yoll have ^en ©te finb gewefen, ) fie finb gewefen, they have been id) fei gewefen, I have been bn feieft gewefen, thou have been er fei gewefen, he have been , Wir feten gewefeit, we have been i$rfeiet gewefen, ) you have been ©te feten gewefen, ) fie feien gewefen, they have been PARADIGMS : VERBS. 201 INDICATIVE. id) war gewefen, I had been bu warft gewefen, thou hadst been er mar gewefen, he had been Wir waren gewefen, we had been ir.rwaret gewefen, i had been en, ! ©ie waren gemefen, fie waren gewefen, they had been SUBJUNCTIVE. Pluperfect. i<$ ware gewefen, I had been bu Wdreft gewefen, thou hadst been er moire gewefen, he had been Wie wdren gewefen, we had been iljr wdret gewefen, / , , , werbet gewefen fein, ? youwH1 \j i^r werbet gewefen fein, ) youwill \ § ©te werben gewefen fetn, ) 1 "^ ©te werben gewefen fetn, ) I "" fie werben gewefen fein, you will ' fie werben gewefen fein, they will ' i$ wiirbe fein bu wflrbeft fein er wiirbe fein wir wiirbe fein t$r wiirbet fein i ©ie wiirben fein ! fie wiirben fein id) wiirbe fletnefen fein bu wiirbeft gewefen fein er wiirbe gewefen fein Wir wiirben gewefen fetn ifjr wiirbet gewefen fein, ) ©ie wiirben gewefen fein, > fie wiirben gewefen fein First Conditional. or id) Ware, I should be or bu Wdreft, thou wouldst be or er Ware, he would be or wir waren, we should be or i * rtttat ' I you would be ©ie wdren, ) or fte waren, they would be Second Conditional. or id) ware gewefen, I should have been or bu wdreft gewefen, thou wouldst have been or er ware gewefen, he would have been or wir wdren gewefen, we should have been or i^r waret gemefen, > you wouM have been ©te waren gewefen, ) or fie Wdren gewefen, they would have been 202 PARADIGMS : VERBS. Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb SBerben, TO BECOME, TO GROW (TO BE). Principal Parts : SBerfcen, rourbe, geworben (or w o r b e it). INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Present. SBerbem to become, to grow Present. SBerbenB, becoming (being) (to be) Perfect, ©eworben (wotben) fcittr to Past. ®cmorbcn (worbcn),become have become (been) (been) SBeibe. become, be (thou) INDICATIVE. t$ Wttbti I become bu wirft, thou becomest er wirb, he becomes loir werbett, we become t>werbet, ) youbecome ©te werbciti ) fie tterbctti they become id) wurbe, I became bu Wurbeft, thou becamest ei Burbc, he became Kir wurben, we became j! rWurb "' I you became ©ie rourben, ) fie wurbeit, they became IMPERATIVE. SEBerbet or rocrben ©ie, become, be (you) SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. ii) werbe, I (may) become bu tvetbeftf thou become er werbt. he become ttir werben, we become £»«W. l become ©te werbem ) fie werbetli they become Imperfect. id) wiirbe, (if) I became bu Wiirbefi, thou became er Wiirbe, he became Wir Wittben, we became *■*** [you became ©te wurben, ) fie wurben, they became I Jtave become or grown id) Mn flctnorten {or worben) bu Mfl geworben er ifl geworben wir finb geworben ifrr feib geworben ) ©ie finb geworben 1 . fie finb geworben I may hone become or grown i# fei geworben (or worben) bu fetefi geworben er fei geworben Wir feien geworben i$r feiet geworben ) ©ie feicn geworben ) fie -feien cewrrben PARADIGMS : VHKBS, 203 INDICATIVE. Pluperfect. SUBJUNCTIVE. I had become or grown idj mar gctnorben (or worben) bu warft geworben cr war geworben wir waren geworben i§r waret geworben ) ©ie warm geworben ) fie waren geworben (if) I had become or grown id) ware geworben (or worben) bu wd'refi geworben er ware geworben wir wdren geworben tl)r wdret geworben ) ©ie wdren geworben ) fie wdren geworben First Future. I shall become id; werbe toerten bu wirft werben er wtrb werben Wir werben werben i§r werbet werben ) ©ie werben werben ) (ie werben werben I shall become id) werbe werben bu werbefi werben er werbe werben wir werben werben i$r werbet werben ©te Werben werben ) fie werben werben Second Future. I shall home become (grown or been) id) werbe getnorben fein fcu wirft geworben fein er wirb geworben fein ttir werben geworben fein fl)r werbet geworben fein J ©ie werben geworben fein » fie werben geworben fein First Conditional. I should become (grow or be) id) wflrbe werben bu wiirbefi werben er wftrbe werben Wir witrben werben t$r wiirbet werben ) ©ie wiirben werben f fie wurben werben I shall have become (grown or been) id) werbe geworben fein bu werbefi geworben fein er werbe geworben fein wir werben geworben fein t$r werbet geworben fein ) ©ie werben geworben fein ) fie werben geworben fein Second Conditional. I should home become (grown or been) id) wvirbe geworben fein bu Wftrbefi geworben fein er Witrbe geworben fein Wir wurben geworben fein t$r wiirbet gewortien fein ) ©ie wurben geworben fein ) fie wurben geworben fein 204 THE REGULAR VERBS. The Eegular Verbs. 119. German verbs end in the present infinitive in en. By removing this ending we find the root ; e. g. lofeetl, to praise.* Exceptions.— The verb fcitt, to be, tfyun, to do, and all verbs whose roots end in el, er, add only n in the in- finitive. Note. — In German the following verbs are followed by the infinitive without the preposition ju : 1. The auxiliaries of mode (See No. 135) ; 2. also ftnien,to find; fiiljleil, to feel; fejjetl, to see ; preit, to hear ; Mribcn, to remain ; (jcifjen, to bid (not to call) ; {jelftm to help; Ichren, to teach ; lernen, to learn ; and modjcn, to make. Ex. — (1.) I attempted to hear, 3$ »erfu$te jit ^bren. (2.) I see him write, 3d) fetye ibn fifyreilen. The Active Voice. ISO. The Present Participle is formed by adding tnb to the root ; e. g., bcmfenfc, thanking ; and the Past Participle by prefixing ($e and affixing t \ e. g., geterat, learned, f Exceptions. — The prefix ge is not used in the participle past, with the following verbs: 1. All those of foreign origin ending in, i (e)rett; e. g., mar* fd)iten, to march; marfdHrt (not gemarfdjirt), marched. 2. Such as have the unaccented prefix be, gc, cnr, cnty, et, i>et and ger ;J e. g., fcefudjm, to visit, fcefuit (not gebejiid)t) visited. 181. The Imperative^ which has only one person for each number, is formed in the singular by adding e ; e. g., * Almost every infinitive may in German be used as a neuter noun of the first declension ; e. g., dancing is fatiguing, iaS £an;en ift trmiibenb. f Both participles may be used as adjectives ; e. g-, in IciBcnoc 3Rann, the suffering man ; hai gelicbtc ftitib. } Comp. 137— 150. § Since a direct request, command, exhortation, advice, warning or prohibition can be addressed only to the person spoken to there can be only one poison in the imperative. When referring to a third person THE REGULAR VERBS. 205 ^ole, fetch (thou) ; and in the plural by adding et : fudjet, seek (ye), or en when the verb is followed by the pron. fr (teto 6t, bu Ijafl geloot, bu |aBeft geloot, ec $at gelobt. er Ija&c geloot, »ic tyaben geloot, wic fytoen geloot, t&r fytot geloot, ) ©ie ^ttben geloot, J ifyr fyioet gelobt, ) ©ie liaoen geloot, j frefytoen geloot. fie faben gelobt. PARADIGMS : VERBS. 207 INDICATIVE. I had praised id? Ijatte getobt bu ^attefl getobt er Ijatte gelobt mir fatten gelobt iljr ^attet gelobt ) ©it fatten gelobt i fie tjattcrt gclofct Pluperfect. SUBJUNCTIVE. (if) I had praised id; fjiitte gctobt bu tjdtteft gclobt er pite gelobt rotr fatten gelobt tf)i fmttet gelobt } ©ie fatten gelobt ) fie fatten gelobt I shall praise id) toerfie toben bu roirft loben er roirb loben roir roerben toben ibr roerbet loben ©ie roerben toben fte roerben toben First Futwre. (if) I shall praise idj roerbe loben bu tnerteft toben et toerOc loben roir roerben loben if)t toerbet toben , ©ie roerben toben ! fie roerben toben Second Future. I shall have praised (if) I shall have praised id) roerbe gelobt r)aben bu roirft gelobt $aben er roirb gelobt paben roir roerben gelobt Ijaben itjr roerbet gelobt b,aben ) ©ie roerben gelobt rjaben ) fie roerben gelobt fjaben id) rocrbe gelobt b,aben bu roerbeft gelobt tjaben er roerbe gelobt $abm roir roerben getobt $aben ib,r roerbet gelobt J,aben ) ©ie roerben gelobt b.aben ) fie roerben gelobt fjaten First Conditional. I should praise idj roiirbe toben bu rofirbefi loben er roiirbe loben roir rourben loben tyr roiirbet loben ) ©ie rourben loben ) fie rourben toben Second Conditional I would or should have praised id) roiirbe gelobt fjattv. bu roiirbefl gelobt r)abcn er roiirbe gelobt r)aben roir rourben gelobt ljaben ib,r roiirbet gelobt b>ben ) ©ie rourben gelobt $aben J fte'roitrben getobt tyiien 208 THE BEGULAR VEEBS. 124. For the sake of euphony regular verbs, whose roots end in b, t, in, Qtt, fern, ffn, djw, or tfym, as re&ert, Men, orfcncn, fcgnen, roi&men, red&nen, bffttcn, atfcmen, generally retain e before the termination, in every mood, tense and person, if the ending does not begin with e. EXAMPLE. SWefccn, to talk. Present. Imperfect. id) wbe, I talk id) rebete, I talked bu rebeft, thou talkest kit reicteft, thou talkedst cr rebet, he talks cr rebete, he talked ttrir reben, we talk ttrir. rebeten, we talked Jrrefcet, } talk itjr rebetet, I talked @te reben, ) @te rebeten, ) fie reben, they talk fie rebeten, they talked Perfect. Pluperfect. idi %abt gerebet, I have talked id) tjatte gerebet, etc. 125. Verbs whose last radical letter is a sibilant (f, ff, f$, or g) ; e. g., rafen, to rage ; ^affen, to hate ; »imf4>en, to wish ; fejjen, to put, place, also generally retain the c of the termination; e. g., id) »unfd)e, bu ttntnfdjefl; id) toaffe, bu tiaffeft, &c. The Passive Voice.* 1 26. The various modes, tenses, etc., of verbs are formed, for the passive voice, from the corresponding tenses of the aux- iliary verb twcr&ett and the past participle of the verb to be con- jugated ; e. g., {jelteUt WCtfcen, to be loved. Note. — The past participle of the auxiliary tocrfcctl, to he, to become, is getoorben, but when used to form the passive voice of verbs the prefix ge is omitted ; e. g., 34 Mil getabeft toorten, I have been blamed. * SBerben, construed with the participle past of an active verb, can denote only a passive, hence the passive voice can in German never be confounded with the past tenses of a neuter verb, as is apt to be the case in English ; e. g., Sic tfl gcgangen, and, cr lt)irb gestagen, she is gone and he is beaten, present two distinct ideas to the mind. The use of fetlti as in fie ifl gegangen, makes it clear that the verb is in the past tense of the active voice, while the use of roctbcn, as in cr toirD gestagen, informs us that the verb is used in the passive voice. paradigms: verbs. 209 PASSIVE "VOICE. INFINITIVE. Present. ©eto&t toerSen, to be praised Perfect. (Selobt worben fciit/ to have been praised PARTICIPLE. Present. $U hitriD, to be praised Past. ©elctt, praised IMPERATIVE. ar. SBerbc gelobt, be (thou) praised Plural. SBerbet or werben ©ie geloit, be (you) praised INDICATIVE. I am praised id) toerDe gclobt bu wtrft griuBt er wirb gelobt wir werben gelofit tyr werbet geiobt Sie werben geloii .' fie werben geloit Present. STJBJTJNCTIVE. I may be praised id) werbe getoii bu merScfi geloit er tterfie gclobt wir werben geloit i$r roerbet gelolit ) ©ic werben geloBt ) fie werben gelo&t I was praised id; UJurbc gdott bit rourbefi gelo&t er rourbe geloot- wir wurben gcloit ifyr wurbet geloit ) ©ie wurben gelobt ! fie wurben geloit (if) I were praised id) trjutBe geloit bu wiirbcfl geloot er ttiirbe gelobt wir wurben gelobt i§r wurbet gelobt { ©ie wurben geiobt f fie wurben gelobt I have been praised id) bin nelobt worScn bu ii(l gelobt worben er ifi geloCt worben Wir finb gelobt worben tyr feib gelobt worben ) ©ie finb gelobt worben ) fie finb gelobt worben I may have been praised id) fei gelobt worben bu feiefl gelobt worben er fei geIo6t worben Wir feien gelobt worben iljr feiet gelobt Worben ) ©ie feien gelobt worben ) (ic feien geiobt worben 210 PARADIGMS I VEBBB. ' INDICATIVE. I had been praised id) loor gelobt ttorben bu toarft gelobt ttorben cr roar gelobt ttorben ttir waren gelobt ttorben ibr ttaret geloot ttorben ©ie warm gelobt ttorben fie ttaren gelobt ttorben SUBJUNCTIVE. (if) I had been praised id) toitre geloot ttorben bu ttdrefl geloot ttorben cr ware geloot ttorben ttir waren geloot ttorben ifyr ttaret gelobt ttorben ) Sic ttaren geloot ttorben ) fie ttaren geloot ttorben I shall be praised id) tnertac geloot totrben bu ttirft geloot werben er tttrb geloot werben ttir tterben geloot roerben ibj toerbet gelobt tterben ) ©ie tterben gelobt tterben ( fie tterben geloot tterben First Futwre. (if) I shall be praised id) werbe geloot roerben bu toerbefl gelobt tterben er toerbe gelobt tterben ttir tterben geloot tterben ib> toerbet gelobt roerben ©ie tterben gelobt tterben fie tterben gelobt tterben Second I shall have been praised icr; tserbe gelobt taorben fein bu ttirft gelobt ttorben fein er tttrb gelobt ttorben fein wtr tterben gelobt ttorben fein ir)r roerbet gelobt ttorben fein I ©ie tterben gelobt ttorben fein ) fie tterben gelobt ttorben fein Future. (if) I shall have been praised id) tterbe gelobt ttorben fein bu toertcfi gelobt ttorben fein er intrte gelobt ttorben fein ttir tterben gelobt worben fein ib> toerbet gelobt ttorben fein ) ©ie roerben gelobt ttorben fein ) fie tterben gelobt ttorben fein First Conditional. I should or would be praised id) roiirtc gelobt tocrben bu roiirbefl gelobt tterben er wiirbe gelobt tterben ttir wurben gelobt tterben il)r tturbet gelobt werben ) ©ie ttiirben gelobt tterben ) fie ttiirben gelobt werben Second Conditional I should or would have been praised id) wiirbe gelobt roorben fein bu wiirbefi gelobt worben fein er Wiirbe gelobt worben fein Wir wurben gelobt ttorben fein ibr tturbet gelobt ttorben fein ) ©ie ttiirben gelobt worben fein 5 fie wurben gelobt worben fein IKKEGULAB VERBS. 211 Irregular or Ancient Verbs. 1 27. There are in German nearly two hundred irregular verbs. They deviate from the regular verb particularly in the Imperfect Indicative and in the Past Participle. 128. 1. In the Imperfect Indicative, irregular verbs change their radical vowel, and do not admit of a tennination ; e. g., to sing, fingen, I sang, id) fang. Note. — The Imperfect Subjunctive is formed regularly, i. e., by add- ing & and modifying the radical vowel when it is a, o, or u ; e. g., geSen, (to give); Indicative, id) gafc; Subjunctive, id) giiSe. 2. In the Past Participle they affix en instead of t; e. g., Bocten (to bake): gefeaden, and frequently change their radical vowel also ; e. g., fcerften (to burst) : gefcorften. 129. Exceptions. — The following verbs change their radical vowel, but take also the ending of the regular verb 1. In the imperfect : e. g., fcrennen, Imperf. fcronnte (not Brcmnt). 2. In the past participle : e. g., rennen, gerannt (not ge* raraten). SBrenttcn, to burn ttemten, to name fcrtngen, to bring rcnncn, to run benfm, to think fenicn, to send fennen, to know (French, con- toenten, to turn naitre) tuipn, to know (Fr., savoir) Note. — SBtffcn inserts e in the pretent singular : id) roetjjj bu wcipt, er wctij, roir wiffen, tyr Wiffet (Sie »i(fm), fie ubiffen. 1 30. Some of the irregular verbs (see the list pp. 214 — 218) also modify or change their radical vowel 1. In the second and third person singular of the Present ; e. g., iacfen, to bake : bu fcacfft, cr ladt ; and 2. In the Imperative singular ; e. g., ge6en (to give) : giefc. 212 PARADIGMS : VERBS. Conjugation of an Irregular or Ancient Verb ®c6en, TO GIVE. Principal Parts : ©efcen, Qii, gege&etu INFINITIVE. FAETICIELE. Present. ©eiem to give Present. ®eicn8> giving Perfect. Oegeien $aien» to have given Past. ©egeScn. given IMPERATIVE. Singular. ®tei> give (thou) Plural. ®eiet (geit or geien give (you) INDICATIVE. Present. SUBJUNCTIVE. I give, I am giving, I do give (if) I give, &c. W> geie id) geie bu gtebft bu gefiefl er gie&t er gcOc roir geien wir geien ifyr geitt ) ©ie geien ) i$r geiet ) ©ie geien ) fie geien Imperfect. fie geien I gave, I was giving, I did give (if) I gave, &c. ii) gai id) giiie bu gaifl bu gdiefl cr gai er gdie niii gaien wir gdien tljr gaiet ) ©ie gaien ) tyr gdiet > ©ie gdien ) fie gaien Perfect. fie gdien I have given (if) I have given id) f)ttit gegeien id) iaic gegeien bu fyift gegeien bu ijttBejl gegeien er tjat gegeien er f)o6c gegeien roir fyaien gegeien wir $aien gegeien i$r Ijait gegeien ) ©ie $aien- gegeien > iir tyaiet gegeien } ©ie Ijaien gegeien ) fie iaien gegeien fie iaien gegeien PASADIGMS : VERBS. 213 DnHCATIVB. I had given id) Ijatte gcgeBen bu batteft gegeben er batte gcgebcn loir fatten gcgetett ib,r battel gegeben j ©ie fatten gegeben 1 fie fatten gegcten I shall give ien re wirb geben wit werben geben if)r werbet geben ©ie werben geben fie werben geben SUBJUNCTIVE. Pluperfect. (if) I had given id) Ijfitte gegeben bu bitteft gegeben er batte gegeben wir fatten gege&en ibr pttet gegeben 1 ©ie batten gegeben 1 fte fatten gegeben First Future. (if) I shall give id) werbe geben bu tnerbcfi geben erectile geben Wir werben geben ib> werbet geben ) ©ie werben geben J fte werben geben Second Future. I shall have given id) toertte gegeben Ijaben bu wirft gegeben f)aben er wirb gegeben baben Wir werben gegeben b>ben ibr werbet gegeben baben ) ©ie werben gegeben fjaben J fie werben gegeben baben (if) I shall have given id) werbe gegeben Ijaben bu werbefi gegeben baben er werbe gegeben baben wir werben gegeben baben ibjc werbet gegeben §aben ) ©ie werben gegeben baben ) fie werben gegeben baben First Conditional. I should give id) wiirbe geben bu wurbeft geben er wiirbe geben wir wurben geben \%x wiirbet geben ) ©ie wurben geben 1 fie wiirben geben Second Conditional. I should have given id) wiirbe gegeben baben bu Witrbefl gegeben baben er wiirbe gegeben f)aben Wir wurben gegeben fjaben ibr wiirbet gegeben (jaben £ ©ie wurben gegeben b>ben ) fie wurben gegeben baben 214 LIST OF IBBEGULAB VEBB8. An Alphabetical List of all the Irregular Verbs. InfinUim. Imperfect. Past Part. Page SBatfen, to bake bud (batfte) gebaden 116 * s bebiirfen, to need, like bftrftn beburfte beburft — Pres. id) bebarf befeb,Ien, to order, to command befa|l . befoblen 119 leflcijjen (ft$), to apply one's self beflig befUffen 123 bcgtnnen, to begin begamt begonnen 129 betjjen, to bite bi§ jebifFen 122 betlemmen, to press beflomm beflommen 125 bergen, to hide, to conceal barg geboigen 119 Setflen, to burst, to crack barft geborfien 119 befinnen, to meditate befann befonnen 129 befifcen, to possess befap tefeffen — bettfigen, to cheat, to deceive betrog betrogen 127 beroegertr to induce bemog beroogen 125 biegcrt, to bend bos gebogen 126 6ieten, to offer but geboten 126 birtbcn, to bind, to tie banb gcbunben 128 bitten, to heg, to request bat gebeten 129 blafcn, to blow bliea geblafen 116 bleibcrt, to stay, to remain biieb geblieben 123 bleidjen, to bleach im gcblidjcn 123 braten, to roast briet gcbraten 117 trcdjen, to break brad) gebrodjen 119 * brennen, to burn brannte gebrannt 120 * bringen, to bring bradjte gcbradjt 120 * £enfen.i to think bad)tc gebadjt 120 bingen, to hire buns gebungen 129 btefdjen, to thrash croft* gebrefifjen 119 bringen, to press, to urge brang gebrnngen 129 (gmvfangen, to receive eoipftits em)>fangeit — empftnben, to feel empfanb entpfimben 129 cmpfcfjlcn, to recommend emt>fa$l empfo^Ien 119 emrinnen, to escape entrann entronnen 129 erfcleidjen, to turn pale erblidj erblidjen 123 trfuren, to choose erfot erforen 127 1 These figures indicate the page on which each of the irregular verbs are given in their respective classes. 8 The verbs marked * are partly irregular. LIST OF IBEEGDLAB VEEBS. 215 Infinitive. Imperfect. Past Part. Page erIBfdjen, to become extinct eriofefc erfofSjen 127 erfdjaUcn, to resound «fa>ll erfa>Uen 125 ctfdjrctfcn, to become frightened erfdjracf etfdjrodeit 119 etwagen, to consider eracg etwogen 126 effen, to eat a§ flegeffen 119 gabjren, to drive Mr gefa^ren 116 fallen, to fall pel gefatten 117 fangen, to catch Peng gefangen 117 fedjten, to fight f«*t gefoctjten 125 finben, to find fanb gefunben 129 flec^ten, to twist ftodjt geftod)tcn 125 piegen, to fly flog gepogen 126 fltebcn, to flee ■m geftotjen 126 fliefjen, to flow M gepoffen 126 fragen, to ask fmg (fragte) gefragt — freffen, to eat (to devour) frag gefteffen 119 frteren, to freeze "~fw gefwren 126 ©afjren, to ferment flo$r gegoljren 127 geidren, to bring forth gefcar getoren 119 gefcen, to give fltt* gegeien 119 gefcieten, to order, to command geiot getioten — gebeityen, to thrive gebie$ gebiefsen 123 gefatten, to please gePeX gefatten — ge$en, to go fling flegangen 117 gctingcn, to succeed getang gelungen 129 gelten, to be worth gaU gegolten 119 gene fen. to recover genajj gene fen 119 geniegen, to enjoy flenop genoffen 126 gcratEjcn, to fall into gerictl) gerat^en — gefdje^en, to happen flePW gefd)et)en 119 gewinnen, to win, to gain genmnn geteonnen 129 gtejjen, to pour flog gegoffen 126 gleidjen, to resemble glia) geglic&en 123 gletten, to glide, slide fllitt geglttten 123 glimmen, to burn faintly glomm " geglommen 126 gtttien, to dig gruB gegraBen 116 greifen, to gripe, to grasp Stiff flegtiffen 123 gotten, to hold liett •gefatten 117 gangen, to hang $ieng gefangen 117 tiaueti, to hew $te6 getjauen 117 ieben, to lift $oJ gefjofien 125 feigen, to be called, to bid m gefjeijjen 123 b>lfen, to help W ge^olfen 119 216 LIST 07 IRREGULAR VERBS. Infinitive. Imperfect. Past Part. Page. * fflemten, to know fannte gefannt 120 Hieben, to cleave Hoi geflootn — fltmmen, to climb Ilomm geflommen 126 fltngcn, to tingle, to sound Hang geflungen 129 fnetfen, to pinch fnif gefniffen 123 freifcrjcn, to scream w» 8efrtfd)m — fommen, to come {am flcfcmmen 120 Iriedjen, to crawl, to creep frod) gcfrod)en 126 fiabert, to load tub gelabcn 116 Iaffeiti to let, to leave Keg gelaflen 117 laufen, to run lief getaufcn 117 Ictben, to suffer Kit gelttten 123 letyen, to lend Hit) gelieljen 123 Icfeitr to read til gelefen 119 liegcn, to lie lag gelegen 130 liigen, to lie log gelogen 127 JKatllem — gemarjten — meibert, to shun, to avoid mteb gemieben 123 melrert, to milk molf geraolfeit 125 meffen, to measure ma(i gemeffen 119 mif fatten, to displease mijjfiel mipfattcn — 91et)men, to take nafyn genommcn 119 * nennen, to call nannte gerannt 120 $feifen, to whistle m gepflffen 123 Pftegen, to entertain, nurse W'S gepflogen ■ 125 prcifen, to praise, to extol pried gepriefen 123 Queflen, to spring forth quott gequoHcn 125 Madjen, tod) (radjte) gerodjen (geradjt) 127 ratten, to advise itety geratfjen 117 reibettf to rub rie$ gerieben 123 tct§en, to rend, to tear rig flertfTen 123 teitcn, to ride (on horseback) riu geritten 123 *rermen, to run, to race rannte gerannt 120 tiedjen, to smell rod) gercd)en 120 ringcn, to wrestle, to wring rang gerungen 129 tirmcn, to leak, to flow rann geronnen 129 rufen. to call rief gerufen 117 ©aufen, to drink (of animals) foff gefoffen 127 faugen, to suck f»8 gefogm 127 f(i)affen, to create f4«f gefdjaffen 116 fdjeibert, to separate fd)ieb gefd)ieben 123 frfjeinen, to seem, to shine fd)ien gefd)ienen 123 fd)elten, to scold, to chide fd)alt gefdjolten 120 LIST OF IBBJEGDLAB VERBS. 217 Infinitive. Imperfect. Post Part. fdjecrm, to shear fdjor gcfdjorm f$ieben, to shove, to push f$oo gefdjoben fdiicpen, to shoot mi geftyolfen f<§inben, to flay — gefdjunben fdjlafen, to sleep WHtf gefd)Iafen fdjlagen, to beat, to strike Wlug gtfdjlagen fdjlddjm, to sneak, to steal into pit* gtfd)lid)cn jc&leifen, to sharpen, to grind iw gefdjliffeit fc&Ieijien, to slice f#«6 gefd)tifTen fdjliejien, to lock, to close f« gefdjloiTett f^Ungcn, to wind, to twist fdjlang gefdjlungen fi$met|jen, to fling fdjmifj 8cf#mi(fen f^meljm, to melt, to smelt fdjmois gcfdjmoljcit fdjnaukn, to breathe, to snort fdjnoti gcfdjttofcn fcfyneibcn, to cut jtynttt gefdjntiten fd)reiben, to write fd)ric6 gefdjriebca fi$mm, to cry, to scream fade gefdjriten fdjreiten, to stride, to step fd)titt gefdjritttn fdjw&tcn, to fester fdjwor gefdjroorra fdjwngen, to be silent grates gefdjwiegm f^tteOen, to swell fdjttoU gtfd)t»ot[en fdjwimmen, to swim fdjttminm gefd)»ommen fdjroinben, to vanish fdjwanb sef^wunben fd)tt>ingcn, to swing, to brandish fdiwang gefdjwimgm fd)»oren, to swear fd)»or (fanwr) gefdjworm fefien, to see fafr gefe^en * fcnben, to send fanbte gefanbt itebeit, to boil fott gefoiten (ingcn, to sing fang gefungen finfen, to sink fanf riefunFen ftmwn, to meditate farot geronntn fifcen, to sit f«6 gerefm fpeietti to spit fine geftteen fpleipen, to split fi)K§ sefBltfTen fpirmen, to spin ftttitn geftonnen frredjcn, to speak fiwt<$ geforodjen fptiegen, to sprout fprog gefproffeii feringen, to spring forang gefprungtn (rcdjen, to sting M geflod)en fteden, to stick ftoff geflocfcn |te$en, to stand flat* geftanbtn |(e6lert, to steal Ik* ge(lo^Ien Petgeit, to mount fneg geftiegen 125 120 126 129 117 116 123 123 123 126 129 123 125 127 123 123 123 123 127 123 125 129 129 129 127 119 120 126 129 129 129 130 123 123 129 120 126 129 120 120 110 120 123 218 LIST OP IRBEGULAB VEBB8. Infinitive. Imperfect. Past Part. Pag:. flerben, to die par* geftorben 120 jliebcn, to fly off flob gefioben 126 (Men, to stink flanf gejhmfcrt 129 jlojjen, to push. m geftopcn 117 flreitfycn, to rub Uri* geflrtdjm 123 flreitcii, to quarrel fintt geflrittm 123 Zfyuut to do tljat getfian 119 tragen, to carry, to wear trug gerragen 110 ireffen, to hit traf getroffen 120 ttctben, to drive trie* getrieben 123 totett, to tread rrat gctretcn 119 rrtefen, to drop toff — 123 trinfen, to drink iranf getrunfcn 129 triujen, to deceive (ttog) (getrogen) 127 SBcrbergertj to hide, conceal serbarg scrborgen — sertieteitr to forbid »erbot sctbotcn 126 setberben, to spoil, to ruin »erbarb setborbcn 120 serbrtefiett, to vex serbreg ijerbroffert 126 sergepn, to forget sergafj sergeffcn 119 serlierm, to lose sserlor wloren 126 * »ctm5gett, Pres. ify sermttj idj oermoc^te »£rraod)t — serftfywinben, to disappear serfdjwanb serfdjnwnbm — serrouren, to entangle DerWorr serroorrm 126 fcerjetben, to pardon »er}icb »etjicben — SBadtfen, to grow mu^a gewaiijen 116 ttcigen, to weigh. wog getvogen 127 ttafdjen, to wash rouftf) ' Qc»afd)cn 116 roeben, to weave roob gtwoben 125 mifyn, to yield ttlcb. gcwiiijcrt 123 roctfen, to show toitd gewiefen 123 * trenben, to turn ttaitbte gcwanbt 120 toerben, to sue ttarb geworben 120 Wcrfcn, to throw warf gcworfen 120 ttiegett, to weigh wog geroogat 126 tsinben, to wind roanb gewunben 129 * ttjiffen, to know »u|te gewujjt 120 SJetfjen, to accuse M gesicben 123 126 129 Veljen, to draw, to pull m gejogen jj»lngen> to force, to compel jttang jtjtBungm AUXILIARIES OF MODE. 219 Auxiliary Verbs of Mode, 131. There are in German, besides the three auxiliary verbs of tense, fyafcen, feitt, and tuerien, seven other verbs, called the auxiliary verbs of mode, because they convey no full idea in themselves, but give certain modifications to other verbs (than required to be in the infinitive). They are : fciirfeit Ictffett tnufjctt Ibnnen mbgen foUen and locum 133. &i>tincn, bficfett, and tndgett express possibility or ability ; ntuffen, follett, and toollctt imply necessity; but Iaffctt expresses both possibility and necessity, referring to the subject of the sentence, and is accordingly, in the form of a permission or of a command; e. g., @r liefj fccn ®icb Imifcn, he allowed the thief to escape ; cr Ue# feen SCliinn Junridjtcn, he had the man executed, i. e., he ordered the man to be put to death. Compound Tenses, 133. The compound tenses of the auxiliaries of mode are formed like those of lofcen (see No. 123). The Conditionals. 134. The auxiliaries of mode generally use for the first conditional, the Imperfect, and for the second condi- tional, the Pluperfect Subjunctive, as : id) fonntc, Icq ^otte gefonnt, in place of id) wiirSe I&nnen, id) fourbe gefonnt tyaoen. 1 35. The auxiliaries of mode, used in conjunction with the infinitive of another verb, must be in the infinitive peesent, instead of in the past participle ; e. g., gr $fitte ti nidjt l)aben fsmnen (instead of gefonnt), he could not have had it. 136. When an auxiliary of mode is to be negated, put nicfjt before the Infinitive (which stands last in the clause) ; e. g., gr fonn ten 33ricf nityt fcfereioen, he cannot write the letter. Notk. — The auxiliary verbs of mode are not susceptible of the im- perative. 220 PARADIGMS : VERBS. Conjugation of the Auxiliary Ver,b fonncn, TO BE ABLE. Principal Parts : $iSnnen, fonnte, gelonnt. nSTTNITTVE. Present. .Kbnncn, to be able Perfect, ©efonnt fjabcn, to have been able PAKTICIPLB. Present, fionncno, being able (seldom used) Past. ©cfonnt, been able nroiCATivE. I can (or am able) id) fann bu fannjl ct fann reir fonncn if)r fiSnnet or fonnt ) ©ie fbnnen ) fte fiinncn Present. SUBJUNCTIVE. I may be able id) fiinne tin fiinnefi ct fiinne niir fiinncn ifjr fiinnct ) ©ie fonncn ) fie fonncn I was able (or I could) id) fonnte bu fonnteft ei fonnte nrir fomtten ifjr fomrtet j. ©ie fomtten > fie fonnten I might be able id) fonnte bit fonnteft er fonnte ttir fiinnten ihr fonntet ) ©ie fomtten J fie fiinnten COMPOUND TENSES. Perfect. id) $aie gcfonnt> I have been able Pluperfect. id) $atte gefonnt» I had been able First Future. id) jocrbe fonncn- 1 shall be able First Conditional. id) wfirbe fonncn, I should be able Second Future. id) tveifce gefonnt fjaoem I shall have been able Second Conditional, id) Wicbe gefonnt babcn> I should have been able PARADIGMS.— -VERBS. 221 The Auxiliary Verb Wi%tn, MAY, TO DESIBE, TO LIKE A THING, ETC. INFINITIVE. Present. 3R6gett, to like. Perfect, ©emodjt fyiktt, to have liked PARTICIPLES. Present. SJibgetttl, liking, (seldom used). Past. ©emodjt, liked. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. I may, I like. I may like. 3$ mag, 3d) mijge, btt magfi, bu mogeft, er mag, er moge. wir mogeiti wir mogen, tyr mbget or mBgt, 1 ©te mijgen, j i^ir mb'get, ) ©ie mogen, j fie miigen. r ie mogen. Imperfect. I liked. I might like. 3$ modjte, 3d) modjte, bu modjteft. bu modjteft, er mod)te, er modjte, wir modjien, wir mbdjten, i§r modjtet, ) ©ie modjten, ) i^r mod)tet, ) ©ie mi>d)ttn, j fie molten. (Ie modjten. Compound Tenses. Perfect. 3d) $aoe gemod)t, I have desired. Pluperfect. 3d) ^otte gcmodjt, I had desired. 1«< Future. 3d) rocrbe mogeit, I shall desire. ls£ Conditional. 3d) witrbe mogen, 1 should desire. 2nd Future. 3d) werbe gemod)t §aoen, I shall have desired. 2nd! Conditional. 3d) Witrbe gcmorftt Ijctfcen, I should have desired. 222 PARADIGMS. VEBB3. Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb TO BE OBLIGED, ETC. INFINITIVE. Present 3Ruffcn, to be obliged. Perfect, ©emujjt Ijafcen, to have been obliged. PABTICIPLBS. Present. ■KufFetttl, being obliged, (seldom used). Past. ©emufst, being obliged. Ctt, MUST, INDICATIVE. I am obliged (must). 34 mufj, bu mujit, er mu|j, »ir muffen, i§r muffet or miijjt, ; ©ie mitfTen, ' fte mufTett. I was obliged. 3* mufjte, bu mufjteji, er mufjte, »ir mufjten, tfjr mufjtet, ) ©ie mufjten, J fte mufjten. Present. Imperfect. SUBJUNCTIVE. I may be obliged. 34 miiffe, bu miiflejl, er miiffe, nrir muffin, tyr miiflet, ) ©ie mfifTen, ) fte muffen. I might be obliged. 34 mufjte, bu miijstefr, er mufjte, nrir mufjten, it)x miifjtet, 1 ©ie mufjten, \ fte mufjten. Compound Tenses. Pluperfect. 1st future. \st Conditional. %nd Future. 34 Ijafte gemufjt, 34 I;a«e gemufjt, 34 Wttbe mitfTen, 34 w&rbe miiffen, 34 wcrbe gcmujit fwt'Jti, I have been obliged. I had been obliged. I shall be obliged. I should be obliged. I shall have been obliged. 2nd Conditional. 34 roiirbe gemufjt tyaien, I should have been obliged. PAKADIGMS : VEBBS. 223 Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb 2>itrfen, DARE, MAY, TO BE PERMITTED, ETC. Principal Parts : ©itrfen, burfte, geburft. INFINITIVE. Present. Siirfen, to be permitted Perfect, ©eburft $a&ett, to have been permitted PABTICIFLE. Present. ©urfenl>« being permitted Past. ©cburft, been permitted INDICATIVE. I may (I am permitted) id) barf bu borfji er barf ttiir bitrfen i$r bitrfet ) @ie biirfcn J fie bitrfen Present. subjunctive. I may (I be permitted) i<§ bitrfe bu bitrfeft er biirfe rotr bitrfen i$r bitrfet ) @ie bitrfen I fte bitrfen I was permitted id) burfte bu burftejt er burfte wir burften i$r burftet ) @ie burften ) fte burften I were permitted tdj burfte bu bitrfte|} er burfte row bitrften tljr burftet J @ie bitrften ) fte burften COMPOUND TENSES. Perfect. id) $u motUefl cr wollte wir woQtett i$r wolltet ) ©ie WoOtetl ) fie woflten Present. Imperfect. SUBJUNCTIVE. I may be willing id) wolfe bu wolleft er wotte wir wotten ifir WoQct ) ©te wotttn f fie wotten I might be willing id) woflte • bu woflteft er woflte roir woflten i$r wofltet ) ©te woflten ) fie woflten COMPOUND TENSES. Perfect. id) T)a$t gcrcoflt, I have been willing Pluperfect. id) $atte gewoflt, I had been willing First Future. id) werbe WoIIen* 1 shall be willing First Conditional, id) witrbe-woflcn, I should be willing Second Future. id) werbe jjcwollt tyitUi I shall have been willing Second Conditional, id) witrbe gewoflt t)« ten. I should have been willing PARADIGMS : VERBS. 225 Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb ©otten, TO BE OBLIGED. Principal Parts : ©ollcn, follte, gefollt. INFINITIVE. Present. ©oHem to be obliged Perfect. ©efoM b>6en, to have been obliged PARTICIPLE. Present, ©ottenSi being obliged (seldom used) Past. ©efottt, been obliged INDICATIVE. I am obliged id) foil bit foHfl erfoH »ir foffjn tyrfoJM ) @te fofleit 1 fie fotten I was obliged id) fotttc bu foUteft et fcttte ttit fbtften i$t foHtct 1 SiefoMen I fie foUten Present. Imperfect. SUBJUNCTIVE. I may be obliged id) foUe bu foiled er foUe wit fallen ifr follct ) ©ie fallen ) fie fallen I might be obliged id) fallte bu folltefi et follte wir fatten t^r fotttet ) @ie fottten J fie fofften First Future. First Conditional. Second Future. Second Conditional, COMPOUND TENSES. id) B>oe gtfollt, I have been obliged id) $atte gefotttr I had been obliged id) roerbe fotteiti I shall be obliged id) wiirbe fallen/ I should be obliged id) roerbe gefollt Imorm I shall have been obliged id) toiirbe gefaHt fwfccn. I should have been obliged - 226 PARADIGMS : VERBS. Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb- fioffen, TO LET, TO PERMIT, TO LEAVE. Principal Parts : Saffen, Uejj, gelaffen. INFINITIVE. Present. Saffc::, to let, to permit Perfect' Oklaffcn fjaben, to have let PAKTICIPLB. Present. Saffentl (is never used) Past. ©etaffen, let {or permitted) IMPBKATIVE. Singular. Caffe (or lag"), let (thou), (French, laisser) Plwal. Saffet (lafjt or laffen Bit), let (you) INDICATIVE. I permit (or I let) idj laffe bii Weft cr lifjt roir laffen i$r lafjt (or laffet) ) ©ie laffen > fie lafTen I permitted id) lief) bu liejjeft er Iiep roir fiegctl i^liefjt 1 ' @ie Iiefjen ) _ fie Iiefjen Present. SUBJUNCTIVE. I may permit id) loffc bu lafTcft ct loffc roir laffen tyc laffet @te laffen J fie laffen \ Imperfect. I might permit id) liefje bit liefjefi er liefje roir Iiefjen . iljr tiefjet ) en> I should have permitted COMPOUND VERBS. 227 Compound Verbs. 137. In German, most simple verbs permit certain par- ticles* to be prefixed to them, and thus become compound verbs; e. g., frtjreifcen, to write ; db^xdhn, to copy. Note. — Particles when separated from their radical syllable receive the full or principal accent. Separable Compound Verbs. 138. Verbs, whose particles have a signification of their own, and have, the primary or full accent, are called separable compound verbs ; e. g., au§*ge^en, to go out. 1 39. The separable particles are the prepositions, o6, an, attf, auS, Bet, mit, nadj, i)or ( ju; the adverbs, ba, bar, cmpor, fort, fyeim, fyer, Ijin, Io$, ntebcr, o&, n>cg, jurficE, sufammen; and bo, $tn, Ijer and »or, compounded with prepositions or adverbs; as, iaiet, t)tnauf, (jeral>, Sown, etc. 14©. In principal sentences, when the compound verb is in the present, imperfect, or imperative, the prefixes or par- ticles are detached and placed at the end of the clause ; e. g., Pres., id) getye ^eute md)t a«$, I do not go out to-day ; Imperf., gtittgen @ie geftern er jejpt fottgeljt, the man who is now going away. 1 42. The prefix QC of the past participle has its place in compound verbs between the particle prefixed and the verb it- self ; e. g., ab|'d)retl>en, abgejctjrtefeert. This is the place also * Under the name of Pakticle we comprehend all those indeclinable words (such as adverbs and prepositions), which are united with other words, to modify or change their signification. The simple words to which they are prefixed are generally verbs ; but often nouns and ad- jectives are used as prefixes to change simple verbs into compound verbs ; e. g., from $, copying Present. 3dj fdjretbe — ab, I copy 5u fdjreibjl — ab, thou copiest cr fdjretbt — ab, he copies rcir fdjreiben — ab, we copy tljr |"d)reibt — ab, ) <3iefd 3 m6en-ab,F ouco P3 r fie fdjretben — ab, they copy fdjreiben ©te — ab, copy (you) Past, abgefdjrieben, copied. Imperfect. 3d) fdjrteb — «b, I copied bu fdjrtebft — ab, thou copiedst er jifyrieb — ab, he copied Wtr fdjrieben — ab, we copied ifr fdjrtebet— ab, } . , @ic^rieben-ab,F 0UC °P ied fie fd)rieben — a~b, they copied First Fut. 3$ torttt abfdjretten, I shall copy, &c. First Cond. 3d? triirJe abfcbreiben, I should copy, &c. Perfect. 3d) ^abe abgefdjrieben, I have copied, &c. Pluperfect. 3 d ) batte abgefd)riebett, I had copied, &c. Sec. Fut. 3<*! werbe abgefd)rieben b,aben, I shall have copied, &c. Sec. Cond. 3d? lBiirte abo,e|'d)rieben b,aben, I should have copied, &c. 14:3. The following verbs, formerly written as two separate words, are now treated as separable compound verbs : 3elj(fd)tagen, to miscarry freifpredjen, to acquit fjlcidjfommcn, to equal licbfaien, to love flitffc&wetgen, to be silent ftattflnbett (impers.), to take plaee Pres. id) fdjloge— fe# idj fprec^e — fret idj fomme — gttid) idj $«6e — lieS id) fdjrocige— fliH c« finbct — ftatt Past Part. fe^lflcfdjlagen freigeft>ro^m jlridjjcfommcn Iie6ge$ait fliffgefd)wiegen fhMgcfiiHben COMPOUND VEKB3 : INSEPABABLE. 229 Compound Inseparable Verbs. 144. Compound inseparable verbs, or, as the name im- plies, those compound verbs from which the prefix can never be detached, are formed with prepositions or adverbs haying only the secondary accent, or with unaccented syllables, which have no meaning of their own. 1 4©. The prefixes* of the inseparable verbs are the unaccented syllables 6e, ems, ent, er, ge, mi|j, »er, jer, the prepositions ttiber and $intcr,f and the adverb Doll. 1 46. The inseparable verbs do not admit of the augment jjc in the past participle ; e. g., jer|16rt, and not gejerjliirt. The place of ju, when required before a verb in the infinitive is before the compound, form of the inseparable verb ; e. g., 3<$ fam $ier(ier 3$re StntWort }u empfangen (not emSjufangen), I came hither to receive your answer. 1 47. Exception. — But if the prefix is u, compound, of which the first is a separable and the second an inseparable particle, ju is in- serted between the two ; e. g., er foil jldj unter|le$en fie an*ju*eifenneti/ let him dare to recognize them. Note. — The prefix mip in a few instances admits the augment ge in the past participle, e. g., (from migbeutett, to misinterpret), gemijjbcutet. 1 48 . The following verbs are also inseparable, but, contrary to rule (No. 144), prefix ge in the past participle to the inseparable particle, and have the prima/ry accent on the latter ; e. g., from argtti>$nen, past part. gearjtBii^nt. antworten, to answer IteMofen, to caress orgtso^nen, to suspect lufttsanbeln, to take a pleasure- walk BrauSW«|ett, to sack mut&majira, to conjecture, guess frolJ I viz. : mijjUIItgen, to disapprove Jttipeuten, to Misinterpret mijjfaaudjeit, to misuse, abuse raPanbeln, to misuse, abuse 1 49 . Verbs having inseparable particles compounded with sepa- rable particles are treated as inseparable, and have the accent on the second syllable of the particle.f Separable and Inseparable Compound Verbs. 150. Verbs compounded with feurci>, fiber, «nt, rnttcr, and totefcer are separable, when the prefix and the radical retain each their own peculiar and natural sense, and have the accent on the prefix ; but when they assume a figurative or metaphorical sense, they are inseparable, and have the ac- cent on the radical syllable. In the former case, they are generally intransitive, in the latter, transitive. EXAMPLES. hurdjbringen, to press or force through burd/3ringen> to penetrate iibe rfcfcttt, to set over (cross) iikrfefcen, to translate umgefjen, to associate um jjcljf n» to go around, evade untcrfittyctt, to go under shelter (Id) imtcrftcljcn, to dare Ime&ertoten, to fetch or bring back wiebevljolcn, to repeat Neuter and Intransitive Verbs. J 51. The conjugation of neuter and intransitive verbs differs from that of active verbs only in the compound tenses. 1. Such as express a mere activity, a continuous state, with- out a change or transition of their subject fjom one state into another ; e. g., lebcn, to live ; fl^cti, to sit, form their compound tenses with fmben. * See note § on preceding page. f Except ie»or|le$en, which is separable ; id) jle$e fceser. NEUTEB AND INTRANSITIVE VERBS. 231 2. Those that express a change or transition of their subject from one state into another, a motion from one place to another, e. g., fatten, to fall ; gefyen, to go, form their compound tenses ■with fcin, when the place or the manner of the motion is referred to. 153. Exception. — They are conjugated, however, with ftflbcta, when a simple action is designated, or the verb is taken in a figurative sense ; e. g., 34 Bin in tic (@ie finto) gefommen, you have come fie fmt gefommen, they have come Pluperfect. 34 ttm* gefommen, I had come bit rcarft gefommen, thou hadst come er war gefommen, he had come t»ir toaren gefommen, we had come ttyr waret (<3ie tuaren) gefommen, you had come fie toaren gefommen, they had come Second Fut. 34 roerbe gefommen fcin, I shall have come Second Cond. 34 wurbe gefommen fcin, I should have come Note. — Neuter and intransitive verbs. have, in German, no passive voice ; but some of them occur impersonally. 1 53. A number of transitive verbs, with a causative signification, are derived from intransitive verbs by a change or modification of the 232 NEUTER AND INTBANSrnVE VERBS. radical vowel ; e. g., ftjjert, to sit ; fefcen, to set. When intransitive these verbs are irregular and form their compound tenses with fetn. hut when transitive they are regvla/r and form their compound tenses with fjabcn. Transitive and regular einfcf)lijfern, to put or lull asleep ertranfntf to drown fufiren, to guide fallen, to fell ftbpen, to float liingcn, to hang up lauten, to ring the bell legen, to lay, to put faugettr to suckle fdjrocmmen, to bathe horses fenfen, to (make) sink ftfcen, to set, to place fprengtn, to break open, to blow up, to gallop ttanfm, to water »erf$t»enben, to waste raiigcn, to weigh, to ascertain weight jtetten, to put upright fteigern, to raise, to enhance Note. — The intransitive verbs, lauteiti faugen, fle$en, trinfen, and nriegen, form their compound tenses with f)abcn. Intransitive. einfctylafen, to fall asleep : ertrtnfen, to be drowned : fafyren, to drive: fatten, to fall: ftiepett, to flow: (jangen, to hang : lauten, to sound : licgen, to lie : faugen, to suck : fdjttimmen, to swim : finfen, to sink : fifcen, to sit : fprmgen, to leap, to jump, to burst, to crack : trinfen, to drink : »erf<§nunben, to vanish : nuegen, to weigh, to be of weight : Also: fie Jen to stand : freigen, to mount : Eeflexive Yevlos. 1 54. Nearly every transitive verb may be changed into a reflexive verb, but there are also a great many verbs used only as reflexives, which in English are expressed by the active or passive voice of simple verbs. These verbs govern the reflexive pronoun in the accusative ; e. g., 3 Mjtn reiten, to ride one's self lame, i. e., to make one's self lame by riding ; e. g., ft«$> miiDe laufen, to run one's self tired, to make one's self tired, by running (also used for incessant walking). The German language abounds in such elliptical expressions, in which titcd)Ctt is understood to refer to the adjective employed ; thus : 3#) We mid) lafjm geritten, is equivalent to, id) tjafo mid) tmrd) reiten laljm Qcmatfyt, or the adjective may be converted into a noun preceded by JU ; thus, instead of fid) tofct arteiten: fid) ju %.obt arMten. 157. The following phrases illustrate the use of Ger- man reflexive verbs : 33emuf)ett , the weather changed. Ter SBtnfc wirb fl(^ legett, the wind will cease. 3d) roerfce ttttd» nctd) s Paria Bcgeicn, I shall go to Paris. Serufen <3ie jtcfr auf mid), appeal to me. 3d) entfjatfe «tf<^ tea SBetneS, I abstain from wine. SBir fitf)len nnS gtMid), we feel happy. Die £f)ure bffnet ft<$, the door opened. Sfte^men <3ie ficfc in 3Id)t, take care. "Lit <5ad)e vntyatt jic& fo, that is the way the matter stands. @ie jerftreuten fic&, they dispersed. SBente &ic& an ten $Bnig, apply (address thyself) to the king. @te radjen fi«^» an i§ren geinten, they revenge themselves on their enemies. 234 REFLEXIVE VERBS. Conjugation of a Eeflexive Verb. <5uf) freuen, to rejoice. Infinitive. Participle. Pres. $d> freuen, to rejoice fid) freuent, rejoicing Perf. fid) gefreut %<&vx, to have fid) gefreut potent, having re- rejoiced joiced Imperative. Sing, frcuc fcid>, rejoice Plur. freuet end), or freuen , I rejoiced bu frcuft fcid> fcu freuteft feid> cr frcut ftdj er freute fid> wir freuen mt§ rotr freuten utt§ iljr freut eud> t§r freutet eud> (Sie freuen ftdj @ic freuten ftd> fie freuen fl fa freuten fidj Per/, id) tyafo mid> gefireut, I have rejoiced, etc. . Pluperf. id) J)atte mid) gefreut, I had rejoiced, etc. First Fut. id) tcerBe mid) freuen, I shall rejoice, etc. Sec. Fut. id) werie midj gefreut ftaben, I shall have rejoiced, etc. First Cond. id) ftwrte mid) freuen, I should rejoice, etc. Sec. Cond. id) ttmrbe mid) gefreut $akn, I should have re- joiced, etc. Impersonal Verbs, 158. The subject of impersonal verbs is, as in English, the personal pronoun of the third person, singular number, neuter gender, as : c§ regnet, it rains ; c§ fdjneit, it snows, etc. Note. — The auxiliary verb werben like the English verb to grow, helps to denote an incipient state. Thus in speaking of the weather ; it grows cold, zi tnirS fait; it grows late, e§ totrt fpn't. This indication of an in- cipient state is also extended to such expressions as ti ifl mir u6tl, I feel sick, and to denote the incipient state of those situations we say, <&i ttirt mir iifcel, or mir Wirt) vitlt I am growing (getting) ill. By the same anal- ogy, ©tnd fetltt means to be agreed, to be unanimous ; (Sin3 tnerficni to agree, to become unanimous. IMPEBSONAL VERES. 235 Conjugation of an Impersonal Verb, Present. S3 regnet, it rains Imperfect. S3 |"d)tteite, it snowed 1st Future. S3 tuirb frieren, it will freeze 1st Conditional. S3 tt>urt>e bonnem it would thunder Perfect. S3 I)flt geMifct, ft has lightened Pluperfect. S3 fyattt gefyctgelt, it had hailed 2nd Future. S3 ttrirD gctagt fyabcu, it will have dawned 2nd Conditional S3 tiriri) gctt)aut J?afc en, it would have thawed 139. 2%ere is, there are, there was, there were, etc., are rendered in the following manner : 1. YiThen expressing a definite existence, or when a circum- scribed distinct place or space is added, by cS and the verb feitt. Like the English to be, fcin serves merely as a copula, while the noun following it becomes a predicate, and is in the same case as the subject ; i. e., in the nominative ; e. g., S3 ift citt SKann braujj en, there is a man outside. Exception. — In the interrogative form, e£ is omitted ; e. g., Is there a bird in this cage ? t|t cin 33oget in btefem $iiftg ? 2. When expressing an indefinite existence, no distinct place being mentioned, use C§ and the verb gel) en with the noun following, as the object of the sentence, in the accusative ; e. g., S3 gicbt (or gibt) rotfjen unt> roetfjen 2Bcin, there is red and white wine. 160. The following impersonal verbs are also Teflexive : With the Accusative. ©3 baud)t mid), it seems to me e3 biinft midj, it appears to me e3 burflet mtdj, I am thirsty. ti freut mid), I am glad (rejoice) e3 frtert mid), I am cold e$ Ijungert mid), I am hungry ti jammert mid), I pity e3 reur mid), I repent e3 fdjaubert mid), I shudder e3 fdjlofert mid), I am sleepy t3 fd)merjt mid), I grieve «3 wrbricjjt mid), I am vexed e3 vnlangt mid), I desire With the Dative. (£3 a§nt mir, I forbode t$ Begegnet mir, it happens to me e3 bciitdjt mir, methinks e8 cfelt mir, I nauseate e3 foiflt mir eitt, it occurs to me ei gefoillt mir, I am pleased e8 gelingt mir, I succeed ti t|t mir Wb, I T ... * Jt. l • t ■!. f I am sorry for it e3 tt)ut mtr Ictb, ) J ti i(t mtr warm, I am warm li ifl mir rooljt, I feel well •e3 fommt mir »or, it seems to me c3 liegt mtr Diel barcm, it is important to me 236 THE ADVEBBS. With the Accusative. With the Dative. d Humbert mid), I wonder e$ fd)tt>inbeft mir, I am giddy e$ fragt fid), it is a question ti ttirb mir iibel, I feel sick eS fdjicft fid), it is proper toad feljlt 3$nen ? what is the matter e$ scrfie^t fid), (it isa matter) of course with you? Note. — ), there is much beer drank (i. e. people drink much beer) in Germany. Adverbs. 163. In German, as in English, adverbs modify the sig- nification of verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs, and denote manner, place, time, quality, quantity, comparison, etc. They are indeclinable, and formed, either by derivation or compo- sition, from almost every other part of speech. "Comparison of Adverbs. 164. The adverbs of manner, quality, and time only, are susceptible of comparison. The positive and comparative of adverbs are the same as those of adjectives,* but, in the superlative, instead of the simple article the preposition an is contracted with the definite article into am (an tern) ; e. g., am fdibnjkn-. 165. If the comparative is to express excellence or eminence, it may be done 1. by using the simple or absolute form of the superlative (see No. 26) ; e. g., cr Mtret $iif[i(J)j}, he asks very politely ; 2. by adding to the simple form the ending tnS ; e. g., cr Iajjt fie ieftenS flritgen, he sends you Ms most sincere regards ; 3. by exchanging the preposition nn for auf (which contracted with the article gives oitfS = . soon gem,* willingly, oft often feljr» very iibef» evil bid/ much toeing, little Irregular Comparison of Adverbs. Comparative. Seffcr, better JW et ' Uoner t e$er, f Hrier, better ofter, oftener arger, worse mtfjx, more J minb "' {. less ( wemger, ) am 6eften, or auf$ tefte, { om e^eflcn, the soonest 1 fcalbigfl, very soon am Iie6|len, best am f)aufig|"tm, the oftener, (most often) $8<$|1, augerftf extremely am argjlen, the worst am meiften, most (amminb^en,l theleast . ( am roeiugfien, ) ( am roenigften, 167, A number of adverbs of time and place are converted into ADJECTIVES denoting the particular circumstances of time and place, by affixing the syllable ig, and, like other adjectives, are declined, but do not admit of comparison ; e. g. : fcalbig, prompt bamalig, of that time fceiltig, of to-day jejig, present $tefig, of the place einftweilig, ad interim geftrig, of yesterday ntorgenb, of to-morrow 16S. The adverbs fcet and Ijttt, and the numerous par- ticles compounded with them (e. g., fyerein, |inein, etc.), must be carefully distinguished. f&tv and its compounds denote motion towards the speaker, while I) in and its compounds denote motion away from the speaker ; e. g., .Stommen @tc jb* fort ju mix Ijerauf, come at once to me up-stairs. ©efyen ©ic 311 i^m hituuf, go up-stairs to him. 1 69. Adjectives and adverbs are negated by prefixing the nega- tive particle uti/ answering to the English un, din, &c. ; e. g., gem, wil- lingly — ungttn, wiwillingly ; gliictli$, happy — unglittf ti$, chappy. 170. Adverbs of time precede other adverbs or adverb- ial expressions, and take their place after the subject and the verb, but when an adverb or adverbial expression begins the sentence, the verb precedes the subject (see No. 199,4). * Sent/ Iiekr, am Iiebften f correspond to I like, I like better, 1 like best, in English, and are mostly used in connection with a verb, as : 3$ laufe gem, I like to run ; id) fa^re liefcer, I like better to ride, &c. 238 CONJUNCTIONS. Conjunctions. 171. In German, conjunctions exert a great influence on the position of the verb. We divide them into the following three classes : 1. the co-ordinative, 2. the adverbial, and 3. THE SUBOKDINATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. 173. The Co-ordinatire Conjunctions (list on p. 149) serve merely as links to sentences, and exert no influence on the position of the verb ; e. g., 3d) IjaBe ilm gefjott, abet id) fjafce U)tt ntdjt gefe^ett, I have heard him, but I have not seen him. 1 73. The Adverbial Conjunctions (list on p. 149), when beginning a sentence or clause, require the subject to be placed after the verb or predicate ; e. g., ^voav Ijatte cr Stedjt, afcer (aflein) mid; ju fdjtagen, fca3 roar Unrcd)t, it is true that he was right, but to beat me was wrong. 3t)r SRcffe Ijot mid) ttid)t Beja^It, folQltcf> Werfce i«^ tljn yertlagen, your nephew has not paid me, conse- quently I shall sue him, 174. The Subordinate Conjunctions (list on p. 150) [both pimple and compound], if they begin the sentence, re- quire the verb governed by them to be placed at the end of the first clause, and the second clause to begin with the verb followed by the 'subject ; e. g., 2tl§ id) tljn juerjt f tinnte, ttmr er nod) ein $nak, when I first knew him, he was still a boy. Eelative Conjunctions. 1 75. All adverbs of interrogation, in indirect questions,* become relative conjunctions, and require the verb to be placed at the end of the clause. Such are : SBann, when totffiaV), ) wte, how ttielange, how long wherefore ttantm, why roefswegm, j nriesiel, how much too, where and all the compounds of mo as ItJCljCr, tuoijin, &c. Ex. , I would like to buy this house, but I have no money ; but when the second clause has its own subject and verb use after, even after a negation ; e. g , <£r ifl nod) nifljt eingettoffen, abtt er toirb gerotfj fom» men, he has not yet arrived, but he will surely come. 3. Sonbern is disjunctive, and is used only when a decided contra- diction of a statement denied in the antecedent clause is to be made ; «■ 9-, Ulidjt 6nletdj, oBfdjon, ODfoofjl (though, although), are all synon- ymous, but OUfllcid) is most frequently employed. They are generally divided when one, two or even more monosyllables follow ; e. g., ofi id) mid) gleid; frette, or ouflfctdj id) nttd) freue, although I am glad. When they begin a sentence, the following member corresponds to them by means of the conjunctions Soil), Jcnnod), or similar particles ; as, Scinunqcadjfcf, notwithstanding that ; majtSbefiorucmaer, nevertheless ; e. g., D6fd)on er nod) jung ifl, $at er bod) fdjon graueS £aar, although he is still young, yet lie has already gray hair ; oo er gletd) alt tft, fo §at er nidjtg&cftotocniger 240 THE CONJUNCTIONS. ben sbfligen ©eiraud) fewer ©eifteafrfiire, although he is old, he has still the perfect use of his mental faculties. ISO. 1. ©o (so, thus, as) often serves to connect the subordinate clause with the antecedent, when the sentence begins with ba, the con- junctions nadjbem, obgleid), obfdjon, obtto&I, n>ei[, roenn or n>ie ; hut they need not be translated into English and may be omitted even in Ger- man ; e. g., %a er bii je$t nid)t gefommer. ifi, f o roerbe id) nicbt Ianger roarten, as he has not yet come, I will wait no longer. Note. — We might just as properly say : 3d} roerbe ntt&t lunger roarten, ba er bii je$t nidjt gefommcn tft, &c. 2. @o before an adjective, followed by the conjunction aitd), answers to however ; e. g., ©o grog oudj bie ©d)recfen beS JfriegeS feinmogen, however great the terrors of war may be. Sometimes aU is inserted before audi ; «■ g„ ©0 angenebm alS c« aud) fein mag (fo) fann id) ti bod) nid)t bifligen, how- ever pleasant it may have been, I can nevertheless not suffer it ; or an inversion of the sentence may take place and aud) be entirely dropped ; e. g., Slngencbm aU ei roar, fo fonnte id) ti bod) nid)t biHigen. 181. To when correspond in German 1. SBantt the interrogative adverb of time; 1 e. g., Sffionn roerbe id) bid) ju $aufe pnbcn ? when will I find you at home 1 2. 2Bcnn, the conjunction of time referring to events supposed to occur ;' e. g., Sffienn ber £eb>er t onxmt, lop mid) tufen, when the teacher comes, call me. Note. — SBeiut is used also as a conjunction of condition answering to the English if; e. g., SBenn bu franf bift, fdjreibe mir, if you are sick, write me. When a verb in the imperfect is used with ttscnn, the rest must be in the subjunctive mood ; e. g., He would be glad, if she came, ti ware tr>m Iiefc, rocnn fie fame. 3. %l§, the conjunction of time past; e. g., 9U8 id) franf roar, fam er tag' lidr) ju mir, when I was ill, he came daily to see me. 183. But or but that, 1. after a negative clause in which other- wise, or anything else, is understood, with the adverb anberS, render al£ baft ; e. g., 3d) roeijj nid)t anberS, o!8 baft er feine ©cbulben e^rlur; iejabtt, I don't know but (that) he always pays his debts. Note. — 5118 baft is also employed when jit is used in the sense of too, to indicate that a certain action spoken of is too much beyond prob- ability to take effect ; e. g., The news was too good to be believed, bie 9Jad)rid)t roar ju gut, alg bag man fte glau6en fonnte. 2. But after an excluding negation is rendered ofjlic baft ; e. g., Not a moment passes, but I think of you, nidjt eine SDiiimtc » ergebt, ofjltc baft id) an Sit benfe. 1 SBknn and rDttnn are frequently uBed without discrimination one for the other; so are benn and bann. £enn is properly used only as a con- function of cause — bann as an adverb of time. NUMBER OF NOUNS. 241 Additional Remarks on the Number of Nouns. 183. There are a great many nouns in German which, from their signification, cannot be used in both numbers. While some of them have no singular form, others are without a plural form. 1. Nouns that are used only in the Singular are : a. The names of Materials, as : fcaS ©oft), the gold tai $upfer, the copper tier £onig, the honey bag Srot, the bread, etc. Remark. — Some names of materials have a plural form when different kind of the same material are referred to ; e. g., Me SSeine» (the) wines, i. e., the different kinds of wine. 6. Abstract Nouns, as fcer papier, five quires of paper. Da3 ©ujjenb, a dozen ; e. g., »ier &ugen& Safdjentiufyr, four dozen handkerchiefs, ©er gu|j, a foot ; e. g., jmci 3fu# (not giifje) tang, two feet long. £>a3 SWal, time, repetition ; e. g., ein ffftal, once ; jroet fUlcrf, twice, etc. !Da3 9>aor,f a pair ; e. ll fireit, nine inches broad. 1 84. Compound words ending in SKanrt, change this ending in the plural to Scute, when the substantive implies a person without special regard to sex, as : ber Simtmann, the sheriff ; pi. tie Stmtleute. ber Slelmaim, the nobleman ; pi. bic gcellcute. ber Jpanbefemnmi, the tradesman ; pi. tie £cmbeUlcute. ber tofmann, the merchant ; pi. tic $au[leute. If, however, the term is to express a distinction of sex, the regular form Scanner is used, as : ©er (Brntann, the husband (married man) ;pl. bie Stjemdmter. (Xte S^elcutc, married people, meaning man and wife.) ©er Sfjrenmann, the man of honor ; pi. bte Gtfyrenmdnncr. ©er StaatStncmn, the statesman ; pi. tie ©taatSmdrmer. ■* Feminine nouns and all those which express time are used in the plural ; e.g., jroet Stten Xvi), two ells or yards of cloth; brei 3a$re \an$i for three years. t 9>oar also signifies few; e. g., tin 9)a« ©tunben, a few hours. GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 243 Gender of Substantives. Rem— This part of German grammar is unfortunately so difficult to reduce to general and precise rules, that the student can be successful in learning the genders of nouns, only by a careful study of the foUowing rules, and a constant attention to the article belonging to each noun, and noting its gender. 185. In German, the gender of a substantive is not, as in English, determined merely by the signification, but also by the endings. The names of inanimate things, therefore, may be either masculine, feminine, or NEUTER. 186. MASCULINE by SIGNIFICATION. 1. Appellations of Males, as : kcr Sftann, the man ier SBroe, the lion icr $aifer, the emperor fcer 2Mer, the eagle Note. — Diminutives* are always neuter. 2. Names of Celestial and Infernal Beings, and Planets, as : ber Sngct, the angel bcr SDlottb, the moon tier Seufel, the devil ber ©tent, the star EXCEPTIONS. bit @onne,f the sun &ie Srbe,f the earth * In German nearly all substantives may be formed into diminutives by affixing <§m or leirt. Nouns ending in c drop this letter in the dimi- nutive form, and those containing the vowels a, t>, « modify it. The diminutives are used not only to express smallness of Bize, but also affec- tion, and in some cases oddity, as, Wlam, SHanndjen; Xoc&ter, £ii($terlein; 89aum, Sauradjcn; $unfc, $iinbd)en. See also Lesson III. t See 189. 244 GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 3. Names of Seasons, Months, Days, Points of the Compass, Winds, and Stones, as : ber ©ommer, summer ber Storb (en), (the north) ber Sanuar, January ber ©antum, the Simoom ber greitag, Friday ber Eiomant, the diamond EXCEPTIONS. bttfi 3a$r, the year, and its compounds, e. g., ba« grit^r, spring. 187r-MASCXJLINE by TEEMINATION. 1. Nouns ending in en* (not d;en), ig, u$, ing, and lingf, as ber ©artCtt, the garden ber Sftegett, the rain ber $imtg, the king ber faring, the herring t,er $firft#, the peach ber ©iinffttttg, the favorite EXCEPTIONS. fea£ 23ct!en, the basin ha& Safen, the sheet fcaS Sifett, the iron dad Scfjcn, the fief ta% Sullen, the foal, fca§ SSSappen, the escutcheon fca8 $if[en,the cushion, pillow fca§ 3"d)«i, the sign bad $itlg, the thing fcae JSReffmg, the brass 2. Five Nouns ending in ee : ber ^ajfee, the coffee ber @d)ncc, the snow ber £fyee, the tea ber Mitt, the clover ber <5ee,J the lake 188. FEMININE by SIGNIFICATION. 1. Appellations of Females, as : bie grau, the woman bie Stmme, the nurse bie Snngfrau, the maid bie $atfertn,§ the empress EXCEPTIONS. fcaS 28ett>, the wife, woman fca§ grauenjtmmer, a female person * Infinitives used substantively are neuter, see 190. 3. f See Third Declension, j 2>ie ©ee, the sea, has no plural § See 197. GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 245 2. Names of Trees, Fruits, Plants, and Flowers, as: Me gt$e, the oak tie spflcmje, the plant tie 33irne, the pear Me Silte, the lily EXCEPTIONS. bit 2lfyont, the maple btt Jpottunber, the elder tree btt 2IpfeI, the apple bet SBai^olter, the juniper bet Soum, the tree 4>a8 SBergigmeinnti^t, the forget- bet glieter, the lilac me-not bet ©oMacf, the wall-flower 3. The Names of Rivers, as : Me IDottau, the Danube Me (Spree, the Spree EXCEPTIONS. bet Wain, the Main for Sa spfata, the La Plata bet aJIifjtfftppi, the Mississippi b$t Dljio, the Ohio bet SMiffouri, the Missouri bet Sttjein, the Rhine 189 — FEMININE by TERMINATION. 1. Nouns ending in c (not ee) not having the Pbefix (Be, as : tie ©trajje, the street Me §filfe, the help Me 'Siefce, (the) love tie S§re, the honor EXCEPTIONS. fca§ 2Iuge, the eye &0§ Srfce, the inheritance fca§ Snte, the end bet Ra\t, the cheese Note. — Words like ©ame, cannot of course come undei this rule, as their original ending is en. 2. Nonas ending in one of the Affixes ci (ety), fccit, f cit, ad?t, fc^flft, «4>t, Mttg, nib or Uttft, as : Me en and let jj, as : bai ©B^r^en, the httle son bai Saum<^e», the little tree 2. NOUnS FORMED WITH THE AFFIXES fel, fttl, ttl, tfiutw, and ntfj, as : GENDEB OP SUBSTANTIVES. 247 has 9t&t§jW, the enigma iai g^riftenf&Uttt, Christianity tas ©dncffal, fate bai SSiintHttfe, the alliance lai Witttl, the remedy, means Bag 2$er§dlttti$, the relation EXCEPTIONS, t btv ©tbpfel, the stopper bit gmpfangnijj, conception Sic SriiSfal, the sorrow bit grfenntnijj, perception btt 3rrt§um, the mistake, error bit firtaubnijj, the permission btt 9teid)fljum, the wealth bit grfparnif, savings btv 2Sad)2tt)um, the growth bit gaulntjj, the putrefaction bit SSeBrimgnifj, grievance feie ^enntntg, knowledge fctc Sefummerntfj, sorrow &ie 23ert>ammnifj, damnation &ic Seforgmfj, apprehension bit SSerfautnnijj, the omission, bit Setriibnijj , affliction delay bit SSewanfcnijj; condition bit SBt&ntfj, the wilderness Exercise on the Gender of Nouns.* SBoIf. 23&r. Sftenfd). gran. ?Wonb. Sonne. Seufel. ©tern. grte. #a$n. £enne. 5Ulai. SKontag. Stnah. £o»e. ©iamant. ©arren. grityjafyr. SaljrljunBert. Sifcn. Sftegen. ©oil), ©tlfier. gitflen. Safen. tfiffen. Sefcn. ©unfiling. Sungfrau. %%om. Spree. £onait. Sftjein. Sftljone. gicfye. State. $bntg. Jparing. ©d)nee. ©ta^t. greunbfdjaft. Stcbe. 2tuge. 5Bacf)ijolt>er. 3$ee. ©ante. ©elmls. Slnfunft. Sftetdy ttjum. gmpfangntfj. ©eburt. ©enujj. 0taud)en. ©cbtrge. ©ijfndjen. grauletn. SSJlfodjen. 2Id}tung. ©d)metd)elct. 9)ftr* fldj. 3eic6en. Silte. ©tern. Sftler. ©amen. SKonb. Slmme. ©ee. SBappen. grefljett. .Sdjtimg. SritbfaL Seden. ©topfel. SBaumctjen. Siintmlfj. grfparmfj. 21 unt> 53. g^re. ©ebufo. Sombacf. Seforgntfj. ©ijttffaf. fflktystyum. grtaubntjj. Wlit* tel. 3inf. SSteb,. Sritbfal. tfenntntjj. ©efefyntacf. ©ebtrge. Sergtfjmefnntdtf. SWatn. ajerptntfj. greunbltdjfot. ©efafyr. Srrt^utn. 9tafp. £ouunber. * Let the pupil determine the gender of each noun, f Xriftfal, Sefiimmermjj, (Empfansmfj, Qsrfemutufj, erfparnijj, SJerberimfj, and SSerfaumnijj are also neuter sometimes. 248 GENDEB OF SUBSTANTIVES. Gender of Compound Substantives. 193. — Compound Substantives take the gender of their last component* as : fcer Atntyof \ bo ?* k f T ^> c ^ cn \ the churchyard. ( and bet £or, yard 3 J *«**• { S*C } *•*»— EXCEPTIONS. a. The following words are feminine, although their last component is masculine : Me Sfnmutfy, grace tie Sangmut^, forbearance Me Slrmutlj, poverty Me ©anftmuti meekness tie £emuttj, humihty tic ©d)»ermut|, melancholy tie ©rojjmutlj, generosity Me SBe^mut^ sadness Note. — Other words compounded with mut$ are masculine; e. g., tier §ocf)muty, haughtiness. b. The following words also deviate from the general rule : bet 2HJ|"d)eu (Me @d)eu), abhorrence 8>ie fteunauge (ta3 2luge), the lamprey &ie 2Intoort (iai SBort), the answer ba& ®egent^eil } ( the reverse fca§ ^intertieil [• (terSfytlm the hind part io8 Sorfcertfyeil ) ' the fore part Double Gender. 1 93. — The following nouns, written and pronounced alike, change their signification with their gender : feet 23cmt>, the binding of a &a$ Sank, the ribbon, bond book or a volume * In French the gender of compound nouns is determined by the first component, ■f Sometimes also neuter. GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 249 bet 33auer, the peasant, farmer bet iBurtC, league, confederacy bet Sfyor, the chorus bet Srbe, the hea- der ©etjjel, the hostage bet §aft, the hold, clasp bet Jparj, the Hercynian Mts. bet §ctbe, the heathen fcer £ut, the hat feer liefer, the jaw bet Pittite, the customer bet Setter, the conductor bet Mangel, (the) want bie Wart, the mark, boundary bet 9ftaft, the mast (ship) &cr 37ienjcf), the man fecr SftetS, the rice bet ©"djtlt, the shield bet <3ee, the lake bet ©proflfc, sprout, scion &ie ©teuer, tax, contribution Jxr ©ttft, the tag, peg, pencil bet £|or, the fool bet Sertienfl, the earnings bie 2Be|r, the defence ba$ Sauer * the cage &0§ 33uitt>, the bundle ba$ Glt)or, the choir fenfi firfce, the inheritance bie ©etfjel, the scourge bie Jpaft, the custody &a§ Jparj, the rosin bie £ette, the heath Sic Jput, the heed, pasture &ie liefer, the Scotch fir bie $unt>e, notice, intelligence bie Setter, the ladder bie 9ftctnge(, the mangle feed SOJarf, the marrow bie 2fta(t, fattening of cattle ba% SOtenfdj, the wench &08 SftetS, the sprig &o§ ©djtfythe sign(of a house) bie ©ee, the sea (ocean) bie ©projfe, step of a ladder ba& ©teuer, the helm ba$ ©tlft, foundation, ba$ Sfyox, the gate &a§ SSerSienjt, the merit iaS SBeljr, the weir Double Form in the Plural. 194.— The following nouns have a double form in the plural with different significations (comp., brother ; plural, brothers and brethren, &c.) : Singular, iai Skttb, ribbon, tie bie Sanf, bank, bench Hi ©eflftt, face , baa $orn, horn ber Saben, shop bie Sitnbcr, ribbons bie Sanfe, benches bie ©cfldjter, faces bie Corner, horns bie Siiben, shops Plural. SBaitDC, ties (bonds) Sonfen, banks ©efitfytt, visions $aWC, kinds of horn Saben, shutters * Salter, cage, is also masculine. 250 GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. Singular. Plural. ( certain ( &mtie, indefinite or vast bad Canb, land, country bie £iinber» ] countries ) portions of country ; 1 ( Sanbeteien, lands bad Sidjt, light, candle bie Stater, lights, flames i!id)te, candles bet Dtt, place bie Derter, single places £)rte> places bet ©traujj, nosegay, bie ©ttfiujier, nosegays ©ttait§e, ©ttaujjen, battle, ostrich bie Sttiiupc, battles ostriches b*8 SBott, word iie SBirtcr, single words Sffiorie, coherent words Note. — Dag Sntetelfe; the interest, concern, advantage, has in the plural, bie 3ntere(fen meaning the interest of money. 195. — The following nouns have a change of gender but not of signification : ber or Ste Sad), the brook bet or bad Iljeil, the part, share, ber or bad 8o$n, the reward, wages ber or bad Seug, the cloth, material, bet or bad Drt, the place trash 196. — The following nouns have a double form in the plural, but without a change of signification : Singular. Plural. bet Sottt, the thorn bie ©omen or 2)ijtner bad ©au, the country bie ©atte or ©aucn bad ©etsanb, the garment bie ©ewanbe or ©euiinber ber $alm, the blade (of grass) bie fialnte or f>almen bad §emb, the shirt bie §emben or Member bad Samifol, the waistcoat bie Jfamtfole or ffiamtfolet bad 5Ka|t, the repast bie 5D?atyIe or 3J?d'^Ier bad ©eil, the rope, line bie ©etle or ©eiler bet ©pom, the spur bie ©pomen or ©potcn bet ©traud), the bush bie ©trSitd)e or ©traudjer bad 26>l, the valley bie £§ale or Xljalfr bad Judj, the cloth bie Xudje or £iic$cf bet SSurm, the worm bie SSSittme or SBitrmcr bad Sell, the tent bie Sette or Seller Formation of Feminine Appellations, 197. — Most feminine appellations are derived from the corresponding- masculines by adding in or inn in the singular, and the plural takes en. If monosyl- lables, the radical vowels, a, o, n, are modified in the plural ; e. g., £er ©raf, the count, tie ©rafin(n), the countess, pi. tie ©rafinnen, the countesses. CONSTRUCTION. 251 Construction, Eemaek. — The German, like the Latin, admits of a great variety in the arrangement of words in sentences, thus afford- ing great facilities for securing proper emphasis, and for imparting to its periods the same harmonious flow for which the Latin classics are distinguished. But with all this free- dom every word or member of a sentence in German takes its position according to certain definite laws of arrange- ment, which cannot be disregarded without great offence against euphony. I. The Principal or Simple Sentence. a. COMMON CONSTRUCTION. 198. — 1. As in other languages, every simple sen- tence must have at least two principal parts, 1. A subject, (noun or its equivalent), and a predicate verb (expressed or implied). 1 Ex. — Qui ftinb roeint, the child cries. Note.— The verbs fcilt (unless it signifies to exist), to be, toerSen, to become, fdjetlteit, to seem, feleibeit, to remain, Ijei&en, to be called (not to call) serve merely as the copula, while the noun, pronoun, adjective, or participle, which follows serves as the predicate, and is put in the same case as the subject (nom.) s (§ 85, p. 312, I. ; § 9, Exc). Ex.— (Eta guter 3TCenfc§ ifl cin nlitiflidjcr SWenfd), * good man is a happy man. Svnolb nmrbe ein aScrrotJer fettteg SflterfanbcS, Arnold became a traitor to his country. 2. If the predicate has an object, the latter constitutes the third principal part, and is placed after the predicate. Ex.— Sr fdjtetbt etnen SBrief, he writes a letter. 1 The subject is sometimes called the grammatical subject, and the predicate the grammatical predicate ; the entire subject is sometimes called the logical subject, and the entire predicate, the logical predicate. ' This is the case also with any of those verbs which in the active govern two accusatives (p. 368, 2.) when employed passively. 252 CONSTBUCTION. 8. When the leading verb is used in a compound tense, the auxiliary holds the place of the predicate, and the participle or infinitive stands last in the sentence. Ex. — SBir [jnben beinen Srtef erfjulten, we have received your letter. Note 1. — If both the infinitive and the past participle occur, the in- finitive is put last. Ex.— 3$ roiirbe t$n gciobt Qafien, I should have praised him. Note 2. — When the aux. is in a comp. tense, the simple tense holds the place of the predicate, and the complement follows the leading verb. Ex.— ®r if! beffen fcefd)ulbigt toorScn, he has been accused of it. 4. When the leading verb is a compound separable, the radical holds the place of the predicate, and the par- ticle stands last in the sentence. Ex.— Da3 Stc&t g e $ t auS, the light goes out. Note. — There are several phrases consisting of verbs and nouns, some of which are accompanied by prepositions or adjectives, in which the noun is made to serve the part of a separable particle of a compound verb, and occupies also the same place. They are : SI($t geien, to pay or give attention 1 Erofc Helen, to bid de6ance ft ft fatten, to hold fast umg Seben (mngen, to kill ©efaljr laufen, to run a risk urn 9taty fragen, to ask advice ©efySr geien, to grant a hearing ju ©runbe geljen, to perish $itlfe teiflen, to render aid ju ® runbe rtdjten, to ruin U18 2Berf ft|jen, to execute ;u l>utfe fommen, to come to the aid 9latlj gefcen, to advise ju SRittctg effen, to dine jlttT ftefan, to stand still ju ©tanbe bringen, to accomplish ©erge ttagen, to take care ju Sfait werben, to fall to one's part 5. When there are two objects in a sentence, that of the person precedes that of the thing. Ex.— 3d) fa&e tntincm Sruticr einen SBrief gefdjrieben, I have written my brother a letter. Note. — Notice that the personal object is in the Dative (comp. § 18). 6. When both objects are persons, the accusative precedes the dative. Ex.— Si) roerbe 31jrcn ©o?n nteinem Sreunbe etnyfc^Ien, I shall recom- mend your son to my friend. > Compare French, faira attention, (to make attention). CONSTRUCTION. 253 Exceptions. 1. When one of the two objects is a personal pronoun, place it before the noun. Ex.— $>err Stfjulje $at ratr etnetl 3Bt|u$ aogeftattet, Mr. Schulze has paid me u visit. 2. When both objects are personal pronouns, the mono- syllabic one is placed first (1.) ; but if both are monosyl- labic, the accusative precedes (2.) 1 ; e. g., Ex. — (1.) <£r fyttte eg 3$nen gef$ric6ett, he had written it (to) you. (2.) SInna $at fie mir gelieljett, Anna has lent them (to) me. 7. Adverbs and adverbial expressions of place and manner are placed, (1.) immediately before the participle, when the verb stands in a compound tense ; but, (2.) when the verb is used in a simple tense, such adverbs are placed last. Ex.— (1.) Sir Ija&ett bai fiinb tifjerafl gefudjt, we have looked (for) the child everywhere. (2.) ffltr erfittfm unfere 9>flienn, if, is not used. Ex.— 3Sdte id) nidjt ftanf aeroefen (instead of tocnn id) nid)t, &c), had I not been sick. d. After adverbial conjunctions (see p. 329, IV.). Ex.— fiaum § a 1 1 e i d) Die 2pre geojfnet, scarcely had I opened the door. INVERSION OF THE OBJECT. 2. The inversion, of the object takes place when a par- ticular stress is to be laid upon it. In each a case the subject is placed after the verb. The sentence : 3d) nefyme 3|>r Slnerbieten mit greuben an, appears inverted thus: 5I)rSlnerHeten neljme id) mit greubut an, your proposal I accept ■with pleasure. 3. Monosyllabic personal pronouns often precede the subject when the latter is dissyllabic or polysyllabic. Ex. — Sa 3Ijncii9Jiemanb QstwaS in ben 2Beg legt, as no one hinders you. INVERSION OP ADVERBIAL. EXPRESSIONS. 4. Adverbial expressions (especially those of time) very frequently begin the sentence when a particular stress is to be laid on them. Here also the verb pre- cedes the subject. Ex. — @ eftcrn *KGcnt> fain metne ©djwefler in 9)ari8 cm, last evening my sister arrived at Paris. 5. According to the stress to be laid upon certain words, the following and similar sentences may be ex- pressed in various ways : 1. 25er $itr|l er @ee, in weldjem idj bid) Ijnfie fcaben fe$en, the lake in which I have seen you bathing. Note. — This is the case also when the infinitive form of the auxilia- ries of mode is used in place of the participle (p. 110. IV.). Ex.— 3Ran figte mir, bag id) bid) nid)t ttiirSe fe^en IBnnen, they told me that I could not see you. III. The Compound Sentence. 301. — The Compound Sentence is formed either by co-ordination or by sub-ordination. a. CO-ORDINATE COMPOUND SENTENCES. 303. — There are three ways of co-ordination, 1 The posts sometimes place the auxiliary first. 00N8TBUCTION. 257 1. Two sentences may be placed simply beside each other without any connection. Ex.— 2)ie galjnen flattcrten, e« fdjmetterten Slrompeten, the flags fluttered, the trumpets resounded, ©e&e (bu) lints, id) twbe tedjts ge^en, you go to the left, I will go to the right. Eemaek. — This omission of the conjunction is, in English, called asyndeton. 2. They may be connected either by a demonstrative pronoun (a.) ; by a co-ordinate conjunction (&.); or by an adverbial conjunction (c). Ex. — (a.) Slleraiiber ber ©tope unb <5jru9 ttartn jtoei madjttgc Sricget; jencr serfanb SBeiS^eit mit £apfcrfeit, fiicfcr, &c, Alexander the Great and Cyrus were two mighty warriors, the former joined wisdom to bravery, the latter, &o. (6.) 3d) serlaffe bid) jejt, a6cr id) wcrbe bid) t alb wiebetfe^en, I leave you now, but I shall soon see you again. (c.) Etefe ©tafjlfebern jtnb ju Ijatt, 5)cjj&al6 taugen ftc nidjt 511m @d)rti» ien, these steel-pens are too hard, hence they are not fit to write with. Note. — Sentences joined by a relative pronoun are not considered as compound, but as accessory sentences. Ex. — 3d) tyibt ba« Sudj ertjattett, raclrfjcS ©ie mit gefanbt $akn, I have re- ceived the book, which you sent me. fo. SUBORDINATE COMPOUND SENTENCES. § 203. — 1. Compound sentences with subordinate clauses consist of two essential parts, the principal sen- tence, and the subordinate (accidental) sentences. Their connection is effected by means of the subordinative con- junctions, (see p. 332.) 2. Subordinate clauses are characterized by the follow- ing particulars : a. They cause the verb to be removed to the end. Ex. — Ea roar bltnfel. aid id) i&n traf, it was dark, when I met him. 258 CONSTRUCTION. b. In compound tenses the participle precedes the aux- iliary. ' Ex.— Da ct eincn 9>a@ erljalten Jjatre, as he had received a passport. c. The prefix of separable comp. verbs is not separated. Ex.— @te ifl tiid)t gefurtb, todl fie nid)t tciglid) aujfa^rt, she is not well, because she does not ride out daily. d. Depending cases are placed between the subject and the verb. Ex.— SBitrbefl bu mir jitrnen, rserm td) Sen SBricf Seiner Sdjtoefier meinem SBruScr ftttbe, would you he offended with me, if I should send your sister's letter t&my brother f 3. The subordinate sentence may be either the first member or the second ; if placed first, the subject of the principal sentence stands after the verb. Frequently this is indicated by fo (not generally translated). Ex. — (Er fd)reiot mir nid)t, metl ertrage i (t , or, 255 e it et t r a g e i ft, (fo) fdjreiot er, &c., he does not write me, because he is lazy 4. "When the pronoun of the subordinate sentence represents a person, an inanimate object, or an abstract idea of the principal sentence, the pronoun and the noun exchange places. Ex.— D6fd)on unfer Slac&Sar reid) tft, ifl er bodrj nid)t gliieflid), although our neighbor is rich, he is, nevertheless, not happy. (Regular order -. Unfer 92ad|6ar ifl bod) ttid)t gliiSlidj, oofdjon er reidj ifl.) 5. The subordinate sentence may even be inserted be- tween the words of the principal sentence, without affect- ing the order of the words of the principal sentence. Ex.— 2flan f&eitte mir fogletct), aid id) Hon meiner SRcife ptiitffcljrtc, ben %si betner ©djroefler mil, they informed me of the death of your sister, immediately on my return from my journey. 6. The conjunctions Wctttt and fcaff are frequently omitted. In this case the verb is not removed to the end. Ex. — $fitte id) ti geroufjt, fo roitrbe id) gcrne ju bir gcfoinmcrt fcin, had I known I would gladly have come to you. Note. — The order of words is exactly the same, if several subordinate clauses occur in a compound sentence. COMPOUND VERBS. 259 A List of Compound Verbs, which are either separable or inseparable, according to their signification. "When separable, the accent is on the prefix, when inseparable, on the root of the verb. Inseparable. b u r d) Micfen burd)i>oI)ren burdjbrmgen burd)gli!§{n burdjgetym burdjtaufett burdjtcifen burd)fd)auen buvdjrd)te§en burdjfdjnciben burd)(lo|en burrtjfrmdjm itfceririrtgen iikrfaffen utofii^reit iifcergeljett ti&ev^eien iifcerlaben iikrlegen iifcrlaufen Kterrctdjcn iifcerfdjlagen uicrfdjreiten ufcerfdjiittcn ii&erfejjen iiberfpringen itkrfleigen iifcertragen iifcertretm iifcerrocrfcn iiberjie^en u m geljen umfteiben umfa^rcn umfaffett to glance through to bore through to force through to heat through to run away to run through to travel through to look through to shoot through to divide by cutting to push through to strike out to bring over to fall over to convey over to go over to lift over to load over to lay over to run over to reach over to turn to one side to write over to spill over to pass over to leap .over to mount over to carry over to go over to throw over to draw over to go around, to associate to change clothes to ride over to set anew to know one's design to pierce to penetrate to inflaipe to examine to peruse hastily to travel over to penetrate to interleave to eross to pierce to roam to deliver to take by surprise to convict to overlook to dispense with to overburden to reflect to importune to deliver to calculate to direct to cover with to translate, to overcharge to skip to surpass to transfer to transgress to fall out with one to cover to elude to clothe on all sides to sail around to embrace 260 NEUTER AND INTRANSITIVE VERBS. umfdjtffen itmfcfyreiben umf^ittien umfpanncn umfleflen um»el)en umjiefyen untergraien untertyaltm unterfdjieben unterfc&lageit nnterfleftn unterjic^en soli fiitten » i e b e r fcolen to put into another ship to recopy to pour into another vessel to change horses to transpose to blow down to change clothes, remove to dig under to keep under to shove under to heat under to stand under to draw under to fill full to fetch hack Inseparable. to circumnavigate to circumscribe, to paraphrase to place around to span to surround to blow upon from all sides to beset, to overcast to undermine to entertain, to support to substitute falsely to embezzle to venture to undergo to fulfill to repeat A List of Neuter and Intransitive Verbs, which are conjugated in German with fei n (to be), but in English with to have. entfttllen, to slip from entflicIjM, to escape by flight entgeljen, to escape by going cntlaufen, to escape by running entf($lafen, to fall asleep, to expire entfdjluijfen, to escape by slipping entfprtngen, to escape by springing ent»ei($en, to escape by yielding entroifcfjeit, to escape by gliding away erblaffen, to grow pale * erfalten, to grow cold enot^en, to blush erfdjeinra, to appear erfdjredm, to be frightened ctftaunen, to be astonished erttinfen, to be drowned erwadjen, to awake fatyren, to ride in a carriage fatten, to fall faulcn, to rot SIbfatfen, to decay ablaufen, to run down at'retfm, to depart afwetdjcn, to deviate to degenerate auSgletten, to slip auSroanbern, to emigrate tnben, to vanish f^roellen, to swell (ierben, to die (franben, to strand umfommen, to perish Deralten, to become antiquated Serarmen, to become poor serbleidjen, to grow pale »er6tu|en, to fade Serfatten, to decay serfaulen, to rot serfliegen, to evaporate Dergetyen, to pass away »er$unge.rn, to starve ueria^ren, to become invalid by time tjerbben, to become desolate s>ermud)en, to evaporate to get fcerretfen, to go on a journey »ctro[len, to be consumed by rust Serfdjatten, to cease sounding serfdjeiben, to depart this life Wrfdwrinben, to disappear *er|lreid)en, to pass away, to elapse »er|htmmen, to grow dumb Dertrocfnen, to dry up sewelfen, to fade sernwfen, to decay ijorbringen, to press forward loacfyfeni to grow toanbern, to wander Weidjen, to yield, to give way loerben, to become, to get jerfatten, to fall to ruins jerfpringen, to burst i'jfrieren, to freeze over jurucffetyren, to return juriicf treten, to step back jufammentrefTen, to meet together ;■— and all separable verbs compounded with Wei&en, f«$ren, fatten, folgen, ge» |en, fommen. serburflen, to die of thirst The following intransitive verbs, which express motion produced by the acting power of the subject, are conjugated with f e t n, when a refer- ence to a place or space is denoted ; with 6, a i e n , when expressing a mere activity, a continuous state without a change or transition of their subject from one state into another. (Ellen, to hasten fltegen, to fly ppfen, to hop Hettern, to climb friedjen, to creep Iaufen, to run vcitett, to ride on horseback retfen, to travel fdjrotmmen, to swim fpringen, to spring fleigen, to mount 262 REFLEXIVE VEBBS. Verbs reflexive in German, but not in English. Obs. When reflexive verbs are compounded with a separable prefix, they must be conjugated with Ijafcn (see 154 and 156). Sid) anmajjen, dat. to presume fid) anne^men, gen. to take care of fid) argern, itber, to be vexed fid) auffiibren, to behave fid) aufljalten, to sojourn fid) aufb>Iten, fiber, to criticize fid) ciugetn, fiber, to express one's self fid) bebanfen, fur, to return thanks fid) bebenfen, to consider fid) bebtenen, gen. to make use of fid) befinbjn, find one's self (feel) fid) bcftetfien or fid) befleipigen, to en- ■ deavor diligently fid) begeben, to repair fid) begeben, gen. to give up fid) kljdfcn, to make shift fid) beftagcn, iibet, to complain fof fid) bemadjtigen, grew, to take possession fid) befinnen, ^en,. to recollect fid) befireben, to endeavor fid) betragen, to behave fid) betrinfen, to get drunk fid) betriiben, fiber, to be afflicted fid) bficfen, to stoop (td) einbilben, ace, to be conceited fid) einbilben, iefTeit[8]/ on this side, gen. bltvdj, through, ace. entgegen, towards, dat. fur, for, ace. gegen, against, towards, dat. gegeniioer, opposite, dat. gemctjj, conformable [to], dat. tyalfcen or tyal&er, on account [of], yera. Winter, behind, dat. or ace. (Less. 68). in, in, dat. — into, ace. (Less. 68). itmer$al6, within, gen. jcnfett[3], on that side, beyond, gen. rmfr, by -virtue [of], gen. Icing3, along, ^rere. or dat* laut, according to, gen. mit, with, e becten, «. a. to cover. SBebiente, m. «., ^Z. -n, servant. 6 e bfirfen, v. vr. to need, want. i e enbigen, v. a, to finish, terminate. i e fe^len, «. ir. to command, order. i e ftnben, v. refl. to find (to feel). fcefteijjigen, *. ir. refl. to endeavor, apply one's self. fcegegnen, v. n. & refl. to meet, hap- pen to. lieginnen, v. ir. to begin, undertake begleiten, v. a. to accompany. Segleitcr, m. s. companion. 266 VOCABULARY. GEBMAN AND ENGLISH. Segtiif, m, 8., pi. -e, notion. J e fallen, 0. ir. to keep, retain. ici, prep, by, near, at. kibe, adj. both. SBcin, n. *., pi. -t, the leg. icino^c, ado. almost, nearly. icijammen, adv. together. Seifpiel, n. s.,pl. -e, example ; jum — , for example. Mjien, v. ir. to bite, betannt, adj. acquainted. i t flagen, «. a. to lament, deplore; v. refl. to complain. 1 e flemmeit, t\ a. to press. Seleibtgen, v. a. to offend. t e lo^nen, v. a. to reward. Selo^mtng, /. *., pi., -en, reward. fceqn cm , adj. commodious, convenient. SBetg, m. «., f>£. -e, mountain. Jctgen, v. ir. to hide, conceal, ierften, j>. ir. to burst. Senifr m. s. calling, vocation, icrfl^mt, adj. renowned, celebrated. r-eficiten, adj. discreet, modest. 33ef$etben$eit, /. «. modesty. i e fimiitp en, r. a. to soil, dirty. Sefen, to. *. broom. t e fiimen, «. ir. & re/?, to recollect. t e fl&en , t>. ir. to possess, oeffent, t>. refl. to better, improve. 5 c forgot, t. a. to take care; ©ef<$afte — , to dispatch business. SBefudj, to «., pi. -t, visit. t e fucfyen, «. a. to visit. I e ftrafen, ®. a. to punish, ieten, n. vr. to pray, say prayers, fc c tragen, u. ir. & refl. to behave. fcetrojfen, participle & 0$. surprised, ietruot, a<#. afflicted; — feiti, to feel sad. e triigen, v. ir. to cheat. 33etriiger< m. s. cheat. Sett, n. s., pi. -en, bed. beurt^eilen, n. n. to judge, criticise. Seutel, to. s. bag, purse. be»or, tonj. & ad®, before ; — ft e $ e n , v.ir. to impend, to be about to occur or take place, bettegen, e. ir. to move, induce. 6 e tuetnen, •». a. to weep. S3et»et3, to. *., pZ. -e, proof. SBettotyner, to. a. inhabitant. 6 e rounbern, v. a. to admire. Setounberung,/.*.,^. -en, admiration. bejaMen, ■«. u,. to pay. bewujjt, adj. conscious ; fi d} — fein, to be conscious of. Megen, v. ir. & refl. to bend. Siet, n. t. beer, bieten, v. ir. to bid, offer. Sidct, 71. «., #J- -c, ticket. Sinben, v. ir, to bind, tie. Sirne,/. *., pi. -n, pear. Hi, eonj. & adv. until, up to. bitten, u. tr. to beg, request, ilafcn, 7). ir. to blow (sound). SBIatt, n. s.,pl. -er & Traod. leaf. Man, adj. blue bleiben, t>. ir. to remain, stay. blcicft, adj. pale. SBIet, re. *. lead; — ft i f t , m. s.,pi. -t, lead pencil. Mufen, v. n, to gleam, look, bltnb, adj. blind ; -t, m. «., pi. -n, blind person. 33Itf , m. *., 2>J. -e, lightning, blifcn, d. ra. to lighten. Mop, omf, /. g., pi -en, chronicle. Eigane, /. *., pj. -n, cigar. 267 Eitrone,/.*.,pZ. -n, citron. Eonceri, n. s., pi. -e, concert. 2). En, oel, ». *. example. gafyren, v. ir. to go in a carriage, drive, to carry. gatte, m. «., pi. -n, falcon. fallen, v. ir. to fall. falte, <&(?». in case (that). fangen, v. ir. to catch. garte,/. *.,#£ -n, color. gag, m. *., jjZ. -er, & mod barrel. fofl, adv. almost. faulf adj. idle, lazy. gauft, /. *., pi. -e, & mod. fist. fedjten, v. vr. to fence. geber, /. «., p£. -n, pen, feather ; -mefc fer, n. s. pen-knife. fefclen, ». n. & imp. to err, fail, mis- take, to ail, be the matter with. getter, m. s. fault, mistake. geinb, m. s., pi. -e, enemy. gelb, n. 8., pi. -er. field;— ku, m. s. agriculture. genfter, n. s. window. fewer, adj. & adv. further. fertig, adj. ready. fett, adj. fat. gigur, /. «., pi. -en, figure. ftnben, ». ir. to find. ginger, m.s. finger; -$ut, m.s. thimble. gifdj, m. s., pi. -e, fish. glaf^e, /. «., pZ. -n, flask, bottle. gleifdj, n. s. flesh, meat. fleifjig, adj. diligent. gltege, /. «., pi. -n, fly. fliegen, v. ir. to fly. flie^en, d. *r. to flee. fiiegen, v. ir. to flow. glofj, m. s.,pZ. e, &mod. raft. gtitget, m. s. wing. gtur,/. «., p£. -en, field, plain, level ground. glujj , m. s., pi. -e, & mod. river. folgen, v. n. to follow, obey. folglidj, adj. subsequent ; adv. & eonj. consequently. foltern, v. a. to torment, rack. fort, adv. away. grage, /. s., pi. -n, question. fragen, ■». a. to ask. grau, /. «., #Z. -en, woman. grd'ulein, n. «; (diminutive of Frau), Miss. frei, adj. free. greifyett, /. «., pi. -en, freedom. freffcn, ». ir. to eat (applied to ani- mals). greube,/. *., i?Z. -n, joy. greunb, m.s., pi. -e, friend; -f<$afl> /. *., pi. -en, friendship. frteren, v. ir. to freeze. frifcr), adj. fresh ; adv. newly. frofy (eomp. freljer), a<#. joyful. , 270 VOCABULARY. &EBMAN AND ENGLISH. 8frucf)t, / s. pi. -e, & mod. fruit; frudjrtar, adj. fruitful. frity, adj. & adv. early. Srit§|tucE, n. s. breakfast, ftiiljjlutfen, v. a. to breakfast. gitdj*, m. »., pi. -e, & mod. fox. futrfen, v. a. to feel, perceive. fiifjreit, «. a. to lead. fitilcn, d. a. to fill. fitr, prep. for. gurdjt, /. *. fear. Sfiirjl, m. «.,j>J. -en, prince, duke. %u%, m. »., pi. -e, & mod. foot ; ju — , on foot. ©a&el,/. *.,pZ. -n, fork. gatyten, ®. ir. to ferment. ganj, 0$. whole, entire ; adv. quite. ©arten, m. s.,p£. mod. garden. ©eirtner, m. 8. gardener. gebciren, v. vr. to bring forth. geben, v. vr. to give. ©etet, n. «., pi. -e, prayer. g e Meten, v. vr. to command. ©eMtgf, n. s. chain of mountains. gebradjt, brought. ©cfcraudj, m. «., pi. -t, & mod. use, usage, ©eburtgtag, m. *. birth-day. gebei^en, v. vr. to prosper, ©ebtdjt, n. «., pi. -e, poem. g e fatten, v. ir. to please. gefangen, adj. imprisoned, ©efangene, m. *. prisoner, ©efangmg, n. s., pi. -e, prison, ©efolge, n. s attendant. ©efiif)I, n. s. feeling, gegen, prep, towards, against, gegeniifcer, prep, opposite. g e JBrt, heard ; belongs, g e^otc^en, v. n. to obey. getybren, v. n. to belong, ge^orfam, adj. obedient, ©etfl, m. 8., pi. -er, ghost, spirit, gelb, adj. yellow, ©elb, n. *., pi. -et, money. ©elegen$eit, /. *., pi. -en, occasion, ©eletyrte, m. «., pi. -n, learned man. gelingen, v. vr. to succeed, gelten, v. ir. to cost, to be valuable. ©emalbe, n. s. picture, painting, ©emiife, n. 8. vegetables. gemut^Udj, adj. good-natured, kind- hearted, genau, adj. precise, ©eneral, m. «., pi. -e, & mod. general, genefen, v. ir. to recover, geniegen, v. ir. to enjoy, to eat. genomnicii, taken, genbt^igt, adj. obliged, gemig, adj. & ado. enough. ©enujj, m. s.pl.-t, & mod. enjoyment ©ecgra^te, /. ». geography. ©epd'tf, n. «., pi. -e, baggage, lug- g e ralfyeit, v. ir. to come, hit or fall upon, to thrive. gered)t, adj. just. gem, adv. gladly, with pleasure, ©efanbte, m. «., pi. -n, ambassador, ©efang, m. »., pl.-t, & mod., song. gefdjel)en, v. ir. to happen. ©efdjenf, n. s.,pl. -e, gift, present. ©efd)id)te, /. s. history, narrative. gefdjtfft, adj. clever, skillful. gefdjofjen, see fc^iefjett. gefprocften, see foredjen. ©ejtalt, /. s., pi. -en, form, geflent, adv. yesterday. VOCABULARY. — ENGLISH AND GERMAN. 271 gefunb, adj. healthy; -tyett, /. *. health. ©etjatter, i&. «., pi. -n, godfather, ©eroirm, m. «., gain, profit, gcninnett, v. ir., to gain, win. geroiSfyneit, v. a. & imp. to accustom. ©e»ofyn$eit, /. »., pi. -en, custom, habit, gerootynlidj, adj. customary, gierig, adj. eager. gtepen, «. ir. to pour. [soned cup ©iff, n. s. poison ; -6ed)er, m. 8. poi- glansen, «. a. to shine, glitter, glcurten, d. a. to believe, glcidj, adj. equal, even, like ; adv. equally. gleic§en, v. ir., to resemble. gtetdJRwIjt, conj. nevertheless, gleiten, ». ir. to glide, slide, gttmmen, «. w\ to glimmer, glow, ©lotfe,/. *.,pi. -a, bell. glutfltcfj, adj. fortunate, happy. ©olb, -en, adj. gold. ©ott, w». «., pi. -er, & raod. God. ©rafc, m. «., p?. -er, & mod. grave. grafcen, ■». ir. to dig. grctfen, ®. ir. to catch. ©mf, m. «., p£. -en, count. ©rauen, n. s. horror ; v.n.&c imp. to abhor, fear. ©reia, w. *., pi. -ti old man. grog/ «<$■ great, grand ;-»ater, grand- father ; -mutter, grandmother.. ©ruft, /. s., pi. -e, & mod. grave, tomb. grita, affij". green. gritnen, v. n. to become green ; to flourish. ©ulbert, m s. florin (a coin). gimfltg, adj. favorable. ©it te, /. *. kindness, gittig, adj. good, kind. §aar, n. s., pi. -e, hair. tyageln, v. imp. to hail. §att, adj. half. $aI3, to. s., #?. -e, & mot?, neck. fallen, ■». ir. to hold, keep, cling to. $amtner, to. «. hammer. §anb, /. s., pZ. -e, & too<2. hand ; -fdjufy, to. «. glove. §anblung, /. s. action, fangen, «. ir. to hang. pngert, v. a. to hang, tyarr, ad;', hard. §ofe, to. s., pi. -n, hare. §eer, n. «., pi. -e, army. 4>eerbe,/. *., pi. -«, herd, flock. £eft, ». 8., pi. -e, copy-book. !>eibe, m. s., pi. -tt, heathen. tyeilen, v. n. to heal. §eimitt§,/. 8. home, fyeijjen, i*. ir. to call, command. fielb, to. «., pi. -en, hero. Jelfett, w. ir. to help. Jeff, ffl<$. clear, light. 272 'VOCABULARY. — GERMAN AND ENGLISH. $elm, to. 8., pi. -e, helmet. §emb, n. s., pi. -en, shirt. Renter, to. s. hangman. $enne, /. s. hen. tyerauS, adv. out , -Sringen, v. ir. to bring to light. tyernadj, adv. after, afterwards. $err, m. «., pi -en, master, Sir. §errti$, ad/, beautiful. £er }, 71. «., jpi. —en, heart. $eute, aocl) (l)6i)er, am ^oc&flen), adj. high. Ijoffen, ». to. to hope. j^oflid), ad?, polite. §6fye,/. «., p?.-n, hight. $oi)te,/. *.,pt -n, cavern, pit. §olen, v. a. to fetch. .fxrtj, ra. «., pi. -er, & mod. wood. tyotstdjt, adj. woodlike, wooden. l)6ren, v. a. to hear. pSfdj, adj. pretty. £ugeT, to. «. hill. fmlm, to. *. hen. £ur)n$en, to. s. little chicken. 4>unb, to. «., pZ. -e, dog. hunger, to. s. hunger. t)ungern, v. a. to hunger. tymgrig, adj. hungry. $ut, to. «. pi. c, & TO0d. hat. , % ^Vowel). 3mmer, adv. always. in, prep, in, into. intern, conj. while, when, as. inbejj, tnbeffen, conj. in the mean time. 3nl)alt, to. s. contents, innen, adv. inside, within. Snfrft, n. »., pi. -en, insect, intereffant, adj. interesting, itten, v. to. & refl. to err. 3. (Consonant) 3a, adv. yes. iagen, v. a. to chase. Sa'get, to. «. hunter. Satyr, to. *■, ft -e, year. 3al)re«jeit, /. «. season, jammern, u. to. to lament, je, adv. ever, jeber, e, e8, pro». every. jebocf), conj. yet, however. Semanb, prow, somebody. jefct, adv. now. 3ube, to. «., p£ -n, Jew. Siingling, to. *., pi. -e, youth, young man. Saffee, to. s. coffee. fidftg, to. «., pi. -e, cage. Saifer, to. s. emperor ; - ll)um n. s. empire, fldlte,/. «., pi. -n, cold, coldness. $amm, to. *., jrf. -e, & mod. comb. fi'amndien, to. s. rabbit, fia'fe, to. «. cheese. Safce, /. s., pZ., -n, cat. faufen, ■«. a. to buy. VOCABULARY. GERMAN AND ENGLISH. 273 Jfaufmaittt, m. «., pi. -leute, mer- chant. fairnt, adv. scarcely, hardly. fcin, Reiner, pron. no, not any, none. fennen, i>. w. to know. fiinb, n. s., pi. -er, child. fittbtfdj, adj. childish. $ir$e, /. s., pi. -it, church. •Sttrfdje, /. «., pi. -it, cherry. .Staffe, /. s., pi. -it, class. Stasier, n. s., pi. -e, piano. ■ftleib, n. s., pi. -er, dress. JTIeibevfi^ranf/ to. s. wardrobe. fteibett, v. a. to dress. flew, adj. little, small. f I hitmen, v. ir. to climb. flingen, ». ir. to sound. flosfett, ®. a. to knock. ■Snaie, to. s., pZ. -it, boy. .Me, n. 8. knee. Jtodj, wi. s., pi -e, & too. ir. to lend. Seinwanb,/. *. linen, linen-cloth. Seftion, /. s., pi. -e n, lesson, lerncn, v. a. & n. to learn. Itfeii, «. ir. to read. Icfct, adj. last. Ceute, pi. persons, people, lieb, adj. dear, beloved. liebenSwiirbig, adj. lovely, amiable. Steb, n. «., pJ. -e r, song. liegen, d. *>. to lie, place ; bert$, od;'. praiseworthy. 80$, n. s., pi. -e r, & mod. hole. Eoffel, to. ». spoon. Sootfe, to. *. pilot. Cotte, to. «., pZ. -n, lion, titjjen, 0. ir. to lie, tell a falsehood. Sufi, /. s., pi. -e, & mod. pleasure, delight ; -fcaben, to have a mind. tt, v. a. to make. Wli&ijm, n. ». maiden, girl. 3Ragb, /. «. pi. -e, & mod. maid-ser- vant. SWat, n. 8. time (with numerals.) SJtciIer, m. s. painter. Stan, indef. pron. one; somebody, they, people, see Less. 57, Obs. I. mandjmal, adv. sometimes. SKantel, m. *., pi. & mod. cloak. SDJatrofe, to. *., jtf. -% sailor. SKatier,/. s.,pZ. -n, wall. SWaurer, to. «. mason. 2Rau3, /. «., pi. -e, & mod. mouse. SBlebaiHe,/. *., jrf. -n, medal. SHeer, n. 8. ocean. meljr, adj. & ado. more. meiben, v. ir. to shun. 2JleiIe,/. a., jpZ. -it, mile. meinen, «. re. to intend, mean. trteift, a(Z». most. SKetfter, to. *. master. metfen, v.'vr. to milk. SKettfdj, m. «., p£. -en, man, person. merfen, v. a. to mark, perceive. mefFen, v. ir. to measure. ■Ketall, n. «., jrf. -e, metal. 2Re&jer, to. «. butcher. mtetfyen, u a. to hire, rent. Wlity,/. 8. milk. migbrau^en, ». a. to misuse. 9Jtt(fetpter, m. «. evil-doer, criminal. mtjjfaffen, v. ir. to displease. mit, prep, with, by, at, on ; -brittgett, v. ir. to bring along or with; -ge< ben, v. ir. to go along or with any one ; -fijeilen, v. communicate. mitljin, conj. therefore, consequently. Siittag, m. *. noon, midday. 2JKttag«effeit, n. s. dinner. SKittet, n. 8. means, remedy. mittfjeilen, v. a. to impart, communi- cate. SKbbel, pi. furniture. mi>glic&, adj. possible. SRonat, to. «., pi. -e, month. 2Ronb, to. «. moon. 3)?oog, n. 8. moss. SDlorgen, to. s. morning; ad». to- morrow. 2Ror<)etttb>u, m. s. morning dew. miibe, adj. weary, fatigued. VOCABULARY. GEKMAN AND KI'.OMSH. 275 SMutfer, m. a. miller. SRnfif-, /. *. music; -letter, m. a. music-teaeher. SHutfy, m. a. spirit, courage. Gutter, /. a., pi. & mod,, mother. SK. 9cad>, prep. & adv. after; -aljmett, v. a. to imitate ; -bent, adv. after- wards ; conj. after, when ; -ben* fen, v. ir. to reflect ; -fyer, adv. after- wards ; — lafjtg, adj. careless, negli- gent; -tnittag, m. s. afternoon. mi) unb nad), adv. by and by. Sfadjricljt, /. a., pi. -en, intelligence. 9kdjt, /. a., pi. -e, & mod. night. Siabel,/. a., pi -n, needle. 9came, m. a., pZ. -it, name. Starr, m. a., pi. -en, fool. ttarrtfd), adj. foolish. neien, prep. near. ne^aten, v. ir. to take. nettt, adv. no. nennen, v. ir. to name. 9hfr, n. *., p?. -er, nest. ttett, adj. new. tteitltdj, adv. newly, lately. 9Ud)te, /. a., jpZ. -n, niece. lltdjt?, pron. nothing. nic^tsbefloitiettiger, adv. nevertheless. trie or ntemals, adv. never. 9Itett.anb, pron. nobody, no one. nirgenb ($), adv. nowhere. nod), conj. still, yet ; -einmal, once more. 9Jot§, /. «., pi. -e, & mod. need. nun, adv. & conj. now, at present ; -ja, well then. rntr, adv. only, but. 9htfj, /. «., pi. -e, & mod. nut ; -Sditm, m. s. nut-tree. Stolen, w. s. use, utility; nitfeen, ». a. & n. to make use of, to be of use. nitj)ltc§, adj. useful. o. D6, cow?', whether, if; -gletdj, conj. -fcf)on, corej. -wotyl, com,?', though, although, oien, adv. above. Dtf}, n. s. fruit. Dcean, m. a. ocean. £>d)3, m. a., pi. -en, ox. cbet, conj. or. Del, ra. «. oil. Dfen, m. a., pi. & mod . stove, oven, offen, adj. open ; -Jar, adj. manifest Dfftjier, to. a., pi. -e, officer. ijjfnen, v. a. to open, oft, adv. often, oft. DIjeim, m. *. uncle. oljne, prep, without. Dnfel, m. s. uncle. Dper, /. 9. opera. SDrt, m. «., pi. -er, & to<«2. place. $a«, ». «., p?. -e, pair, couple. 9)aalafi, to. *., pJ. -ti & towZ. palace. 3>antcffel, m. a., pi. -n, slipper, sparf, m., a. park. 3>fa^t, m. a., pi. -t, & mod. pM° stake. pfetfen, 0. ir. to whistle. SPfetl, to. a, p£. -e, arrow, pfennig, m. a., pi. -e, penny, spferbemarft, m. a. horse-market. 276 VOCABULARY. GERMAN AND ENGLISH. 9>f[anje,/ 3, pi -n, plant, fcflegen, v. a. to take care of. — v. to. to be wont to do. 3>flid)t,/. «., pi. -en, duty, spfjilofopljie, /. s. philosophy. Spiano, pianino, n. s. piano. portion, /. s.,pl. -en, portion. 9)o(l,/.«. post. 9>rcifibent, m. s., pj. -en, president. 3>reU, m. a., pi. -e, price, prize. §>rinj, m. a., pi. -en, prince; — ef|tn, /. a. princess. 9)refeilbr, to. s., pi. -en, professor. o. DuaclfalBer, to. a. quack. Dual, /. «., #?. -en, torment, pain, grief. Quelle, /. a., pi. -n, spring, fountain. quetten, v. ir. to spring, gush. m. SRttb, m. a., p?. -er, & mod. wheel. 3tanb, to. a., pZ. -er, & mod. edge. ratljcn, v. ir. to guess, counsel. Dcedjmmg, /. a., pi. -en, account, bill. redjtfertigen, v. refl. to justify. red)t$, adv. to the right hand. reben, v. a. & n. to speak, talk. Stebcntot, /. s., pi. -en, phrase, ex- pression. rcbli.i), adj. honest. SReblidjfeit, /. s. honesty, uprightness. SRegert, to. s. rain ; -iogen, to. a. rain- bow. regieren, v. a. to reign, govern. reiben, v. vr. to rub. reidj, adj. rich. SRetdj, to. a. reign, kingdom ; -ttyutn, to. a. riches. xeifr adj. ripe ; -en, v. n. to ripen. rein, adj. clean, pure. SReifc, /. «., j??. -n, journey. reifen, v. to. to travel. reijjen, v. ir. to tear. reiten, v. ir. to ride on horseback. rennen, v. ir. to run. reuen, ®. to. & imp. to repent. ried)en, «. ir. to smell. Sling, to. a., pi. -t, ring. ringen, v. ir. to ring, to wrestle. ringS, adv. around ; -umtycr, all around, rinnen, «. ir. to run, to flow. Scod, to. a., jji. -e, & mod. coat. SJofe, /. a., ^. -n, (diminutive 3I58» Iein) rose. 3Jop, m. a., pi. -e, horse. rot$» asd?'. red. SRiicf fe$r, /. a. return, rufen, v. ir. to call. ru$en, v. to. to rest. 9tu$m, to. a. renown, fame. rimb, (comp. runbtr), adj. round. 6. ©adje, /. «., pJ. -n, thing. fogen, v. a. to say, tell. oat}, to. a. salt. fammeln, b. a. to gather. ©anb, to. a. sand ; -luufte,/. a. desert ©org, to. «., j?Z. -e, & mod. coffin. (aufen, ®. ir. to drink (of animals). faugen, v. ir. to suck. fauer, adj. sour. fd)dblid), ad?', injurious. ©cjjafer, to. a. shepherd. fdjaffen, v. ir. to effect, create. fdjaflen, v. n. to sound. ©djanbe, /. a. shame. ftjanbtidj, adj. shameful.- VOCABULABY. GERMAN AND ENGLISH. 277 j^oifcm, v. a. to value, fdjeeren, v. ir. to shear, fdjeiben, v. ir. to separate. ©<$ein, m. s. shine ; appearance, fdjetnen, v. ir. to shine ; appear, seem. (Vfyelten, v. ir. to chide, scold. f^enfen, v. a. to make a present. fd)Wen, v. a. to send ; v. refl. to be suitable, fdjieien, v. ir. to push. fdjie|jen, v. ir. to shoot. ©cfyiffer, m. s. sailor. ft^inben, ». ir. to flay. ©<$tnfen, m. *. ham. ©$ta$t,/.«. battle, fdjtafen, v. ir. to sleep. fdjlafenb, participle, sleeping. fcfytagen, v. ir. to strike, beat. fdjledjt, «$. bad, mean. fdjleidjen, o. ir. to sneak, fdjletfen, v. ir. to grind. fdjletjjen, v. ir. to slit, split. f^Itejjen, ■». ir. to lock ; to shut, fdjltngen, v. ir. to sling, ©itylojj, n. s. lock ; castle. ©<$lu(]el, m. «. key. fcijinetjjen, v. ir. to throw, cast. f<$mclsm, v. ir. to melt, smelt, ©djmerj, m. *., pi. -en, pain, ache. f<$muj5ig, adj. dirty. ftnaukn, b. ir. to snort (of horses) ©djnee, m. s. snow, fctynetben, ». ir. to cut. ©cfyneiber, m. s. tailor, fdjneten, v. imp. to snow, ftjjnefl, adj. quick. fdjon, adv. already. (S^fin^ett, /. *.,j)Z. -en, beauty. ©$ote, /. «., pi. -n, pea. ©errant, TO. 8. pi. & WJ0tnbcn, v. ir. to disappear. » e t fpredjen, v. ir. to promise ; v. refl. to misspeak. Set ftetyen, «. ir. to understand. » erftt(t)en, v. as. to attempt. »ert$eibigen, v. a. to defend. aSerirauen, n. s. confidence; v. n. to trust ; v. a. to entrust. sertrotfnen, v. n. to dry up. serutfadjen, v. a. to cause. » e r nwnben, v. a. to wound. SJerwunberung,/. s- astonishment. 2Jertt>unf$itng, /. «., pi. -en, impre- cation. » er jet^en, v. ir. to pardon. Setter, m. «., pi. -n, cousin. Kiel, abnflnnig, a dj. m& A t crazy. wnfyrneljmen, e.ir.to observe, improve JBo-bj^ett, /. «., pi. -en, truth. VOCABULAEY. GERMAN AND ENGLISH. 281 n>ct:&rfi$einli$, ado. probably. SSaife, /. a., pi. -n, orphan. Sffialb, to. s., pi. -et, & mod. wood, forest. SBaltmtp,/. 8. walnut. SBanb,/. s.,pl. -e, & mod. wall, par- tition. SBanberer, to. s. wanderer, traveler. nwnbevn, v. n. to wander, travel. ttann, conj. & aeftj. when. Barm, adj. warm. ttarten, v. n. to wait. tsarum, adv. why. teaf^en, v. w\ to wash. totitn, v. ir. to weave. tteber, conj. neither; jsebet - noi$> neither-nor. SBeg, to. *., pi. -e, way, path. tt>egfiJ)tcten, v. a. to send away. ttet&Hcfj, adj. female. »ei$en, b. ir. to give way, yield. Weil, conj. while, because. SBein, m.s„ pi. -e, wine. itjeifen, v . ir. to point out, show weiffctgen, » a, to prophesy. tucit, adj. distant, far SBellc, /. «., pi -n, wave. SBelt, / s , pi. -en, world roenben, v. ir.. to turn trentg, ad/ & adv little, few. tt>enig|len$, aung, /. s.,jpl. -en, dwelling. SBolfe, /. «., pZ. -n, cloud. SBoIle,/. «. wool. roonacfy, adv. whereafter, woran, adv. whereat, whereon, worauf, ado. whereon. toorauS, adv. out of which. SBort, n. a., pi. -cr, & mod. word. SEBbrtcroud), to. «. dictionary, rooruber, adv. whereupon, wown, adv. whereof. munberit, v. n. re.fi. to be astonishna roimfdjeit, v. a. to wish. SBurotf to. &, pi. -tr, & mod. worm 8a$n, to. a., pi. -c, & mod. tooth. iartlid), adj. tender, kind. Saunt, to. «., /A -e, & mod. bridle. ■ 282 VOCABULARY. OEBMAN AND ENGLISH. Seidjen, n. a. sign. jeigen, v. a. to show. jet&en, v. ir. to accuse. 3ett, /. a., pi. -en, time. Settling, /. a., #Z. -en, newspaper. Selt, ra. «., pi. -en, tent. j e r Sredjen, v. ir. to break. j e tie gen, ®. a. to disjoin, dissect. Serlegung, /. *. dissection. jerreijjen, v. ir. to tear. J et (Wren, «. a. to destroy. SerjWnmg, /. *. destruction. jieljen, v. ir. to draw, march; to move. jiemlidj, adj. moderate; adv. tole- rably. Simmer, n. s. room, chamber. ju, prgp. to, at, in, on. iubringen, v. ir. to bring to ; to pass away (time). Slider, to. a. sugar. jucrft, adv. first, at first. juftieben, adj. contented. Bug, to. a., pi. -c, hmod. procession, draught. j u madjen, ». a. (separable) to shut. Sltnge, /. *., jpZ. -n, tongue. juriicf, ao$tteit. Acquire, v. erlattgett. Action, s. bie $anbltmg. Admire, v. Senmnbern. Afflicted, adj. oetriiltt. After, prep. nadj, nadjbem; -noon, s. bcr9?adjmittag: -wards, conj.mfy $er. Again, adv. isteber. Against, prep, gegen, wtber. Aged, adj. alt, Beia^tt. Agree (upon), v. fid) sera&reben. Agreeable, adj. angenefyn. Air, *. bte Cuft. Almighty, adj. allmddjttg. All, adj. all; not at all, ganj unb gar ntd)t; all around, rtngd umljer. Almost, adv. kinase. Alone, adv. attein. Already, adv. fd)on. Also, adv. audj. Alter, v. d'nbern. Although, conj. oogletdj, oifdjon. Always, aifd)en. Bid, «. fcteten, gebieten. Bill, «. bie 3£e$tnmg. Bind, *». iinben. Birth-day, s, bet ©ebuttdtag. Bite, v. beijjen. Black, adj. fdjwarj. Blame, v. tabeln. Bless, v. fegnen. Blessing, s. bet ©egen. Blow, v. fttafen. Blue, adj. Man. Boat, s. bad Soot Body, «. bet .RotBet, Seifc. Boil, «. fodjen. Book, *. bad Sud); -binder, bet Sud).- iinbet; -dealer or -seller, ber Suc$ tyanblet; -store, bet Sudjtaben. Both, adv. beibe. Bottom, s. ber Soben. Bough, s. bet Sffl. Box, *. bie Siidjfe. Brave, «$. tapfer. Bravery, s. bie £a|>fetfeit. Break, v. btedjen. jctbtedjen. Breakfast, s. tai gtufylucf; t>. frify* fliicEen. Breath, a. bet Slt^em. Bridge, s. bie SBtMe. Bring, v. bringen; -along, mitbtmgttt; -forth, gebaten; -to light, 'icrauS* bringen. Brook, s. ber Sad). Broom, s. bet Sefen. Brother-in-law, s. bet ©d)»ager. Brown, adj. Jrautt. Brush, *. bie Sitrfle. Build, v. bauen. Burdensome, adj. lafltg. Burn, v. brennen, setbtennen. Burst, v. berjtat. But, conj. a6et, attein, fonbertt. Butcher, *. bet glcifdjer, 5Refeger. Butter, s. bie Sutter. By, prep, an, au8, bet, son. Cage, «. bet Jfaftg. Call, «. rufen; to be called, l}ei|jen. Calling, «. bet Setuf. Calumniate, v. setla'umben. VOCABULAKY. ENGLISH AND GERMAN. 285 Cane, s. ber ©tod. Capital, s. bie £au|>tfiabt. Captain, s. bet flapitan. [baratt liegen. Care, take - of, v. (jflegen ; - about, Careless, adj. jmdjlaffigr untforft^ttg. Carriage, s. pi bie iEutfdje. [fe&en. Carry, v. tragen; - through, v. burd)» Castle, s. ba£ ©d)[ofj. Catch, v. fangen, gteifen. Cause, v. setutfadjen. Cautious, adj. »orfidjtig. Cavern, 8. bie $iify[e. Celebrated, adj, beriiljmt. Certainly, adv. getoijj ; jnwr. Chair, s. bet ©tufjl. Change, v. t»ed)feln; fid) finbetn. Charge, s. bie Soften ; v. Selaben. Chase, v. jttgen; s. bie 3ie Sodjter. Dawn, v. tagen. Day, s. ber Xag; to-day, ^eute ; - after to-morrow, iibermorgen. Dear, adj. t^euer, Iieb. Deceive, v. triigen, betriigen. Decision, *. bie (Entfctyeibutig. Deed, *. bie £§at. Defend, v. »ert§eibigen. Depart, v. abreifett. Deplore, v. fceflagen. Depth, *. bie £iefe. Deserve, v. serbienen. Design, s. bie 3lbp$r. Destroy, v. jer|loreii. Destruction, s. bie 3er(lonmg. Detain, v. (tuf&alten. Dictionary, s. iai SSJiSrterbud). Die, v. fterben. Different, adj. serfdjieben. Difficult, adj. fcfyroer. Dig, v. graben. Dine, v. fpcifen. Dinner, s. bfl8 ffiittagejfen. Directly, adv. fofort. Dirty, adj. fdjmufctg; v. bejcfjmufcen. Disappear, v. &erfdjnrinben. Displease, v. mijjfaHen, serbriejjen. Dissatisfied, adj. uitjufricben. Divide, v. fye'iltn, jetlegra. Door, t. bie £$ure. Down, adv. ai, fyxai, 'fcinab. Dozen, s. bai ©ufccnb. Draw, v. jieljen. Dream, v. troiumen. Dress, «. antletben; s. ba8 Sleib. Drink, v. trinfttt; (of animals) fttttfen. Drive, v. treiben, jagen. Dry, adj. twtfen; v. (-up) settrotfneit. During, prep, roatyrenb. Duty, *. bie 3>flic&t. Dwell, v. iwfcnett. Dwelling, *. bie SBofmumj. E. Eager, adj. gterig. Early, adj. friifc. Earth, s. bie Srbe. Easy, «$. leic&t. Eat, ■». effen; (of animals) freffen. Edge, «. bet SRanb. Else, adv. fonfi. Emigrant, s. ber 3tu3»anberer. Emperor, «. ber ftaifer. Empire, *. ba« tfailert^um. Empty, adj. leer. Endeavor, s. fid) befleifjigen. Enjoy, «. geniefjen; fid) crfreuen. Enjoyment, *. bie gteube, ber ®emrg. Enough, adj. genug. Entertaining, <&$. unrerb>ftrab. Entertainment, s. bie Unterbaltong. Entire, ae?». ganj. Equal, adj. gleid). Err, v. fid) irren. Esteem, «. ad)ten. Even, adv. fetbfl, gleid). Evening, s. ber Slbenb ; in the -, brt Slbenba. Ever, adv. je, jemalS. Evil, s. ba8 ttebel; -doer, ber SBhffc tljater. Examine, «. itnterfud)en. Example, s. ba« Seifpiel. Excel, «. iibertreffen. Exercise, ». bie SCufgabe. Expect, v. etroarten. Expenses, s. bie Sofleti. VOCABULARY. ENGLISH AND GERMAN. 287 Experience, s. bie Stfa^tung. Expression, s. bte StebenSatt. Extremely, adv. augerfl. Eye, s. ba« Sfage. F. Faithful, adj. t*m. " Faithless, adj. tteulc*. Fall, v. fallen. False, adj. falfdj. Fame, *. bet 0tu$m. Farmer, s. bet Sauet, fianbmann. Fast, adj. f$netf. Fatigued, adj. ntitbe. Fear, s. bie gut<$t; «. ji<$ fut^ten. Feel, b. ffi&len; - sad, bettu&t fein. Feeling, s. baS ©efii§I. Ferment, «. ga^ten. Fetch, v. §oIett. Field, s. ba3 gelb. Fight, ». fec&ten, flreiten. Fill,*, fiitten. [aitSfefcen. Find, v. ftnben ; fief) beftttben ; - fault, Finish, «. Seenbtgen. First (at), adv. etfl, juetjl. Fish, s. bet gtf$. Flame, *. bie glamme. Flay, v. fdjinben. Flax, *. bet gla$8. Flock, s. bie |>eetbe. Florin, s. bet ©itlben (a coin). Flourish, v. gtihten. Flow, v. fttefjen, tinnen. Fly, s. bie gliege. Follow, «. folgen. Fool, «. bet £5ot; -ish, adj. f&iiticbt. Foot, 8. ber gufj. For, ^wep. fiit; conj. benn. Force, ». jroingen ; s. bie fitaft. Forehead, s. bie Stitne. Forenoon, s. bet ScnnUtag. Foresee, u. uottyetfeljett. Forest, s. bet SEBalb. Forget, v. setgeffen. Fork, s. bie ©abet. Form, «. bie ©eftalt. [etjemafe. Former, adj. sotig ; -ly, adv. ftii^et, Fortunate, anb. Hang, v. pngen; -man, s. ber £ettfer, Happen, «. gefdjeljen. Happy, adj. gliitfltdj. Hard, adj. tyart, fdjwer. Hardly, a«Z». faum. Hate (hatred), s. ber |)ag; v. Haffen. Head, *. ber fiopf; -ache, Heal, e. $eiten. Health, «. bie ®efunbl)eit. Healthy, adj. gefimb. Hear, ®. Ijoren. Heart, *. tai §erj. Heat, s. bie $ifce. Heathen, s. ber £eibe. Heavy, a$\ jtfjwer. Helmet, s. ber §elm. Help, v. tyelfen. , Hen, s. bie fcentte. Herd, «. bie $eerbe. Here, adv. rjier; -upon, $ierIten. Hole, 8. ba« £o<$. Home, 8. bie $eimafl}. Honest, a$. e$rfu$. Honesty, s. bie Steblidjfeit. Hope, v. $o(fen. Horror, 8. bas ®rauen. Horsemarket, s. ber SPferbemttrft. Hour, 8. bie ©tunbe. How, ad/o. toiej -much, tote siel. However, conj. inbepn, jebodj. Hunger, 8. ber hunger. Hungry, adj. $ungrig. Hunter, 8. ber Sager. If, conj. toemt, o&, toofern. Imitate, v. na^men. Immediately, adv. fogteti^, fofort. Important, adj. toi^tig. Imprisoned, participle, gefangett. Improve, v. ftd> klfern; fortfdjreitett. In, into, prep, in, inte ; -stand, 8. bai VOCABULABY. ENGLISH AND GERMAN. Jew, s. bet Sube. Joiner, «. bet Sif^let. Journey, s. bit SRetfe. Joy, *. bie gteube. Joyful, adj. fro^. 'Just, adj. gerec&tj adv. eien; -now, fo eben. Keep, v. fatten. Kill, ». tobten; (butcher) fdjlaifcten. Kind, adj. giitig. Kindness, ». bie ©ute. Kingdom, s. t>a$ $ijnigwi$. Kitchen, s. bie JJiidje. Knave, *. ber ©djurle. Knee, g. bai Bnit. Knock, v. flopfen. Know, v. roifieit, (ertneii. L. Labor, s. bit Strbett ; v. arMtcn. Lame, adj. latjm Lament, v. beflagen, iammetn. Land, s. bai Sanb. Language, «. bie SBteijler. Mean, v. meitten. Means, s. bit SWittet. Measure, ®. melfen. Medal, «. bie STOebaiKe. Meet, a. begegnen, treffen. Merchant, s. ber fiaufmann. Messenger, «. ber SBdte. Metal, 8. bai Wtdatt, Mile, a. bie SKeile. 290 VOCABULARY. ENGLISH AND GERMAN. Milk, s. melfen. Miller, *. ber SKuHer. Mind (to have a -), 2u(i $a6en. Miss, s. baa ftrdulein. Mistake, *. ber Seller, Srrtyum. Mistaken (to be), v. fld) irren. Misuse, s. mijjbraudjen. Mcckery, s. ber ©pott. Moment, s. ber Slugenilia. Money, «. ba3 ©elb. . Monkey, s. bet Slffe. Month, s. ber SKonat. Moon, s. ber 5Honb. More, aeft>. mefyr; -over, fioerbie3. Morrow (to-), adv. morgen; day after Mortal, adj. jtailid). [-, iibermorgen. Moss, adj. baa SKooa. Mountain, a. bcr SBerg ; (chain of mountains), baa ©efcirge. Move, v. rii^ren, ieroegen. Much, adv. siel; how much, tote siel. N. Name, s. ber 9lame; v. nemten. Narrative, s. bie ©efd)id)te, ©rja^lung. Near, prep, nafye, nefcen, an, 6ei. Nearly, adv. beinajje. Neck, s. ber 4>«I«. Necessary, adv. niitlrfg. Need, s. bie SJoty; v. oraud)en. Needle, s. bie 9?abel, 9la$nabel. Neglect, v. aernadjlafftgm. Neglected, participle, »crnad)Iaffigt. Negligent, adj. nadjlafjtg. Neighbor, s. ber Siadjtar. Nest, s. baa SJefl. Never, adv. ttie, niemaW. Nevertheless, adv. ntd)t8 beflo Keniger. Newly, adj. neulid), frifd). Newspaper, 8. bie Settling. Next, adj. na'djji, folgenb; anbere. Niece, s. bie 9Hd)te. Night, s. bie SRadjt. Noon, s. ber STtittag. [ma% Not, adv. ntd)t ; - at all, ganj unb gar Nothing, adv. nid)ta. Now, adv. }e|t, nun. Nowhere, aaar. Palace, s. ber 5>ala(l. Pale, a<$. blajj, ileid). Paper, 8. baa papier ; (news-), bie TOOABUIiAEY. ENGLISH AND GEBMAN. 291 Parasol, «. ber ©onnenfdjirm. [3eihmg. Pardon, t>. serjeifjen. Parents, s. bie Qsltew. Park, s. ber $Parf. [»orbeige§en. Pass (through), v. burcfcretfen; - (by), Pay, ». iejaljlen. Pea, s. bie ©cb>te. Penny, *. ber 3>fermig. People, *. baa Sotf, bie Seute. Perceive, v. iemerfen. Perhaps, adj. sielleicfit. Physician, s. ber 3trjt. Piano, s. bag Easier. Picture, s. baa ©ema'Ibe, Silb. Piece, a. ba8 ©titif . Pile, s. ber 3>fabt. Pit, s. bie §o$le. [etnlegen. Place,*, ber Drt; v. legen; -(into, bin* Plant, 8. bie spftauje. Play, a. finelen; *. baaSpiel; -ground, ber ©)>ielpla| ; -thing, ba« ©pieljeug. Pleasant, adj. angenc|m. Please, «. gefaHen. Pleasure, «. ba8 SSergniigen. Pocket, s. bie SEafdje; -handkerchief, Poet, *. ber Stater, [baa Safdjentttcty. Point * bie ©pifee. Poison, 8. baa ®ift. Pond, *. ber £eirtnj, S5iir|t. Prison, 8. baa ©efoingnijj . Prize, «. ber 3>reia, bie Selo^mtttg. Probably, adv. n>atyrfd)einlia). Profit, «. ber ©erointt. Promise, v. serfi>red)en. Proper, adj. eigen, ^offa** Prophesy, v roeiffagen. Prospect, 8. bie Sfaaficfjt. Prosper, v. gebeib>n. Punish, v. bejlrafett. Pupil, 8. ber ©dottier. Pure, adj rein. Puree, s. ber Seutel, bie Siirfe. Push, v. flojjen. Put, v. fleflen; - on, $re«}ett. See, v. feb>n. Seethe, v. fleben. Send, v. fenben; - away, fortfd)i(feit. Separate, v. fonbcrn, fdjeiben. Set, v. fejen; (sun), untergetyen; -outi v. abreifen. Shepherd, *. ber ©djafer. Shine, n. fcbdnen, glanjen. Shoot, v. fdjiefjen. Short, adj. furj. Shortly, adv. fiirjlid). Show, v. jetgen. Shudder, v. fdjaubern. Shut, v. pmacben, frtjlicjjen. Sick, adj. franf, unwobl. Silent (to be), v. fdjttetgen. Silk or silken, adj. feiben. Silver, *. iai ©tlber. Since, prep, feit; adv. ba. Sing, v. ftngen. Sink, v. finfctt, unterge§en. Sir, ». $err. Sit, v. fi&en. -down, fid) nieberfejttt. Sleep, v. fdjlafett. Sleeping, participle, fdjlafenb. Slide, v. gleiteit. Sling, v. fd)lingen. Slipper, i. ber 3>antoffeI. Smell, v. rtedjen; s. ber ©entd). Smelt, v. fdjmeljen. Sneak (to a place), v. $infd)leid)eil. Snort, v. fdjnauben. Snow, v. fcbncien; s. ber ©djnee. So, adv. fo, olfo. Soil, v. befcbmuteit/ befajmieren. Soldier, ». ber ©olbat. Sometimes, adv. mandJmal. VOCABTTLABI. — ENGLISH AND GERMAN. 293 Soon, adv. Baft. Sorrow, s. bie Serge, ba« Cetb. Sorry (to be), leib t$mt. Soul, *. bie ©eete. Sound, v. flingen, fdjaffeit, blafeit. Sparkle, v. glimmett. Speak, v. forec&eit. Spend, v. auSgeben; (- time) juoringen. Spin, v. ftjtmten. Spirit, s. bet ©eifl. Spit, v. fpeieit. Spite (in -of), prep. »rofc, tmgeadjtet. Spoil, v. serberben, »ert»i>b>en. Spoon, s. ber SBffel. Spring, v. fbringett, queHett; *. bie Quelle. Sprout, v. fimefjen. Squander, v. scrfctjwenbett. Stake, s. ber SPfabl. Stand, v. (leben. Star,. *. ber ©tern. Stay, v. bleiben. Steal, v. (leffen. Steamboat, s. bad Sampfbost. Steel, s. ber ©taljt ; -pen, bie ©tab> Still, adj. (lid; adv. m>c§. [feber. Sting, s. ber ©tac&el. Stove, ». ber Dfen. Street, *. bie ©trajj t Strength, ». bie ©tarfe. Stretch out, v. an8|tretlen. Strife, 8. ber ©treit. Strike, v. f<$tagen, r)oum. Strong, adj. flarf. Substantive, s. bai £auptttort. Subdue, «. mtrerjodjen. Subject, *. ber Untertb>n. Succeed, v. gelingen, b u rcb fefcen. Suck, «. faugen. Suffer, v. leibett, bulben. Sun, «. bie ©onne. Swim, v. fcbnrimmen. Swine, «. ba« ©djwein. Swing, v. fc&rcingen. Swear, a. ffyworm. Sweat, «. ber < Swell, v. fcfyroettett. Talk, «. rebett. Take, v. nebmeit ; -(for), fatten (fur). Tea, «. ber £I)ee. Teacher, «. ber 2e6>er. Tear, v. jetreijjen. Tell, v. fagett. Tent, *. ba« Belt. Terror, s. ber ©<$reif, ©djreifen. Than, conj, a\$. Theme, «. bie 9f«fgttbe. Then, conj. benn; adv. bann, aWbarat. There, aefo. ba, bort ; -fore, be«balb f Thief, *. ber £>ieb [mitbin. Thing, n. bai Sing, bie ©a$e. Think, «. bcnfcn, ftmtett. Thirsty, adj. bur|lig. Though, e, tteu. Trunk, ». ber Jfoffer. Trust, «. ttauen, Dettranen. Truth, s. bie SDabtbttt. Turn, e. aenbenj -over, umtebten. Tyrant, s. bet Stytann. Ugly, adj. bajjti<§. Under, prep, imtet; -take, v. unlet* neb>nen; -stand, v. »etfle$en. Undress, v. auafteiben. Unite, v. seteinigen. Until, adv. bi$. Up, upon, prep. an. Upset, v. umfdjlagen. Use, v. gebtaud)enj (to be of-), nfijen; a. bet Slujjen. Useful, adj. niifclMf}. V. Valley, a. iai Z1)ci.l. Value, v. fdjofcen; ». bet SBettb. Venture, v. wagen. Victory, s. bet ©teg. View, a. bie 9lu3fidjt. Violet, «. ba« SSeil^en. Virtue, a. bie Xugettb. Virtuous, adj. tugenbbaft. Visit, s. bet SBefud) ; v. befud)en. Vocation, a. bet SBentf. Voice, a. bie ©limine. Volume, a. bet SBanb. ■w. Wait, v. ttatten. Walk, s. ftttjieten (geb>n). Wall, a. bie 3Rauer; -nut, «. bie SBaU' mtjj. Want, v. braudjen, bebittfen. War, a. bet Jfrieg. Wardrobe, a. bet Sleibct*S<$rant. Wash, v. wafdjen, bebiitfen. Water, a. ba8 SBaffet; (to -animals), v. ttd'nfen. Wave," a. bie SBeffe. Way, a. bet SBeg. Weak, adj. f3)t»ad). Weary, adj. niiibe. Weather, *. ba« SBettet. Weave, n. weben. Well, a. bet SBrumten; adj. tto^l. Wheel, «. ba« SRab. When, eonj. & adv. ttann, alS. Whence, aer 3trJeit«lifc^. World, *. bie SEBelt. Worm, s. bet Stem. Worth, adj. roertlj; to be -, gelten. Wrestle, v. ringen. Wring, v. ringen. Yard, «. bte ©He; ber $of. Year, s. baa 3otp$), Adolphus. Stegwten, Egypt. 2legi»ptcr, Egyptian. Stfiifa, Africa. "STmerifa, America. Ctmertfaner, American. STften, Asia. Saiern, Bavaria. Skier, Bavarian. Edfttt, Caesar. Eoln, Cologne, betitfd), German. ©euifdjtanb, Germany. ©eutfdjer, a German. ffibuarb, Edward. Smilie, Emily. Engtanber, Englishman. englifdj, English. granffitrt, Frankfort, granheid), Prance, granjofe, Frenchman. franjofifd), French, gran}, Francis, griebrid), Frederic. Oeorg, George, ©riedjenlanb, Greece. $etnrid), Henry. 3o$ann, John. Stalien, Italy. Stflliener, Italian, flarl, Charles, lateinifdj, adj. Latin. Subttrig, Louis. Citife, Louise. 5Wreufjen, Prussia. 3)reu§e, Prussian. 9Jom, Home. 5R6mcr, Boman. Stujjlanb, Russia. Stuffe, Russian. ©djweben, Sweden, ©djttebe, Swede. ©djweij, Switzerland. ©djttetjer, Swiss, ©optyie, Sophy, ©panien, Spain, ©panier, Spaniard. Sitrfei (Xmtet)), Turkey. SBien, Vienna. SBityelm, William. 296 ADDENDA TO VOCABULARY. GERMAN AND ENGLISH. abgereifl, partus, departed, set out. Slrmee,/. *., pi. -n, army. Slrjt, m. s.,pl.-t, &mod., physician. Slumenfianj, m. *., pi. -t, & mod., garland, wreath. Slut, n. s. blood. ©tujl,/. »., pi. -e» & mod., bosom. Earfyago, Carthage. bid, adj. thick, big. Bttbjtatyl, m. 8., pi. -t, & mod., theft. eben, adv. just, even, exactly. ErWeere, /. *., pt -ft strawberry. crboben, 0. a. to raise, lift up. trflingcn, v. irr. to resound, sound. Stt^ne, /. »., pi -iti flag, colors, stand- ard, [friend. greunbin,/. *., pi. Sfreunbinnen, female friityer, adv. formerly. gefouft, pas** partic. bought. $tmafijt, past partic. made. ©IaS, n. 8. glass. ©rammatif, /. 8., pi. -en, grammar. ©ra3, «. s. grass. §afer, m. 8. oats. fjaftcn, s. 7i. to cling, stay, remain fixed. [to manage. Ijanbeln, v. n. to act, deal ; also v. a. $of, m. 8., pi. -t, & mod., yard, court- So In, see Soln (page 295). [yard. $ugel, /. »., pi. -n, ball, bullet, Ueben, v. a. to love, like. STOeffer, ». s. knife. na$en, v. n. to draw near. 55apicr, n. 8. paper. 9>ferb, n. *., pi. -t, horse. [tion. sptyantafUf/. ».,pZ. -tt, fancy, imagina- rtdjt, adj. & (wZ». right, correct ; very. tin, m. 8. the (river) Rhine. Scene,/. *., pi. -n, scene, ©ctyeere, /. «., jjZ. -n» shears, pair of scissors, fefcimmenti n. m. to gleam, glimmer. ftfroarj, adj. black. Sd>n>ttfi, m. *. sweat. Seele,/. *.,j>Z. -n, soul. Sta^lfeber, /. *., pi. -n, steel-pen. ®to& to. *.,p£. -c, & mod., stick, cane. Strengei/. *. severity, lunte, /. *., pi. -n, aunt. Scaler, m. 8. German dollar( 72 cents). traumeni «. a. & n. to dream ; also, |td> traumen, to dream, to indulge in dreaming. Sqrannet,/. 8., pi. -en, tyranny, unjwetfelrjaft, adj. undoubtedly, sergiejjen, v. a. irr. to shed, spill. Sorijaben, m. 8. undertaking, design. DDttreten, v. n. irr. to step forth, present one's self. SEBaffe, /. 8. instrument, weapon; scarcely used except in pi. SBaffen. arms, armor. SSBaffenfluTftanb, m. 8. armistice, truce, roanbelni v. n. to walk, wander, travel, roeilen, v. n. to linger, delay. weittcn, v. n. to weep, lament. weig, (of toiffen, see page 120) know, teem (see wer). n>en (see wer). wer (see p. 86), proii. who. 3aun, to. 8., pi. -e, & mod., hedge, fence. lttbTt)(f)m,-paat partic. broken, jwifdjen. prep, between, among. ADDENDA TO VOCABULARY. 297 ENGLISH AND GEKMAN. Admirably, adv. oewunbernaroittbig, sortrefflid). Amusing, adj. amufant. Anything, adj. & pron. etttad. Apple, s. ber Styfel. Ass, s. bet 2fcl. Aunt, s. bie Xante. Barrel, s. baa gafj, bit Sonne. Beautiful, adj. fdjiin. Become, ■». merben;^. port. geroorben; Blood, *. baa Slut. [ — of, roerben 4Wrt.geSn)cf)en;(into pieces) Calf, s. baa fiatt. [serfroc&en. Cautious, adj. (-ly, ado.) uotfidjtig. Charge, v. (= demand), serlangen, Chronicle, s. bie Etyronif. [forbern. Clever, adj. gtjtytdt. Conversation, s. bie Untertwltung. Demand, *. forbern j s. bie gorberung. Diligent, adj. ftetjjig. Donkey, *. ber Efel. Elegant, adj. jterltdrj, anmutljtg. Empress, s. bie fiaiferin. Every, adj. & pron. ieber, jebe, jebeS. Fine, adj. fein; (pretty) fdjiin. Friend, s. ber greunb; fern, bie greun* Garden, s. bet ®arten. [bin. Glass, s. bai ©fea. Good, adj. gut. Grass, s. baa ©ra8. Hat, a. ber $ut. Horse, s. baa 3>ferb. House, «. baa §aua. At the house Key, a. ber ©djlnflTet. [of, Set. Knife, 8. baa SKeffer. Lady, ». bie Dame. Learn, e. letnen. Leech, s. ber SSIutegel. Letter, s. bet SBtief. Like, v. Iieocn. Mark, s. bie SDlarfe. Naughty, a$. unattig. Neither — nor, conj. roeber — nod}. Penknife, s. bai gebermefier. Poor, adj. arm. School, 8. bie ©d)ule. To — , in bie ©djule; from — ,au3 (»on)ber©d;uIe. Several, adj. serfdjiebene, me^rere. — times, »erfd)iebene (metyrere) 3>!al. Sharpen, v. a. fd)leifen, vrr. Ship, 8. baa Sdjiff. Slave, 8. ber ©fkse. Snake, s. bie @d)Iange. Some, ad;. & pron. einige ; etroa*. Son, s. bet ©otyt. Song, 8. ba« £ieb; bet ©efang. Stick, S: bet ©toil. Stream, s. bet ©ttom. Study, «. (htbiten, lernen. Summer, 8. ber ©ommer. Supper, s. bai St6enbefl"en. Sweet, adj. fufs. Tailor, 8. ber ©djneiber. Tooth, 8. ber 3«$n. Twelveo'clock(noon),2)Uttag;(night), Uncle, 8. bet D$etm. [3Bitte;nadjt. Very, adv. fe$r. Weight, s. baa ©eroidjtj (burden), bie What, pron. toai. [Safi. Which, pron. roeTdjer, -e r -ea. White, adj. roeif . Who, jww. roer. Whom, prora. went, wen (see p. 86). Wine, 8. ber SBetn. Wound, s. bie Sunbe; v. serwunben. Y7le National Series of S/a/idard School-Sooks, ENGLISH GRAMMAR. CLARK'S DIAGRAM SYSTEM. Clark's Easy Lessons in Language, Published 1ST4. Contains illustrated object-lessons of the most attractive iharac ter, and is couched in language freed as much as poseible from the dry technicalities of the sr.iencfi. of the science. Clark's Brief English Grammar, Published 1872. Part I. is adapted to youngest learners, and the whole forms a complete •' brief course " in one volume, adequate to the wants of the common school Clark's Normal Grammar, Published 1870, and designed to take the place of Prof. Clark's veteran " Prac- tical" Grammar, though the latter is still furnished upon order. The Normal is an entirely new treatise. It is a full exposition of the system as described below, with all the most recent improvements. Some of its peculiarities are — A. happy blending of Syntheses with Analyses ; thorough Criticisms of common errora in the use of our Language ; and Important improvements in the Syntax of Sen- tences and of Phrases. Clark's Key to the Diagrams, Clark's Analysis of the English Language, • Clark's Grammatical Chart, The theory and practice of teaching grammar in American schools is meeting with a thorough revolution from the use of this system. While the old methods offer proficiency to the pupil only after much weary plodding and dull memorizing, this affords from the inception the advantage of practical Object Teaching, address- ing the eye by means of illustrative figures ; furnishes association to the memory, Us most powerful aid, and diverts the pupil by taxing his ingenuity. Teachers who are nsing Clark's Grammar uniformly testify that they and their pupils find it the most interesting study of the school course. Like all great and radical improvements, the system naturally met at first with much unreasonable opposition. It has not only outlived the greater part of this opposition, but finds many of its warmest admirers among those who could not at first tolerate so radical an innovation. All it wants is an impartial trial to con- vince the most skeptical of its merit. No one who has fairly and intelligently tested it in the school-room has ever been known to go back to the old method. A great success is already established, and it is easy to prophecy that the day is not far distant when it will be the only system of teaching English Grammar. At file System is copyrighted, no other text-books can appropriate this obvious ar great improvement. Welch's Analysis of the English Sentence, lasBifl icon* 10 Remarkable for Its new and simple classification, its method of treating connec «ivee, its explanations of the idioms and constructive laws of the language, etc. The. National series of Standard SchoolSookt. ^. — ■■ ■ .... . *** MATHEMATICS— Continued. PECK'S HIGHER COURSE. Peck's Manual of Algebra, Bringing the methods of Bourdon within the range of the Academic Course. Peck's Manual of Geometry, By a method purely practical, and unembarrassed by the details which rathe; confuse than simplify science. Peck's Practical Calculus, Peck's Analytical Geometry, Peck's Elementary Mechanics, Peck's Mechanics, with Calculus, The briefest treatises on these subjects now published. Adopted by the great Universities ; Tale, Harvard, Columbia, Princeton, Cornell, &c. ARITHMETICAL EXAMPLES. Reuck's Examples in Denominate Numbers, Reuck's Examples in Arithmetic, These volumes differ from the ordinary arithmetic In their peculiarly practical character. They are composed mainly of examples, and afford the most severe and thorough discipline for the mind. While a book which should contain a complete treatise of theory and practice would be too cumbersome for every-day us*, the insufficiency of practical examples has been a source of complaint. higher mathematics. Macnie's Algebraical Equations, Serving as a complement to the more advanced treatises on Algebra, giving spe rial attention to the analysis and solution of equations with numerical coefficients. Church's Elements of Calculus, Church's Analytical Geometry, Church's Descriptive Geometry, 2 vols., These volumes constitute the " West Point Course " In their several department*. Courtenay's Elements of Calculus, A standard work of the very highest grade. Hackley's Trigonometry, With applications to navigation and surveying, nautical and practical geometry and geodesy. 21 The National Series of Standard SchoolSooks . HISTORY. Monteith's Youth's History. A HiBtory of the United States for beginners. It is arranged npon the catechetical plan, with illustrative maps and engravings, review questions, dates in parentheses (that their study may be optional with the younger class of learners), and interesting Biographical Sketches of all persons who have been prominently identified with the history of our country. Willard's United States, School and University Editions. The plan of this standard work is chronologically exhibited in front of the title- page ; the Maps and Sketches are found useful assistants to the memory, and dates, usually so difficult to remember, are so systematically arranged as in a great degree to obviate the difficulty. Candor, impartiality, and accuracy, are the distinguishing features of the narrative portion. Willard's Universal History. . The most valuable features of the " United States " are reproduced in this. The peculiarities of the work aro its great conciseness and the prominence given to the chronological order of events. The margin marks each successive era with great distinctness, so that the pupil retains not only the event but its time, and thus fixes the order of history firmly and usefully in his mind, Mrs. Willard's books are con- stantly revised, and at all times written up to embrace important historical events of recent date. Lancaster's English History, By the Master of the Stoughton Grammar School, Boston. The most practical of the " brief books." Though short, it is not a bare and uninteresting outline, but contains enough of explanation and detail to make intelligible the cavse and effect of events. Their relations to the history and development of the American people is made specially prominent. Willis' Historical Reader, Being Collier's Great Events of History adapted to American school ■. This rare epitome of general history, remarkable for its charming style and judicious selection of events on which the destinies of nations have turned, has been skillfully manipu- lated by Prof. Willis, with as few changes as would bring the United States into its proper position in the historical perspective. As reader or text-book it has few equals and no superiors. Berard's History of England, By an authoress well known for the success of her History of the United States, The social life of the English people is felicitously interwoven, as in fact, wiLh the civil and military transactions of the realm. Ricord's History of Rome Possesses the charm of an attractive romance. The Fables with which this history abounds are introduced in such a way as not to deceive the inexperienced, while adding materially to the value of the work as a reliable index to the character and institutions, as well as the history of the Soman people. Hanna's Bible History. The only compendium of Bible narrative which affords a connected and chrono- logical view of the important events there recorded, divested of all superfluous detail. Summary of History; American, French and English. A well-proportioned outline of leading events, condensing the substance of the more extensive text-book in common use into a series of statements so brief, that every word may be committed to memory, and yet so comprehensive that it presents an accurate though general view of the whole continuous life of nations. Marsh's Ecclesiastical History. Affording the History of the Church in all ages, with accounts of the pagan world during Biblical periods, and the character, rise, and progress of all Religions, as well as the various sects of the worshipers of Christ. The work is entirely non-sectarian, though strictly catholic. A separata volume contains carefully prepared Question! for class use. 23 The National Series of Standard School-Hoolks. NATURAL SCIENCE. FAMILIAR SCIENCE. Norton & Porter's First Book of Science, By eminent Professors of Yale College. Contains the principles of Nature Philosophy, Astronomy, Chemistry, Physiology, and Geology. Arranged on tla Catechetical plan for primary classes and beginners. Chambers' Treasury of Knowledge, Progressive lessons upon— first, common things which lie most immediately iround us, and first attract the attention of the young mind ; second, common objects from the Mineral, Animal, and Vegetable kingdoms, manufactured articles, and miscellaneous subBtances ; third, a systematic view of Nature under the various sciences. May be used as a Reader or Text-book. NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. Norton's First Book in Natural Philosophy, By Prof. Nobton, of Yale College. Designed for beginners. Profusely illustrated and arranged on the Catechetical plan. Peck's Ganot's Course of Nat. Philosophy, The standard text-book of France, Americanized and popularized by Prof. Peck, of Columbia College.' ' The most magnificent system of illustration ever adopted in an American school-book is here found. For intermediate classes. Peck's Elements of Mechanics, A suitable introduction to Bartlett's higher treatises on Mechanical Philosophy, and adequate in itself for a complete academical course. Bartlett's synthetic, and analytic, Mechanics, Bartlett's Acoustics and Optics, A system of Collegiate Philosophy, by Prof. Babtlett, of West Point Military Academy. Steele's 14 Weeks Course in Philos. (see P . 34) Steele's Philosophical Apparatus, Adequate to performing the experiments in the ordinary text-books. The articles will be eold separately . if debired. See special circular for details. GEOLOGY. Page's Elements of Geology, A volume of Chambers' Educational Course. Practical, simple, and eminent!! calculated to make the study interesting. Emmons' Manual of Geology, The first Geologist of the country has here produced a work worthy of his repu tition. Steele's 14 Weeks Course (see P . 34) Steele's Geological Cabinet, Containing 125 carefully selected specimens. In four parts. Sold separately, t desired. See circular for details. 28 Th e JVationai Series of Standard SchoolSookt. Peck's Ganot's Popular Physics. TESTIMONIALS. From Pbot. Alonzo Collin, Cornell College, Iowa. I am pleased with it. I have decided to introduce it as a text-boob. From H. P. Johnson, President Madison College, Sharon, MLr I am pleased with Peck's Ganot, and think it a magnificent book. From Prof. Edwabd Brooks, Pennsylvania State Normal School. So eminent are its merits, that it will be introduced as the text-book upon ta mentary physics in this institution. From H. H. Lockwood, Professor Natural Philosophy XL S. Nanal Academy. I am so pleased with it that I will probably add it to a course of lecture*, given U the midshipmen of this school on physics. From Geo. S. Maokte, Professor Natural History Uniter&ty of Nashville, Tenn. I have decided on the introduction of Peck's Ganot's Philosophy, as I am satis fled that it is the best book for the purposes of my pupils that X have seen, con* bining simplicity of explanation with elegance of illustration. From W. S. MoBae, Superintendent Vevay Public Schools, Indiana. Having carefully examined a number or text-books on natural philosophy, I do not hesitate to express my decided opinion in favor of Peck's Ganot. The matter, style, and illustration eminently adapt the work to the popular wants. From Rev. Samuel MoKinnet, D.D., PresH Austin College, HuntsniUe, Texas. It gives me pleasure to commend it to teachers. I have taught some classes with It as our text, and must say, for simplicity of style and clearness of illustration, 1 have found nothing as yet published of equal value to the teacher and pupil. From C. V. Speak, Principal Maplewood Institute, Pittsfleld, Mass. I am mnch pleased with its ample illustrations by plates, and its clearness and simplicity of statement. It covers the ground usually gone over by our higher classes, and contains many fresh illustrations from lite or daily occurrences and new applications of scientific principles to such. From J. A, Banjteld, Superintendent Marshall Public Schools, Michiga , I have used Peck's Ganot since 1863, and with increasing pleasure and s»l.sta> tion each term. I consider it superior to any other work on physics in its a iayia- tion to our high schools and academies. Its illustrations are superb- better than three times their number of pages of fine print. From A. SoHtnrLEB, Prof, of Mathematics in Baldwin University, Berea, thio. After a careful examination of Peck's Ganot's Natural Philosophy, and at actus! Best of its merits as a text-book, I can heartily recommend it as admirably (Japted K> meet the wants of the grade of students for which it is intended. Its diagrams and illustrations are unrivaled. We use it in the Baldwin University. From T>. C. Van Norman, Principal Van Norman Institute, New York. The Natural Philosophy of M. Ganot. edited by Prof. Peck, is, fa my opinion, 'file best work of its kind, for the use intended, ever pubhehed in tWs .country , Whether regarded in relation to the natural order of the topta, the precision and relearness oflts definitions, or the fullness and beauty of its iltaBirnlionB, it is cei tainly, I think, an advance. ^S~ For many similar testimonials, see current numbers of Out HSietrated 2o OOfttional Bulletin. 29 The National Series of Standard SchoolSookt. ' - NATURAL SCIENCE— Continued. CHEMISTRY. Porter's First Book of Chemistry, Porter's Principles of Chemistry, The above are widely known aa the productions of one of the most eminent scien- tific men of America. The extreme simplicity in the method of presenting the science, while exhaustively treated, has excited universal commendation. ^Darby's Text-Book of Chemistry, Pnrely a Chemistry, divesting the subject of matters comparatively foreign to It (such as heat, light, electricity, etc.), but usually allowed to engross too much atten- tion in ordinary school-books. Gregory's Chemistry, (Organic and Inorganic, each) The science exhaustively treated. For colleges and medical students. Steele's Fourteen Weeks Course, A successful effort to reduce the study to the limits of a single term. (See page 34.) Steele's Chemical Apparatus, Adequate to the performance of all the important experiments. BOTANY. Thinker's First Lessons in Botany, For children. The technical terms are largely dispensed with in favor of an easy and familiar style adapted to the smallest learner. Wood's Object-Lessons in Botany, Wood's American Botanist and Florist, Wood's New Class-Book of Botany, The standard text-books of the United States in this department. In style the .are simple, popular, and lively ; in arrangement, easy and natural ; In description, Sraphic and strictly exact. The Tables for Analysis are reduced to a perfect system, [ore are annually sold than of all others combined. Wood's Descriptive Botany, $1.25 A complete Flora of all Plants growing east of the Mississippi River. Wood's Illustrated Plant Record 55 A simple form of Blanks for recording observations in the field. Wood's Botanical Apparatus 8.00 A portable Trunk, containing Drying Press, Knife, Trowel, Microscope, and Tweezers, and a copy of Wood's Plant Record— the Collector's complete outfit. Willis's Flora of New Jersey, 1.50 The most useful book of reference ever published for collectors in all parts of the country. It contains also a Botanical Directory, with addresses of living American botanists. Young's Familiar Lessons in Botany, 1.40 Combining simplicity of diction with some degree of technical and scientific knowledge, for intermediate classes. Specially adapted for the Southwest. Darby's Southern Botany, 1.40 Embracing general Structural and Physiological Botany, with vegetable products, and descriptions of Southern plants, and a complete Flora of tho Southern States. Steele's 14 Weeks Course in Botany— (see p. 34). . . 1.00 30 The jmtional Series of Standard School- Sooks. NATURAL SCIENCE— Continued. PHYSIOLOGY. Jarvis' Elements oi Physiology, Jarvis' Physiology and Laws of Health, The only books extant which approach this subject with a proper view of the true object of teaching Physiology in schools, viz., that scholars may know how to take care of their own health. In hold contrast with the abstract Anatomies, which children learn as they would Greek or Latin (and forget as soon), to discipline the Kiind, are these test-books, using the science as a secondary consideration, and on]/ so far as is necessary for the comprehension of the laws of limtth. Hamilton's Vegetable and Animal Physiology, The two branches of the science combined in one volume lead the student to a proper comprehension of the Analogies of Nature. Steele's Fourteen Weeks Course, In the popular style, avoiding technical and purely scientific formulas. It con- tains beautiful and vivid illustrations, some or them colored, and a blackboard analysis of the skeleton. The sections on diseases and accidents, and their prompt home treatment, give the book great practical value (see p. Si). ASTRONOMY. Willard's School Astronomy, By means of clear and attractive illustrations, addressing the eye in many cases by analogies, careful definitions of all necessary technical termB, a careful avoidance of verbiage and unimportant matter, particular attention to analysis, and a general adoption of the simplest methods. Mrs. Willard has made the best and most at* tractive elementary Astronomy extant. Mclntyre's Astronomy and the Globes, A complete treatise for intermediate classes. Highly approved. Bartlett's Spherical Astronomy, The West Point course, for advanced classes, with applications to the current wants of Navigation, Geography, and Chronology. Steele's Fourteen Weeks Course, Seduced to a single term, and better adapted to school use than any work here- tofore published. Not written for the information of scientific men, but for the inspiration of youth, the pages are not burdened with a multitude of figures which no memory could possibly retain. The whole subject is presented in a clear and concise form. (See p. 84) NATURAL HISTORY. Carll's Child's Book of Natural History, Illustrating the Animal, Vegetable, and Mineral Kingdoms, with applicatien te the Aits. For beginners. Beautifully and copiously illustrated. ZOOLOGY. Chambers' Elements of Zoology, A complete and comprehensive system of Zoology, adapted lor academic in ?trnc- tion, presenting a systematic view of the Animal Kingdom as a portion of externa* Nature. Steele's Fourteen Weeks Course, Notable for its superb and entertaining illustrations, which include every ani- mal named ■ blackboard tables of classification and tabular review of the whole animal kingdom ; interesting and characteristic facts and anecdotes ; directions for v.llecting and preserving specimens, etc., etc. (See p. 34.) 32 National Series of Standard School- Books* Jams' Physiology and Laws of Health. TESTIMONIALS. From Samuel B. McLane, Superintendent Public Schools, Keokuk, Iowa. I am glad to see a really good text-book on this much neglected branch. This is dear, concise, accurate, and eminently adapted to the class-room. From William P. Wykrs, Principal of Academy West Chester, Pennsylvania. A thorough examination has satisfied me of its superior claims as a text-book to tic! attention of teacher and taught I shall introduce it at once. Prom H. R. Sanfohd, Principal of Bast Oer»esee Conference Seminary, N. Y. ^ •* Jarvis' Physiology" is received, and fully met our expectations. W« immediately Adopted it. From Isaac T. Goodnow, State Svperintendent of Kansas—published in connection with the " School Law." " Jarvis* Physiology," a common-sense, practical work, with just enough of anat- omy to understand the physiological portions. The last six pages, on Man's Respon sibility for bis own health, are worth the price of the book. From D. W. Stevens, Superintendent Public Schools, Fall River, Mass. I have examined JarviB* *' Physiology and Laws of Health,** which you had the kindness to send to me a short time ago. In my judgment it is far the best work ol the kind within my knowledge. It has been adopted as a text-book in our public schools. From Henet G. Denny, Chairman Book Committee, Boston, Mass. The very excellent " Physioiogy " of TfZ. Jarvis I had Introduced into our High School, where the study had been temporarily dropped, believing it to be by far the best work of the kind that had come under my observation ; indeed, the reintroduc- feion of the study was delayed for some months, because Dr. Jarvis 1 book could not be had, and we were unwilling to take any other. From Psor. A. P. Pbabodt, D.D., LL.D., Harvard University. * * I have been in the habit of examining school-books with great care, and I hesitate not to say that, of all the text-books on Physiology which have been given to the public, Dr. Jarvis 1 deserves the first place on the score of accuracy, thoroughness method, simplicity of statement, and constant reference to topics of practical interest and utility. From Jambs N. Towhsend, Superintendent Public Schools, Hudson, N. Y. Every human being is appointed to take charge of his own body; and of all books written upon this subject, I know of none which will so well prepare one to do this as 11 Jarvis' Physiology" — that is, iu so small a compass of matter. It considers the pure, simple laws of health paramount to science ; and though the work is thoroughly scientific, it is divested of all cumbrous technicalities, and presents the subject of phy- sical life in a manner and style really charming. It is unquestionably the best text- book on physiology I have ever seen. It is giving great satisfaction in the schools ol this city, where it has been adopted as the standard. From L. J. Banfoed, M.D., Prof. Anatomy and Physiology in Yale College Books on human physiology, designed for the use of schools, are more generally a failure perhaps than are school-books on most other subjects. The great want in this department is met, we think, in the well-written treatise of Dri Jarvis, entitled u Physiology and Laws of Health." * • The work is not too detailed nor too expansive in any department, and is clear and concise in all. It is not burdened with an excess of anatomical description, nor rendered discursive by many zoological references. Anatomical statements are made to the extent of quali fying the student to attend, understanding^, to an exposition of those functional pro senses which, collectively, make up health; thus the laws of health are enunciated, and many suggestions are given which, if heeded, will tend to Its preservation. **" For further testimony of similar character, see current numbers of the illus tratod Educational Bulletin. 33 The National Series of Standard SchoolSooks. NATURAL SCIENCE. "FOURTEEN WEEKS" IN EACH BKANCH. By J, DORMAN STEELE, A.M. Steele's 14 Weeks Course in Chemistry (New Ed.) Steele's 14 Weeks Course in Astronomy Steele's 14 Weeks Course in Philosophy Steele's 14 Weeks Course in Geoiogy Steele's 14 Weeks Course in Physiology Steele's 14 Weeks Course in Zoology Steele's 14 Weeks Course in Botany Oar Text-Books in these studies are, as a general thing, doll and uninteresting. , They contain from 400 to 600 pages of dry facts and unconnected details. They abound in that which the student cannot learn, much less remember. The papil commences the study, is confused by the fine print and coarse print, and neither knowing exactly what to learn nor what to hasten over, is crowded through the single term generally assigned to each branch, and frequently comes to the close without a definite and exact idea of a single scientific principle. Steele's Fourteen Weeks Courses contain only that which every well-informed person should know, while all that which concerns only the professional scientist is omitted. The language is clear, simple, and interesting, and the illustrations bring the subject within the range of home life and daily experience. They give such of the general principles and the prominent facts as a pupil can make famil- iar as household words within a single term. The type is large and open ; there is no fine print to annoy; the cuts are copies of genuine experiments or natural phenomena, and are of fine execution. In fine, by a Bystem of condensation peculiarly his own, the author reduces each branch to the limits of a single term of study, while sacrificing nothing that is es- sential, and nothing that is usually retained from the study of the larger manuals in common use. Thus the student has rare opportunity to economise his time, or rather to employ that which he has to the best advantage. A notable feature is the author's charming " style," fortified by an enthusiasm over his subject in which the student will not fail to partake. Believing that Natural Science is full of fascination, he has moulded it into a form that attracts the attention and kindles the enthusiasm of the pupil. The recent editions contain the author's " Practical Questions" on a plan never before attempted in scientific text-books. These are questions as to the nature and cause of common phenomena, and are not directly answered in the text, the design being to test and promote an intelligent use of the student's knowledge of the foregoing principles. ''Steele's General Key to his Works, $1.00 This work is mainly composed of Answers to the Practical Questions, and Solu- tions of the Problems, in the author's celebrated "Fourteen Weeks Courses " in the several sciences, with many hints to teachers, minor Tables. &c. Should be on every teacher's desk. 34 The National Series of Standard School-Hooks. Steele's 14 Weeks in each Science. TESTIMONIALS. From L. A. Bnrr/rc, President N. C. College. Z hare not been disappointed. Shall take pleasure in introducing this series. From J. F. Cox, Prest. Southern Female College, Ga. I am much pleased with these books, and expect to introduce them. From 3. E. Bbahham, Prin. Brownsville Female College, Term. They are capital little books, and axe now in use in our institution. From W. H. Goodale, Professor Beadville Seminary, La. Wc are using your 14 Weeks Course, and are much pleased with them. From W. A. Boles, SupL ShelbyvWe Graded School, Jnd. They are as entertaining as a story book, and much more improving to the mind, From S. A. Snow, Principal of High School, Uxbridge, Mass. Steele's 11 Weeks Courses in the Sciences are a perfect success. From John W. Douohtt, Newburg Free Academy, N. T. T was prepared to find Prof. Steele's Course both attractive and instructive. My highest expectations have been fully realized. From 3. S. Blackweix, Prest. Ghent College, Ky. Prof. Steele's unexampled success in providing for the wants of academic classes, has led me to look forward with high anticipations to his forthcoming issue. From 3. V. Coos, Prest. La Grange College, Mo. I am pleased with the neatness of these books and the delightful diction. I have been teaching for years, and have never seen a lovelier little volume than the As. tronomy. From M. W. Smith, Prin. of Sigh School, Morrison, IB. They seem to me to be admirably adapted to the wants of a public school, con- taining, as they do, a sufficiently comprehensive arrangement of elementary prin- ciples to excite a healthy thirst for a more thorough knowledge of those sciences. From 3. D. Baktley, Prin. of High School, Concord, JT. B. They are just such books as I have looked for, viz., those of interesting style, not cumbersome and tilled up with things to be omitted by the pupil, and yet suf- ficiently full of facts for the purpose of most scholars in these sciences in our high schools ; there is nothing but what a pupil of average ability can thoroughly master. From Aionzo Nortom Lewis, Principal of Parker Academy, Conn. I consider Steele's Fourteen Weeks Courses in Philosophy, Chemistry, at last supplied with an American edition of this famous text-book. Many of our best institutions have for years been procuring it from abroad rather than forego the advantages it offers. The policy of putting students who have acquired some proficiency from the ordinary text-books, into a Grammar written in the vernacular, cannot be too highly commended It affords an opportu- nity for finish and review at once ; while embodying abundant practice of its own rules. / Joynes' French Pronunciation, Willard's Histon'a de Ios Estados Unidos, The History of the United States, translated bv Professors Tolon and De Tornos will be found a valuable, instructive, and entertaining reading-book for Spanish 40 The JVationat aeries or Standard School-Slooks. Pujol's Complete French Olass-Book. TESTIMONIALS. From- Prof. Ellas Peissher, Union College. I take great pleasure in recommending Pujol and Van Norman's French Class- Book, as there is no French grammar or class-book which can he compared with It in completeness, system, clearness, and general utility. . From Edward North, President of Hamilton College. I have carefully examined Pujol and Van Norman's French Class-Book, and am satisfied of its superiority, for college purposes, over any other heretofore used We shall Pit fail to use it with our next claBS in French. Fmm-A. Curtis, PresHof Cincinnati Literary and Scientific Institute. I am confident that it may he made an instrument in conveying to the student, *n frjm six months to a year, the art of speaking and writing the French with llmopt native fluency and propriety. from Hiram Orcutt, A. M., Prin. (rlenwood and TUden Ladies'' Seminaries. I have used Pujol's French Grammar in' my two seminaries, exclusively, for more than a year, and have no hesitation in saying that I regard it the best text- book in this department extant And my opinion is confirmed by the testimony of Prof. F. De Launay and Mademoiselle Marindin. They assure me that the took is eminently accurate and practical, as tested in the school-room. From Pbof. Theo. F. Db Fumat, Hebrew Educational Institute, Memphis, Tenn, M*. Pujol's French Grammar is one of the best and most practical works. The French language is chosen and elegant in style — modern and easy. It is far su- perior to the other French class-books in this country. The selection of the con- versational part is very good, and will interest pupils ; and being all completed in only one volume, it is especially desirable to have it introduced in our schools. From Prop. Jambs H. Worman, Bordentown Female College, N. J. The work is upon the same plan as the text-books for the study of French and English published in Berlin, for the study of those who have not the aid of a teacher, and these books are considered, by the first authorities, the best books. In most of our institutions, Americans teach the modern languages, and hereto- fore the trouble has been to give them a text-book that would dispose of the difficulties of the French pronunciation. This difficulty is successfully removed by P. and Van N., and I have every reason to believe it will soon make its way Into most of our best schools. From Prof. Charles S. Son, Ann Smith Academy, Lexington, Va. I cannot do better than to recommend "Pujol and Van Norman." For compre- hensive and systematic arrangement, progressive and thorough development oi all grammatical principles and idioms, with a due admixture of theoretical knowl- edge and practical exercise, I regard it as superior to any (other) book of the kind. From A. A. Forster, Prin. Pinehurst School, Toronto, C. W. I have great satisfaction in bearing testimony to M. Pujol's System of French Instruction, as given in his complete class-book. For clearness and comprehen- siveness, adapted for all classes of pupils, I have found it superior to any other work of the kind, and have now need it for some years in my establishment with great success. From Prof. Otto Feddbr, Maplewood Institute, Pittsfleld, Mass. The conversational exercises will prove an immense saving of the hardest kind CI labor to teachers. There is scarcely any thing more trying in the way of teaching language, than to rack your brain for short and easily intelligible bits 'of conversation, and to repeat them time and again with no better result than extorting at long intervals a doubting " oui," or a hesitating » non, monsieur " E3?~ For further testimony of a similar character, see peciai uircular. and urre'it numbers of the Educational Bulletin. The National Series of Standard School- 2?oo&*. *- ■ ■"• Worman's German Grammars. TBSTIMONIALS. From Prof. E. "W. Jones, Petersburg Female College, Va. From what I have seen of the work it is almost certain / shall introduce U Into this institution. • From Prof. G. Campbell, University of Minnesota. A valuable addition to our school-books, and will find many friends, and do gre;A good. From Prof. O. H P. Cobfbew, Mary Military Inst , Md. I am better pleased with them than any I hare ever taught I have already ordered through our booksellers. From Prof. R. S. Kendall, Vernon Academy, Conn. I at once put the Elementary Grammar into the bands of a class of beginners, and have used it with great satisfaction. From Prof. D. E. Holmes, Berlin Academy, Wis. Worman's German works are superior. I shall use them hereafter in my German classes. From Prof. Magnus BuonnoLTZ, Hiram College, Ohio. I have examined the Complete Grammar, and find it excellent. You may rely that it will be used here. From Prin. Thos. W. Tobey, Paducah Female Seminary, Ky. The Complete German Grammar is worthy of an extensive circulation. It Is ad mirably adapted to the class-room. I shall use it From Prof. Alex. Bobenspitz, Houston Academy, Texas- Bearer will take and pay for 3 dozen copies. Mr. "Worm&n deserves the approbation and esteem of the teacher and the thanks of the student From Prof. G. Maluene, Augusta Seminary, Maine. The Complete Grammar cannot fail to give great satisfaction by the simplicity of its arrangement, and by its completeness. From Prin. Oval Fibkey, Christian University, Mo. Just such a series as is positively necessary. I do hope the author will succeed as veil in the French, &c, as he has in the German. From Prof. 8. D. Hillhan, Dickinson College, Pa. The class have lately commenced, and my examination thus far warrants me in say ■ ing that I regard it as the best grammar for instruction in the German. From Prin. Silas Livxkmoeb, Bloomfield Seminary, Mo. I have found a classically and scientifically educated Prussian gentleman whom I propose to make German instructor. 1 have shown him both your German grammars. He has expressed his approbation of them generally. From Prof. Z. Test, Rowland School for Young Ladies, 2T. T. I shall introduce the books. From a cursory examination I have no hesitation in pronouncing the Complete Grammar a decided improvement on the text-books at present in use in this country. From Prof. Lewis Kistleb, Northwestern University, III. Ilaving looked through the Complete Grammar with some care I must say that you have produced a good book ; you may be awarded with this gratification—that your grammar promotes the facility of learning the German language, and of becoming acquainted with its rich literature. * From Pres. J. P. Rous, Stoekwell Collegiate Inst., Ind. , I supplied a class with the Elementary Grammar, and it gives complete satisfac- tion. The conversational and reading exercises are well calculated to illustrate the principles, and lead the student on an easy yet thorough course, I think the Com plate Grammar equally attractive. 43